\A/
dtamtott IBms Stxitt
GOSPEL OF SAINT MARK
IN GOTHIC
SKEAT
Honfcon
HENRY FROWDE
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE
7 PATERNOSTER ROW
Qibk > Gothic
it*
THE
GOSPEL OF SAINT MARK
IN GOTHIC
ACCORDING TO THE TRANSLATION MADE BY
WULFILA
IN THE FOURTH CENTURY
EDITED, WITH A GRAMMATICAL INTRODUCTION
AND GLOSSARIAL INDEX
BY THE
REV. WALTER W. SKEAT, M.A.
ELRINGTON AND BOSWORTH PROFESSOR OF ANGLO-SAXON IN THE UNIVERSITY
OF CAMBRIDGE
(iNfarfc
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
MDCCCLXXXII
L All rights reserved ']
toboinTto, cjj^isr.
\T k M M L7 \l A D £, H C\
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Preface vii
Introduction. § i. Gothic and Goths. § 2. Wulfila. § 3.
His translation. § 4. The Codex Argenteus. § 5. Other
MSS. § 6. Various editions, &c. § 7. Sources of the
Gothic Alphabet. § 8. Specimen of the writing. § 9.
The Gothic language. § 10. The alphabet. § 11. Sounds:
the vowels. § 12. Sounds: the consonants. § 13. Pho-
nology: the vowels. § 14. Phonology: the consonants.
§ 15. Substantives (in general). § 16. Strong declension
of substantives : A-form. § 1 7. The same : I-form. §18.
The same : U-form. § 19. Bases in -ar. § 20. Bases in
-anda, -onda. § 21. Weak declension of substantives.
§ 22. Adjectives (in general). § 23. Strong declension of
adjectives: A-form. §24. The same: I-form. § 25. The
same : U-form. § 26. Weak declension of adjectives.
§ 27. Comparison of adjectives. § 28. Participles. § 29.
Proper Names and Foreign Words. § 30. Numerals.
§ 31. Pronouns. § 32. Verbs (in general). § 33. Re-
duplicating Verbs. § 34. Strong verbs with vowel-change.
§ 35- Weak Verbs. § 36. Verbs in -nan. § 37. Passive
and Middle Voice. § 38. Anomalous and auxiliary verbs.
§ 39. Adverbs. § 40. Prepositions. § 41. Conjunctions.
§ 42. Interjections. § 43. Prefixes. § 44-49. Syntax.
§ 50. Epitome of inflexions ix
Gospel of St. Mark in Gothic 1
Notes on various Constructions, &c 41
List of Words of common occurrence .... 59
Glossarial Index 61
PREFACE.
The following pages are intended to serve as a Gothic
Primer, and to introduce the beginner to fuller and more
complete works upon the subject. There is no lack of good
editions in German, such as those by Gabelentz and Lobe,
Massmann, and Stamm (as revised by Heyne). The price
of the last of these is so moderate as to render it unneces-
sary to reprint all the fragments of the extant Gothic litera-
ture ; but it appeared to be desirable to select a certain
portion of it, which might be explained, by the help of notes,
glossary, and grammar, for the benefit of English readers.
As the best MS. contains the four gospels only, the choice
was practically limited to one of these ; and the gospel of
St. Mark was chosen, because it is the least mutilated. Of
the other gospels, whole chapters are wanting, but the missing
portions of St. Mark are comparatively small, viz. vi. 30-53,
xii. 38-xiii. 16, xiii. 29-xiv. 4, xiv. 16-41, and xvi. 12-20,
amounting to not more than 95 verses.
The notes call attention to such difficulties of construction
as are most likely to cause perplexity. The glossary not
only explains all the words occurring in St. Mark's gospel,
but is extended so as to contain all the more important words
of the language, especially such as are most required by the
student of English etymology. The introduction gives all
necessary elementary information concerning the MS., the
author, and the sources of the alphabet ; with some account
Vlll PREFACE,
of the pronunciation, phonology, and grammar. Numerous
references to the text have been introduced into the grammar,
and several remarks ar,e made relative to points of philologi-
cal interest. The student who has already some knowledge
of Middle English and Anglo-Saxon will not experience
much difficulty in gaining, in a short time, some elementary
and very useful knowledge of Gothic. A study of this lan-
guage is absolutely indispensable for the student of Teutonic
philology, and the number of points of English etymology
which cannot be fully understood without it, is surprisingly
large. A knowledge of Gothic ought to be as common
among Englishmen as it is now rare; and I trust, for the
sake of English scholarship, that the present attempt to
smooth the way for those who wish to understand more
about the formation of the Teutonic part of our own
language, may meet with some success.
The Glossarial Index, which I have carefully revised, was
almost wholly written by my eldest daughter. For several
hints as to the phonology I am indebted to Mr. Sweet.
A more complete Glossary, with references to all the
extant writings of Wulfila, was published for the Philological
Society by Asher and Co. in 1868, and was written by
myself. It is remarkable that no glossary or grammar of
Gothic has ever appeared with explanations in English,
except that volume and the present one.
INTRODUCTION.
§ i. The language in which the text of St. Mark's Gospel,
as here printed, was originally written, is commonly called
f Mceso-Gothic ; ' or, as no confusion with any other Gothic
dialect can arise — for no remains of other dialects are ex-
tant — it is often called by the simpler and sufficient name of
'Gothic.' The Goths consisted of numerous tribes, the most
important being the Ostro-Goths or Eastern Goths, and the
Visigoths (Wisigoths) or Western Goths, who, at the be-
ginning of the fourth century, occupied the country to the
north of the Danube, then called Dacia, but now Wallachia.
Some of the Visigoths, who had been converted to Chris-
tianity and experienced persecution on account of their
religion, were allowed to cross the Danube into Mcesia,
the modern Bulgaria, before a.d. 337; but it was not till
a. d. 376 that vast numbers of them, amounting to nearly
a million of people of all ages and of both sexes, were
permitted by the emperor Valens to establish themselves
in that province. The cause which drove them to implore
the Emperor's protection was their fear of the Huns, whose
attacks they were unable to resist. When once firmly estab-
lished in Mcesia, quarrels arose between them and the
Roman empire ; finally, they revolted, gained several battles
against the Romans, sacked Rome under the leadership of
Alaric in 410, and even extended their conquests as far
as Gaul and Spain. We must therefore take Mceso-Gothic '
to denote a dialect spoken by some of the Visigoths who
X WULFILA. [§§ 2> 3-
at one time were settled in Moesia; its exact bounds are
uncertain, and the fragments of it which have survived are
almost all due to the writings of a celebrated Christian
bishop named Wulfila 1 , though he is better known as Ul-
philas (or Ulfilas), a form due to a Graecised spelling.
§ 2. The parents of Wulfila were Christians, of Cappa-
docian origin, having been carried away as captives by the
Goths in one of their raids into Asia; and it would seem
that the Goths first acquired a knowledge of Christianity
from their captives. Wulfila himself was born among the
Goths, a. d. 311, so that Gothic was his native language;
but 'he was able in after-life to speak and write both in
Latin and Greek 2 .' It was under the conduct of Wulfila,
then quite a young man, that some of the Christian Goths
were allowed to cross the Danube (as above stated) by the
favour of Constantine. He was consecrated bishop by
Eusebius of Nicomedia at the early age of thirty, a. d. 341.
He was still alive when the Visigoths, under Fritigern,
inflicted a crushing defeat on the forces of Valens at the
great battle of Adrianople, a. d. 378; and he died at the
age of seventy, a. d. 381 3 . Little more is known about
his life, except that he adopted the Arian heresy, which
doubtless exposed him to attacks from the followers of
Athanasius.
§ 3. The industry of Wulfila has conferred one of the
1 Wulfila means ' little wolf,' and is the diminutive of wulfs, a wolf,
formed like magula, a little boy, from magus, a boy. The actual
spelling Wulfila occurs in Jornandes, as cited by Gibbon, Decline and
Fall of the Roman Empire, c. xxxvii, note.
2 Max Midler, Lectures on Language, vol. i. lect. 5 ; see, in par-
ticular, his quotation from Auxentius, in note 11.
3 The three dates, of Wulfila's birth, consecration, and death, in 311,
341, and 381, are easily remembered. Waitz gives 388 as the year of
his death ; but this seems to be wrong.
§§4,5-1 THE CODEX ARGENTEUS. XI
highest benefits upon philology, whilst at the same time
it did excellent service in the cause of religion. He con-
ceived the bold idea of translating the scriptures into the
'vulgar tongue,' and actually succeeded in this important
task. He translated the whole of the Old Testament, with
the exception of the Book of Kings, from the Greek
(Septuagint) version, and the whole of the New Testament
from a Greek version closely resembling that from which
our own ' authorised version ' was made. It is much to
be regretted that only fragments of his work have come
down to us in various imperfect MSS. ; but to possess even
these fragments is a very great gain.
§ 4. The most important of these MSS. is not contem-
porary with the author, but is a good and early copy written
in the sixth century, and known as the Codex Argenteus, or
' Silver manuscript,' being written chiefly in letters of silver,
occasionally of gold, upon a parchment stained so as to
present a rich mulberry-tinted colour. It was taken from
Prague by the Swedes in 1648, and is now carefully pre-
served at Upsal. This MS. is imperfect, but contains large
portions of the Gospels, and is the one upon which the text
here printed is founded. A most carefully printed copy of
it was edited by Uppstrom, and published at Upsal, 1854-
1857. It represents the MS. just as it stands, being printed
line for line in double columns ; and it is to this edition that
nearly all the other numerous editions are most indebted.
The best modern edition is, upon the whole, that by Stamm
and Heyne, which I have closely followed .
§ 5. Other MSS. are extant at Wolfenbiittell, Milan,
1 The title is — Friedrich Ludwig Stamm's Ulfilas, oder die uns er-
haltenen Denkmaler der gothischen Sprache . . . Neu herausgegeben von
Dr. Moritz Heyne. Siebente Auflage. Paderborn, 1878.
xii VARIOUS EDITIONS. [§ 6.
Vienna, and Rome, and preserve various fragments of the
same translation. In this way we possess fragments of
Genesis, Ezra, Nehemiah, the four Gospels, and parts of
many of St. Paul's epistles. In the same language are also
found an explanation or commentary upon a part of the
Gospel of St. John, entitled by Massmann Skeireins
aiwaggeljons ihairh Johannen (explanation of the gospel by
John), some title-deeds to property, found at Naples and
Arezzo, and a fragment of a calendar. Some have attri-
buted to Wulfila the authorship of the above commentary ;
but there is no proof that it is his. The other documents
are of little consequence.
§ 6. For further information about Wulfila, see Max Miiller,
Lectures on the Science of Language, vol. i. lect. 5, which
should by all means be consulted; Gibbon's Decline and
Fall of the Roman Empire, capp. 26 and 37 ; cap. 7 of
the preface to Bosworth's Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, London,
1838; Waitz, Ueber das Leben und die Lehre des Ulfila,
Hannover, 1840; Bessell, Ueber das Leben des Ulfila,
Gottingen, i860; and the various editions of Wulfila' s trans-
lation. In the introduction to my Moeso-Gothic Glossary
(Asher & Co., 1868), I give an account of all the MSS.
and editions. The best editions are the following. Ulfilas,
by Gabelentz and Lobe, 2 vols. 410., Lipsiae, 1836-1843; a
very complete work, with a full Glossary, Grammar, &c.
Ulfilas, Urschrift, Grammatik und Worterbuch ; by I. Gau-
gengigl, Passau, 1849, l8 5 6 - Ulfilas; by H. F. Massmann,
Stuttgart, 1857. Vulfila; by E. Bernhardt, Halle, 1876.
The edition by Stamm and Heyne has been already men-
tioned. One excellent feature of Massmann's edition is that
it gives, not only the Gothic text, but also the Greek and
Latin texts of the gospels and epistles, in parallel columns.
Another very useful volume is 'The Gothic and Anglo-Saxon
§ 7.] THE GOTHIC ALPHABET. Xlll
Gospels, in parallel columns with the versions of Wycliffe
and Tyndale ; by the Rev. J. Bosworth, D.D. and G. Waring,
M.A.; London, 1865/ A handsome quarto edition of the
four Gospels, which had been prepared by Dr. Eric Benzelius,
was published by Lye at Oxford in 1750 1 ; it was printed at
the Clarendon Press with the * Gothic ' type which Junius
presented to the University of Oxford after it had been em-
ployed for his own edition, published at Dordrecht in 1665.
This type, in which the letters of the Gothic alphabet are
closely imitated, is still preserved, and I am enabled by means
of it, to give the specimens on pp. xviii. and xxi.
§ 7. It is highly probable that Wulfila himself is to be
credited with the invention of the so-called Gothic alphabet.
It has long been observed that the alphabet is a compound
one, being imitated partly from the Greek and partly from
the Latin alphabet ; but some uncertainty has existed as to
the exact history of a few of the letters. The late publica-
tions of the Palseographical Society have enabled me, as I
believe, to illustrate this matter in a very simple manner. If
it be the case that the Gothic alphabet was thus com-
pounded of two others, it would obviously be a great gain
to find bilingual MSS. exhibiting the exact form of the
Greek and Latin letters at the same moment of time. A few
such exist, one of them being the well-known Codex Bezae
at Cambridge, a MS. of the sixth century, exemplified in
plates 14 and 15 of the Palaeographic Society's facsimiles.
Another is a MS. of the Acts of the Apostles, of the
seventh century, known as MS. Laud 35, and preserved in
the Bodleian Library at Oxford. There is a beautiful fac-
simile of a page of this MS. in plate 80 of the same series ;
1 Though this book is generally said to be out of print, I am told that
three copies of it still remain at Oxford.
XIV THE GOTHIC ALPHABET, [§ 7.
and a fair imitation of it at the top of plate 10 in Westwood's
Palseographia Sacra Pictoria. When this plate 80 was first
published in 1877, I well remember that, at the very first
glance, it occurred to me that the letters presented an extra-
ordinary resemblance to those of the Codex Argenteus, not
merely in shape, but in actual size. On a closer examination,
I found that the plate contained all the Gothic letters but
one, viz. ; and it was at once obvious that the Gothic letters
denoted in this edition by a, b, g, d, e, z, th, t, k, /, m, n, p, /,
w, ch, and hw, corresponded to the Greek capital letters
A, B, r, A, E, z, $, I, K, a, M, N, II, T, Y, x, and e respec-
tively ; whilst the Gothic kw, h,j, u, r, s, and/* corresponded
to the Latin capital letters U, H, G, U inverted, R, S, and F
respectively. In order to enable the reader to see this for
himself, I have prepared the illustrative diagram printed upon
the opposite page, which I now proceed to explain. Line 1
contains the Gothic letters, copied from the facsimile of a
page of the Codex Argenteus given in Plate 118 of the
Palaeographic Society, and marked 'Gothic Gospels. — (6th
cent.) Upsala, Univ. Lib. Cod. Argent.' It will be under-
stood that the written letters of the codex are not all
precisely alike, but it will be found that the letter a in my
illustration agrees exactly with one of the examples of the
letter a in Plate 118; and so of the other letters. Line 2
contains Greek letters, copied from Plate 80, column 2, in
which again, though the letters are of variable size, I have
exactly copied the best example of each letter. Lastly, line 3
contains Latin letters, copied from Plate 80, column 1. The
similarity is sufficiently close in every instance, and any dis-
similarity may be readily accounted for by the slight differ-
ence in the date of the MSS. If we had more numerous
Greek and Latin bilingual MSS. of an early date, it is
probable that all dissimilarity, such as now appears in the
7.] GOTHIC, GREEK, AND LATIN. XV
J . Cothic.
M5r\euzhilMKAM
& *b g a. e kw z K til ik 1 »x
W.Crreefc. g
AtfTAe 2 • CDIK\M
ct ft y $ c § *j> i k S u,
u h
u K
I . G-cirkic.
*lj u jp r jS i w £ cK Ixir o
m n tv xe
XVI THE GOTHIC ALPHABET. [§ 7.
case of a and d, would disappear. We can, moreover, easily
see how the Gothic alphabet was formed. Letters were first
selected from the Greek alphabet, as far as seemed advisable ;
and, where no good representatives of the Gothic sounds
appeared in that alphabet, Latin letters were added. In
selecting Greek letters, Wulfila (if we may suppose the
scheme to be his) had no difficulty with a, 5, g> d, e, z, i, k, /,
m, n,p, t' } but the rest require a word of comment. Ch is
not a true Gothic letter, being only used in the word Xpurros
(Christ); hence the Greek x, not being otherwise wanted, was
at once adopted. Next h and/; not being represented in
Greek, were taken from Latin. The Greek <£ 1 and 6, having
(apparently) no exact Gothic values, were arbitrarily chosen
to stand for th and hw ; and it is remarkable that 6 was pur-
posely dissociated from th, as if to mark more plainly some
difference between them. The writer's choice of the Latin
R and S instead of the Greek letters, need not surprise us ;
for both the Greek symbols are ambiguous. The Greek
P (r) might be mistaken for the Latin P (/>); whilst the
Greek C (s) might be mistaken for the Latin C (c). As he
had taken the Greek r for his g, he of course took the
Latin G for the nearly related sound of/ (Germany, Eng-
lish y). It is difficult to see why the Latin u was taken to
represent the Gothic kw, but the identity of the letters can-
not be doubted. This decision led to the curious device of
gaining a new symbol for u by inverting the Latin letter;
whilst the Greek u (y) being thus set free, was adopted for
the Gothic w.
We have now seen the origin of all the letters except that
1 The Gothic th is </>, not ip ; the latter was widely spread at the top,
and had straight sides. The question is settled by comparing other
Gothic MSS. In one of the Milan MSS., the <p is quite distinct, and
closed at the top. See the plate in Gabelentz and Lobe.
§8.] CODEX ARGENTEUS. xvii
of the Gothic o. For this we should have expected that
Wulfila would have chosen either the Gk. omicron (identical
in form with the Latin O) or the Gk. omega. Some have
indeed supposed that the Gothic o is, in fact, the latter, but
a glance at the facsimiles will dispel that illusion ; for the
Gk. omega was not, at that time, written like our modern
printed Q, but was merely a magnified a>, a sort of rounded W.
It seems to me clear that, being dissatisfied with o and ©, the
writer had recourse once more to the principle of inversion,
and chose for this purpose the symbol 8, well known as a
contraction for ov, and originally due to placing v above o.
The last symbol in my illustration is not a good example,
but was the best I could find among the Society's facsimiles ;
it occurs several times in Plate 27, my example being taken
from 1. 14 of the first column. This Plate 27 represents a
page of a Greek Evangelistarium (MS. Harl. 5598 in the
British Museum), written a.d. 995. Considering the great
difference in the date, the resemblance is, I think, sufficient.
Other examples of this symbol may be found in 1. 14, col. 2,
of the same plate; and I have since found another in 1. 28
of Plate 84, the likeness of which to the Gothic symbol is
perfect, though the MS. was not written till a.d. iiii. It
seems to me that, thanks to the Palaeographical Society,
the history of the Gothic alphabet may be considered as
settled.
§•8. It so happens that Plate 118, exhibiting a specimen-
page of the Codex Argenteus, contains a brief extract from
St. Mark's Gospel, c. vii. vv. 3-7. By way of further illus-
tration, I now give the words of c. vii. v. 6 (see p. 16)
exactly as they are written in the MS., using the Gothic types
above referred to. The extract necessarily includes the last
word (hlaif) of v. 5, and the first word (Ith) of v. 7. The
word hairto is divided between the r and /.
b
XVlii SPECIMEN OF GOTHIC WRITING. [§ 8.
hAA^-i* tS A w &hA£9AN<XS uA^
An im.^atsi yA^A nj<jVn}:eTicVA
eSAiA^ bi ixyis ^A^s AuvtAns
sys rAMeAi<J> \sts% mAnAqsi
yAiRiA^M mik sysjtAW* • i'^ hA 1 ^
t# i'xe jzAi^A hABAi* 5ik Mis'i^
Now if we substitute Greek and Roman letters for the above
(with the exception only of the Gothic o, which is retained),
we shall find, even though the ordinary modern type be
employed, a striking resemblance. The following is the
result of the experiment.
HAAIFICJ) IS ANAHAFCANAS UA<)>
Afl IM-(J)ATEI YAIAA nPADFETIAA
ESAIAS Bl IZYIS (|>ANS AIDTANS
SYE TAMEAICJ) 1ST • S^ MANAGEI
YAIRIA^M MIK SY6RAI(J) • 1(f) HAIR
TX IZE FAIRRA HABAlcj) SIK MIS - I cf)
With the transliteration which I have adopted this be-
comes : —
hlaif. Ith is andhafjands kwath
du im. thatei waila praufetida
Esaias bi izwis thans liutans
swe gamelith ist, so managei
wairilom mik sweraith, ith hair-
to ize fairra habaith sik mis. Ith
The corresponding modern English is, literally, as fol-
lows : — loaf. But he answering quoth to them, that well
§ 9 .] THE GOTHIC LANGUAGE. XIX
prophesied Isaiah by 1 you the deceivers, so 2 spoken is :
the multitude with-lips me honour, but (the) heart of-them
far hath itself from-me. But — .
For a further account of the letters, see the explanation of
the Alphabet on p. xxi.
§ 9. The resemblance of Gothic words to English is often
striking. In the above brief extract we may notice hlaif,
loaf; kwath, quoth; waila, well; manage/, many; fair r a,
far. This leads us to a consideration of the position of
Gothic among the Aryan languages.
Its close affinity with English and Dutch is not to be
mistaken, and it evidently belongs to the Low-German di-
vision of the Teutonic dialects. In Dr. Morris's Historical
Outlines of English Accidence, p. 4, we are told that ' the
Teutonic dialects may be arranged in three groups or sub-
divisions : (1) the Low-German; (2) the Scandinavian; (3)
the High-German.' Of these, the first includes Gothic,
English, 3 Frisian, Dutch, Flemish, and Old Saxon (the lan-
guage of the Heliand) ; the second includes Icelandic,
Swedish, Danish, and Norwegian ; and the last includes
only the language usually known by the simpler name of
German. Morris describes Gothic as ' the oldest and most
primitive of the Teutonic dialects, of which any remains are
known; spoken by the Eastern and Western Goths who
occupied the province of Dacia, whence they made in-
cursions into Asia, Galatia, and Cappadocia.' It seems
necessary to add that Wulfila has only preserved for us
specimens of the language of the Western Goths, though that
1 I. e. concerning. 2 I. e. as.
3 Dr. Morris puts English the sixth in the list ; it may just as well
come second, considering its importance and the antiquity of some of its
remains.
XX GOTHIC GRAMMAR. [§ 10.
of the Eastern Goths was doubtless very similar ; also that
the Western Goths were allowed by Valens to cross over
the Danube into Moesia, at a time when the Eastern Goths
remained behind. Morris proceeds to call attention to the
marked distinction between German and all other Teutonic
languages as regards the use of many consonants. ' Thus a
d in English corresponds to a / in German, as dance and
tanz; day and tag; deep and tie/; drink and trink.' But
there is no such difference between English and Gothic,
which has dags for day ; diup-s for deep ; and drigkan (i. e.
drinkari) for to drink. Still more curious is the resemblance
between Gothic and English in certain phrases, such as Ik
im thata daur, I am that (the) door ; hardu ist ihata waurd,
hard is that word; hweitos swe snaiws, white as snow. It
follows that the acquirement of some knowledge of Gothic
is, for an Englishman, rather an easy matter; and, con-
sidering the great philological importance of the language,
especially in matters of etymology and phonetic change, few
linguistic studies are more remunerative. It may, however,
be here remarked that many English words have substituted
r for a more primitive s, which the Gothic has retained;
good examples appear in the words auso, an ear; 6asi } a
berry; hausjan, to hear; hazjan (for nasjan), answering to
Chaucer's herien, to praise ; laisjan, answering to A.S. Idran,
I M.E. leren, to teach ; was/an, to clothe, allied to E. wear.
GRAMMAR.
§ io. THE ALPHABET.
It has already been shown that the forms of the Gothic
letters were imitated from various letters of the Greek and
Latin alphabets. We also find that the Gothic letters were
§10.]
THE ALPHABET,
XXI
used (as in Greek) with a numerical value ; this enables us
to determine their alphabetical order. Some of the letters
are variously represented by modern editors, as will be
explained presently. The following is a table of the cha-
racters (col. i); with their equivalents in the editions (col. 2);
their originals (col. 3) ; and their numerical values (col. 4).
kw (kv, q)
z
h
th(J>)
k
1
m
1. 2. 3. 4.
)V a A 1
B b B 2 g j(y)
r g r 3
<V d A 4
6 e E 5
U kwfkv, a) U* 6
h
II i 1 10
K
A 1 A 30
M m M 40
Remarks. Col. 1. The symbol i is only used when the vowel
begins a word or a syllable. This use is peculiar to Gothic.
Col. 2. German editors write v for w, and consequently kv, hv, for
kw, hw. For kw some (including Stamm) write q, in order to obtain
a symbol expressed by a single character.
For th, many editors use the thorn-letter (]?). Here again, the object
is to obtain a single character ; and there is a faint objection to the use
of th from the fact that a few words contain t and h (separate letters) in
juxta-position. Examples of this are seen in athabaidedun (10. 35)/
athafjan (15. 36), athaihait (3. 13); but an extremely slight acquaint-
ance with the language will enable any reader to recognise in such
1 See note 1 on p. xxxix.
I.
H
9
n
n
s
T
V
p
x
o
w (v), y
f
ch(x)
hw (hv, w, wh)
3-
N
G*
U*t
n
R*
s*
T
T
F *
X
4.
50
60
70
80
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
xxii SOUNDS: THE VOWELS. [§ u.
words the fact that at- is the usual prefix. Englishmen are quite
accustomed to this second signification of th, as e. g. in malthouse, left-
handed, and Greatheart.
For j, Dr. Bosworth and Mr. Cockayne write y, which certainly
expresses the sound ; but this English symbol has been so little used
for the purpose that the German j is perhaps better. Added to which,
the letter y is required to express the Gothic \? when it occurs, in a few
rare instances, as a vowel. Examples are seen in Tyre (7. 24), spyrei-
dans (8. 8), Iairusaulyma (n. 11).
For ch, some write x, as being a single symbol.
For hw Gabelentz writes w, as being a single symbol ; but this is
very unsatisfactory. Dr. Bosworth writes zuh, as in modern English,
but it is far better to use the A.S. hw, with which we may compare the
Icelandic and Swedish hv. His sole objection to the use of hxv is that
h and w are separate letters in the word hwssopo, hyssop ; but as (in
common with the German editors) I denote the vowel-sound of \? byy,
and write hyssopo, this objection altogether disappears.
The system of transliteration adopted in this book, and in my Moeso-
Gothic Glossary (1868), precisely agrees with that adopted by Mass-
mann, except in the use of w, hw, and kw for his v, hv, and kv. This
one change was worth making, for w, hw, and kw represent the prob-
able sound of the Gothic letters.
Col. 3. The letters in this column are Greek capital letters, with the
exception of those marked *, which are Latin. Of the 25 Gothic
letters, 18 are Greek, and 7 are Latin. The symbols for kw, th, hw are
arbitrarily chosen, and have purely conventional values. The Gothic \\
obviously answers rather to the form of h than of H. The symbols
for u and 0, marked f above, are purposely inverted, as if to mark some
slight difference in the sound.
Col. 4. We have examples of the numerical use of the symbols in
Mark iv. 8, where 1- stands for 30, -j- for 60, and -r for 100. The
number 90 was denoted by a symbol resembling the Greek koppa, like
the sign for kw with the second stroke lengthened ; and 900 by a sign
resembling a barbed arrow-head, which took the place of the Greek
sampi.
SOUNDS.
§ ii. VOWELS.
The exact sounds of all the Gothic vowels and diphthongs
are not known with absolute certainty; but from observation
of the Gothic spelling of Greek and Latin words and by
§n.] SOUNDS: THE VOWELS. xxiii
help of comparative philology their approximate values have
been sufficiently ascertained. An account of them may be
found in Mr. Ellis's Early English Pronunciation, p. 561,
which is based upon the researches of Grimm, Rapp, Gabe-
lentz and Lobe, and Weingartner; but this account does
not take into consideration the varying values of ai and au,
as pointed out by Grimm, nor the probable variation in the
sounds of b and d. I have therefore preferred to follow the
account in the excellent Gotische Grammatik by W. Braune
(Halle, Niemeyer, 1880). The following are the most pro-
bable values of the Gothic vowels and diphthongs, with ex-
amples, and key-words from English, German, and French.
VOWELS. KEY-WORDS. EXAMPLES.
a as in man (German) hana (a cock).
Note. This vowel is very common, and is generally short. But in a
very few cases it is long, and has then the full sound of a in father. The
only instances in St. Mark's Gospel which I have noticed are the fol-
lowing: brahtedun (put for dranhtedun*), 11. 7, 12. 4, 15. 1 ; gafahith
(put for gafanhith*), 9. 18; faurahah (put for faurahanh*), 15. 38;
spaikulatur, 6.27; and the proper name Peilatus.
ai (long) as i in bite bait (/ bit).
ai (short) „ e „ th^re bairan (to bear).
Note. The usual and normal sound is the long sound, sometimes
written di to distinguish from the other, though there are no accents in
the MSS. The short sound occurs in the first syllable of reduplicated
verbs, as hai-hald, I held {pronounced hay-hald, with the accent on the
second syllable), or is otherwise due to ' breaking,' explained below
(§ 13, group 2), and only occurs when the following letter is r or h (or
hw). The occurrence of the r or h is accordingly the simplest test for
it, but there are a very few exceptions, only to be explained by etymo-
logy. Examples of the long ai before h occur in aihtedun, 12. 23;
haihamma, 9. 47; and before r in air (pronounced as E. ire), 1. 35.
au (long)
as ou in house
kaus (I chose).
au (short)
„ „ fore
. faura (before).
XXIV SOUNDS: THE VOWELS. [§ u.
Note. The normal sound is the long sound, sometimes written au.
The short sound is due to ' breaking ' (see above) before r and h (or
hw). The exceptions in the latter case are very rare ; but we may notice
the long au in gaurs, 3. 5, hauh, 9. 2 (A. S. heah), bi-tauh, 6. 6, us-tau/i,
I. 12.
WEL
s.
KEY-WORDS.
EXAMPLES.
e
as ey «i
they
wesun (were).
ei
» ^ »>
eve
weis (zw).
i
3» 1 5>
fill 1
ist (is).
( as e in eve, closely ■followed \
X byuin full ; ///<? stress being > niun (nine).
\ on\. )
as /«
home
fotus (foot).
u
» ou „
full 1
sunus (son).
y
j» ^ »
fill
Tyra (Tyre).
The last of these is not a true Gothic letter, being only
used in Greek words, where it takes the place of Gk. v. Tyra
occurs in 3. 8.
The following is an approximate table of sounds for those who are
acquainted only with English pronunciation. The pronunciation given
in parentheses is the nearest that can be expressed in English letters as
pronounced in Southern English.
71. as in
ask (short)
hana (hahnah).
ai (long) as i in
bite
bait (bite).
ai (short) „ a „
bare
bairan (bare-ahn).
au (long) „ ou „
house
kaus (kouse).
au(shorl)„ „
fore
faura (for-ah).
e „ a „
fate
wesun (way-soon).
ei „ e „
eve
weis (weece).
i »i ,*
fill
ist (ist).
1 /and u are usually short ; iu a few cases they are long; see § 13
below, pp. xxix. and xxx.
§ i2.] THE CONSONANTS. XXV
VOWELS.
KEY-WORDS.
EXAMPLES.
iu
as ehu in
Jehu {nearly) l
niun (nee'-oon).
o
» o „
home
fotus (foa-toos).
u
„ u „
full
sunus (soo-noos)
y
}> 1 >>
fill
Tyra (Tirrah).
Stress. The stress or accent falls upon the vowel or diph-
thong of the syllable which contains the root of the word.
In the opening verses of St. Mark's Gospel we may notice
anastodeins, gamelith, insdndja, meinana, wopjandins, usiddjedun.
§ 12. CONSONANTS.
b at the beginning of a word, or when occurring as the
latter of two consonants, has the sound of Eng. b, as in
beitan, to bite, arbi, heritage. But when it occurs after a
vowel (especially if between two vowels) it most likely had
the sound of v. For example, the pi. of hlaifs, a loaf, is
hlaibos ; cf. E. loaves as the pi. of loaf. Other examples
occur in the weak adj. liuba, dear (allied to E. lief, comp.
liever), graban, to dig (E. grave), haban, to have, liban, to
live, biraubon, to bereave, sibun, seven, skaban, to shave ; so
also gebum, we gave, pi. of gaf, I gave.
cli is a foreign (Greek) letter, only occurring in the word
Christus, Christ. We may pronounce it with the £-sound, as
in English.
d at the beginning of a word, or when occurring as the
latter of two consonants, has the sound of the Eng. d, as in
daur, door, hund, hound. But when it occurs after a vowel
(especially if between two vowels), it most likely had the
sound of Eng. voiced th in thou. For example, the gen. of
1 Rather as Je-u, without any sound of h or y between the two
vowels. The sound of ew in dew would put the stress on the wrong
vowel.
XXVI THE CONSONANTS. [§12.
haubiths, head, is haubidis; where the voiced //5-sound in
the genitive answers to the voiceless //fc-sound in the nomina-
tive.
g is hard as in gale ; never soft as in gem.
gg is written, after the Greek fashion, for ng ; thus laggs,
long, is to be pronounced langs (with a as in Ger. lang).
gk (for which ggk is sometimes written) is similarly put
for nk ; as in drigkan or driggkan, to drink, which is to be
pronounced drinkan.
h, when initial, is like E. h in he, when fully aspirated ; it
must also be sounded in the combinations hi, hn, hr. But
in words like brdhla, he brought, the h has a strong guttural
sound, like that of ch in Ger. dach or the Scotch loch.
hw is like the South Welsh chw, or as wh is sounded in
Scotland and the North of England.
j is the Eng.jy in yet.
kw is the Eng. qu in queen ; like the A. S. cw.
r is the Eng. r in ray, and should be trilled.
s is generally said to be voiceless as in sin ; never voiced,
as in Eng. as, is, rise; and this is doubtless true in most in-
stances. But there are obvious exceptions in such words as
dags, gards, Hubs, where it can more easily be pronounced
as z. It readily passes into z between two vowels, the genitive
of dius, a wild beast, being written diuzis. Compare also such
spellings as hivazuh (compounded of hwas and uh) ; ihizos,
fern, of this, gen. of the def. article. So also in huzds, a
hoard, azgo, ashes, mizdo, meed, s readily becomes z before
d and g.
th is (probably) the Eng. voiceless Ih in thin in all cases,
and is a very common letter, especially in the termination
-ths, where the s is voiceless, and the voiced sound of th (as
in E. thou) would be difficult. Moreover, it never occurs
in combination with any of the voiced consonants b, d, or g.
§ 1 3 .] PHONOLOGY. XXV11
In instances where the voiced sound might be expected, we
find the word spelt with d ; see remarks upon d above.
The remaining consonants, viz. f t k, I, m, n, p, /, w, and z
present no difficulty, being pronounced as in modern English.
In the combinations wl, wr, the w is to be sounded.
PHONOLOGY.
§ 13. VOWELS.
General Remarks. The general relation to each other
of the Gothic vowels may be to some extent exhibited in the
following scheme.
Original vowels ..at u
Lengthenings . . 0, e ei (1) iu (u)
Diphthongs . . ai au
The vowels i and u are not always original, and in such a
case they are weakened forms of the vowel a. This appears
from the conjugation of such verbs as bindan, the past tense
of which is band in the first and third person singular, whilst
the plural is bundum, bunduth, or bundun according to the
person. That the most original form of the stem * is band,
is ascertained by comparative philology ; compare, for ex-
ample, the Sanskrit form bandh. It follows from this, that
the stems bind- and bund- are weakened forms of band-.
The most convenient order for considering the vowel-
symbols is to discuss each of the above columns separately,
viz. (1) a, 0, e; (2) i, ei, at; and (3) u, iu, au.
Group 1. The vowels a, 0, e.
a. This vowel, which in Gothic is usually short, may be
considered as an original vowel, and it occurs with much
1 By the 'stem' I meant the part of the word which is left when
divested of the suffixes -an, -urn, &c.
XXV111 PHONOLOGY. [§ 13.
greater frequency than either i or u. It is extremely com-
mon in the pt. t. singular of strong verbs, as in brak, I broke,
gaf, I gave, draggk, I drank, belonging to the conjugations
numbered 3, 4, and 5 respectively; see the account of
Strong Verbs in § 34, p. lviii.
The long sound of a is simply due to the loss of a suc-
ceeding nasal sound, as in hdhan (for hanhan*, E. hang), to
suspend ; or else the word is foreign, as spaikulatur.
o. This vowel, in Gothic, is always long, and may be
considered as the usual lengthened form of a, and derived
from it. The pt. t. of drag-an, to draw (from a base drag),
is drog; see Strong Verbs, Conj. 2, in § 34. Fidur-dogs, on
the fourth day, is a derivative from fidzvor, four, and dags, a
day. Gibos is the genitive of giba, a gift. As to the length
of 0, compare Goth, brothar, brother, with Lat. /rater, Skt.
bhrdtar. For further examples, &c, the reader may consult
Helfenstein's Comparative Grammarof the Teutonic languages.
We sometimes find u (long) written for 0, as in uhledun
for ohtedun (11. 32). Also, is closely allied to au; see
au, in Group 3, p. xxxi.
e. This vowel, in Gothic, is always long, like 0, and it
appears, in like manner, as a lengthened form of a, from
which it is derived. Thus the plural of ik brak, I broke, is
weis brekum, we broke ; and of ik gaf, I gave, is wet's gebum,
we gave ; see Strong Verbs, Conj. 3 and 4, in § 34, p. lviii.
The close relationship between and e appears again in the
reduplicating verb tek-an, to touch, of which the pt. t. is tai-tok ;
and in other similar instances. See § 33, p. liv.
e is also closely related to Goth, el, as appears from
weisum, occurring as an occasional spelling of wesum, we
were ; &c. See ei in Group 2, p. xxix. And in at least one
instance it appears as a variant of at, viz. in taihun-tehund^
written for taihun-taihu?id, a hundred.
§ 130 PHONOLOGV. XXIX
Group 2. i. This vowel is commonly short, but occa-
sionally long ; it occurs both as an original vowel and as a
weakened form of a. As an original (short) vowel, it is less
common than a, but commoner than u. It is original in
fisks, a fish ; cf. Lat. piscis. Also in strong verbs belonging
to Conj. 6, in which it is the fundamental vowel. As a
weakened form of a, the short i is common, as in giban, to
give, of which the pt. t. is gaf\ and a singular instance
appears in Goth, im, I am, as compared with E. am.
i is sometimes written for ei or e, in which cases it is long.
Thus deigan, to knead, is once written digan. Again, azilizo
occurs for azetizo (io. 25). Finally, i is the vocalised form
of j, as in hari, ace. of harjis, an army ; see Strong Nouns
(A-form), p. xxxviii.
ei. This is the usual form of long i, and may be con-
sidered as equivalent to i. This appears in dreiban, to drive,
pt. t. pi. drib-um, pp. drib-ans, from the base drib; see
Strong Verbs, Conj. 6, in § 34, p. lviii. Thus it often cor-
responds etymologically with E. long t\ as in dreiban, to drive,
melns, mine, reisan, to rise, elsarn, iron. In some cases, ei
appears as equivalent toy/; compare lag-jlth, he lies, with
sok-eith, he seeks ; see Weak Verbs, Class 1 (Exception), in
§ 35, p. lix. Here ei = i ' = ii=Ji. We find e written for
ei in wehsa (8. 26); ize (9. 1).
ai. This diphthong is of common occurrence, and has two
distinct values, long (which may be marked ai), and short. 1
The long ai (ai) usually arises from an original i, as in
draib, I drove, pt. t. of dreiban, to drive, from the stem drib,
which is retained in the pt. t. pi. drib-um and the pp.
drib-ans ; see Strong Verbs, Conj. 6, in § 34, p. lviii. Other
1 Some German writers express the true diphthongs by di and du,
and those which arise from 'breaking' by ai and au, or simply ai
and au.
XXX BREAKING OF I. [§ 13.
examples occur in hlaifs, loaf, skaidan, to part, maiian, to cut,
hails, whole, dails, a part, laisjan, to teach, &c. (The A. S. d
generally corresponds to this diphthong, as in A. S. stdn, a
stone, Goth, stains ; drdf, I drove, Goth, draib, as above.)
When di occurs before a vowel, it passes into aj; thus
from bai, both, is formed baj-oths, both, and from aiws } time,
comes ajukduths, an age.
Breaking. The German term brechung (breaking) has
been employed to express the fact, that when the consonants
h, hw, or r directly succeed the short vowel i or u, they affect
the purity of the pronunciation in such a manner as to draw
the sound of i or u nearer to that of a, thus producing a
kind of e or 0. In this manner we obtain a new kind of ai,
essentially short, and distinct in its origin from the true
diphthong di. The clearest examples occur in the conjuga-
tion of Strong Verbs (§ 34), where the vowel of the infinitive
is properly i (as in Conj. 3, 4, 5). Thus, in Conj. 3, we
have at for i in bair-an, to bear, ga-tair-an, to tear, whilst at
the same time au appears for u in the pp. baur-ans, ga-taur-
ans. In Conj. 4, we have ai for i in saihw-an, to see, pp.
saihw-ans. In Conj. 5, we have ai for i, and au for u, in
bairg-an, to keep, protect, pp. baurg-ans; bi-gaird-an, to
begird, pp. bi-gaurd-ans ; wairp-an, to throw, pp. waurp-ans ;
wairth-an, to become, pp. waurth-ans. Compare also Goth,
wair, a man, with Lat. uir. (The corresponding A. S. letter
is commonly e, as in beran, to bear, teran, to tear, s/on, to
see, wer, a man ; also eo, as in beorgan, to protect, weorpan,
to throw, weorpan, to become.)
Group 3. u. This vowel is usually short, but occurs as
long in a few instances. It is frequently a weakening of a,
as in bund-um, we bound, pi. of band, I bound. It is less
common as an original vowel than either a or *', but appears
in sunus, a son, Sanskrit stinu\ and it is the fundamental
§13.] BREAKING OF U. XXxi
vowel of Strong Verbs of Conj. 7, appearing in the pt. t. pi.
and the pp. of such verbs. Examples are : biug-an, to bend,
pp. bug-ans, Sanskrit bhuj, to bend; giut-an, to pour, pp.
gut-ans, Lat. fund-ere (pt. t. fud-i), to pour. The u is long
mfuls, foul (A. S.fui); hus, house (A. S. Ms); rums, a room
(A. S. rum); runa, a mystery (A. S. run); ut, out (A. S. ut).
Also in skura, a shower, storm (4. 37 ; A. S. scur).
iu. This diphthong takes, etymologically, the place of
long u ; thus biug-an = A. S. biigan, to bend, from the base
bug ; see above. 1 It also occurs for iw, the w being
vocalised to u ; as in kniu, knee, gen. kniw-is, base kniwa.
au. This diphthong (like ai) is both long and short ; and
the long form or true diphthong may be denoted by du.
The \ongau or du commonly arises from an original u, as
in kaus, I chose, pt. t. of kius-an, to choose, from the base
kus, which is retained in the pt. t. pi. kus-um and the pp.
kus-ans; see Strong Verbs, Conj. 7, in § 34, p. lviii. (It answers
to A. S. e'a, as in c/as, I chose, pt. t. of ce'osan, to choose.)
It becomes aw before the vowel i, as in mawi, a maiden,
gen. mau-jos, base mau-jo ; taw-ida, pt. t. of iau-jan, to do.
In a very few cases it interchanges with 0, as in /ops, gen.
of taui, a deed ; stojan, to judge, pt. t. stauida.
Breaking. The short diphthong au, when occurring
before h, hw, or r, is commonly due to 'breaking'; see this
explained under at, in Group 2. Thus dauhtar, daughter,
stands for du/i-far* ; 2 cf. Gk. Bvy-drr^p. The occurrence of
h or r after au is not an invariable test ; for there are a few
instances where au is then long, as in hauhs, high (A. S.
hiah).
1 But corresponding A. S. words are much more commonly written
with eo, as ceosan (Goth, kiusari), beodan (Goth, biudari), &c.
2 It is usual to mark with an asterisk all theoretical forms, such as
duhtar*.
XXXli PHONOLOGY. [§ 14.
Elision. We find occasional elisions, as in thatist = that'ist, short
for thata ist, that is to say (7. 2) ; nist = riist, for ni ist, is not ;
niba = riiba, for ni iba, if not, unless (3. 27). So, in the declension of
the pronouns salt ( = sa'h = sa uh) and saei, numerous elisions occur, as
in the neut. thatuh for thata uh, thatei for thata ei.
Hiatus. This is not uncommon, as in gaarman, to pity, i.e.ga-arman,
the vowels belonging to separate syllables (5. 19). So too gaidreigon,
to repent (Luke 10. 13); where ai = a-i, two separate vowels, not a
diphthong. The prefix ga- is so common, that no difficulty need hence
§ 14. CONSONANTS.
The Gothic consonants are as follows.
Labials: b,p,f; w; m.
Dentals : d, /, th; s, z; n.
Linguals : r, /.
Palatal : /
Gutturals : g, k, h; kw, hw ; and the nasalised gutturals
gg and gk (also written ggk).
According to the laws of sound-shifting usually called
1 Grimm's Law/ the Aryan letters in row 1 below should
correspond to the Gothic letters in row 2.
LABIAL. DENTAL. GUTTURAL.
i. Aryan, b p bh d t dh g k gh
2. Gothic, p f b t th d k h g
To this law there are some exceptions, as below : —
Labials, p. There is no clear example of Aryan b =
Goth. p. Gothic words beginning with p are very few, and
of these most are borrowed from Greek. The etymology of
the rest is doubtful.
f. Instead of Gothic f y we sometimes find b, as in sibun,
seven ; cf. Lat. septem. Gothic is sometimes uncertain in its
use of f and b; thus ik ga/, I gave, is from giban, to give.
The word for 'loaf is both hlaifs and hlaibs. The pi. of
laufs, a leaf, is laubos (n. 13; 13. 28). See p. xxv.
§ i 4 .] phonology. xxxiii
w. This letter is sometimes vocalised; aw, z'w, inter-
change with au, iu.
Dentals, d. A Gothic d sometimes appears where th
might be expected, as m fadar, with which compare E.
father, Lat. pater. There is some fluctuation in the use of d
and th; thus daupiths, pp. of daupjan, to baptise, makes
the pi. daupidai, not daupithai; and the gen. of manaseths,
the world (14. 9) is manasedais (John, 8. 12) ; see p. xxv.
t. The Aryan / is unchanged in the combination sf;
compare Goth, ist, he is, with Lat. est. The suffix -ta
replaces -da (for ease in pronunciation) in brah-tedun, brought
(9. 17), thaurf-ta, was in need (2. 25) ; the same substitution
is common in English, as in brough-t, taugh-t.
th. The interchange of th with d is noted above. An-
other example occurs in kun-tha, pt. t. of kunn-an, to know ;
put for kunn-da* Middle Eng. coude.
s. This sibilant sometimes supplies the place of a dental.
Thus ana-bus-ns, a commandment (7. 8) is from ana-biud-an,
to command. The past tense of watt, I know, is wissa
(9. 6); a curious form which has resulted from wit-da*,
changed to wit-ta* and wisia*, and finally reduced to the
form wissa by assimilation. Lastly, .$• appears for th in
kwast, thou sayest (12. 32), put for kwath-t.
z. We find z substituted for s between two vowels; as
in ize, of them, gen. pi. of is, he. The comparative suffix
of adjectives is written -iza, put for -isa. It also appears
occasionally in place of j at the end of a word, as in aiz
(6. 8); and before / in ga-sai-zlep (John, 11. 11).
Palatal. The ' semi- vowel ' j, as it is sometimes called,
often interchanged with i; and ji with ei (the lengthened
form of i) ; see p. xxix. At the end of a word, i is put for/
without exception.
Gutturals, g, k, h. Both g and k become h before a /
c
XXXIV SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 15.
following, in derivative words. Thus from mag-an, to be
able, comes mah-ts, might; and from the strong verb siuk-an,
to be sick (pt. t. sauk) comes the sb. sauh-ls, disease
(1. 34).
kw, hw. These represent secondary sounds, due to
labialised forms of k and h, so that they correspond, etymo-
logically, to Aryan g and k respectively. Thus kwiman, to
come, pt. t. kwam (from kam*) corresponds to Sanskrit gam,
to go ; and hwas, who (from has*) to Skt. kas, who.
gg> gk, ggk. These symbols are imitated from the
Greek yy, y/c, so that the first g is to be sounded as n. Goth.
laggs=A. S. lang=~E. long ; Goth, drigkan or driggkan = K. S*
drincan = ~E. drink; Goth. figgrs=~E. finger (7. 33). It is
remarkable that derivatives from these nasalised sounds are
written with a simple h, which takes the place of nh by a
change similar to that which puts h for g (see remarks on g
above). Thus the pt. t. of bri'gg-an, to bring, is brah-ta (for
branh-la*).
Assimilation. Assimilation is the substitution of a double con-
sonant for two dissimilar consonants ; as in the Italian ammirare (with
mm) from Lat. admirare (with dm). It is not very common in Gothic,
but we invariably find the prefix us- changed to ur- when an r follows,
as in ur-rann (for us-rann) in Mark, 4. 3. The most remarkable in-
stance of assimilation is in the case of final h, which before a word
beginning with th is changed to th. Thus wasutli-than (1.6) stands
for was-uh than, i. e. ' and then was ' ; where -uh is an enclitic particle
used like the Latin -que.
§ 15. SUBSTANTIVES.
Gender. There are three genders, masculine, feminine,
and neuter. The gender is partly natural, as when the
names of male beings are considered masculine; partly
grammatical, as when folus, foot, is masculine, and handus,
hand, is feminine.
In some cases the termination is a guide to the gender ;
§ i 5 .] SUBSTANTIVES. XXXV
thus nouns in -a, if strong, are feminine, if weak, are mascu-
line. Nouns such as waurd (word) which are destitute of an
inflection in the nominative, and nouns in -u, zsfaihu (fee),
are neuter. Nouns in -is or -eis are masculine. Nouns in
-ei are feminine. Nouns in -o are mostly feminine; but
there are notable exceptions, the principal being hairt-o
(heart), aug-o (eye), aus-o (ear), kaurn-o (corn), nam-o (name),
wat-o (water), all neuter. See the forms of declension.
Number. There are only two numbers, singular and
plural. Dual forms appear among the pronouns only.
Case. There are, practically, only four cases, viz. nomin-
ative, genitive, dative, and accusative. Some vocative forms
are found, but they are merely due to the loss of the nomin-
ative suffix -s, in such words as have that suffix ; moreover,
they only appear in the singular number. In all other in-
stances, the vocative is the same as the nominative. Examples
of an instrumental case appear among the pronouns only.
Strong and Weak. Weak nouns are those which form
their inflections with n, such as han-a (cock), gen. nan-ins,
pi. nom. han-ans. All others are strong.
Base. The base or crude form^ of a substantive is the
supposed original form of it, divested of the case-ending.
To this base the case-ending has been added, after which
the case has frequently suffered degradation, and appears
in a weakened form. Thus the base fiska signifies ' fish,'
whence was formed the nom. fiska-s, afterwards contracted
to fisks. The form of the base of a Gothic strong substan-
1 Called theme in Helfenstein, Comparative Grammar of the Teutonic
Languages. Some call it the stem, but it is convenient to restrict the
word stem to the first syllable of a base, such as fisk-, to which the
case-endings appear to be added in the paradigms of the declensions.
A specific name for this first syllable is often required, and stem is the
most convenient term for it ; see the definition of * stem' at p. xxvii.
C 2
XXXVI SUBSTANTIVES. [§ 16.
tive can usually be determined by dropping the suffixed -m
of the dative plural ; that of a weak substantive by dropping
the suffixed -e or -0 of the genitive plural. The form of the
base is important, because it is to. the variation in the last/jn
letter of the base that the apparent differences of declension
arise. Thus the difference between the accusative plurals
fisk-ans and balg-ins is really due to the difference in the
bases. The former may be considered as equivalent to
fiska-ns, and the latter to balgi-ns, in which case the suffix
-ns is really common to both. The bases of the various
substantives are given below, and are printed in capital
letters.
General Remarks. The following facts are worth ob-
serving.
1. Neuter substantives have the accusative and nominative
alike, as in Latin and Greek, both in the singular and
plural.
2. The genitive singular ends in -s, preceded by a vowel,
a diphthong, n, or r.
3. The genitive plural ends in -e (-t'we, -ane, -ne) or in -0
(-ono, -eino).
4. The dative plural ends in -m, suffixed to the base ; but
the final n of the base is dropped in weak nouns.
DECLENSIONS.
§ 16. I. Strong Declension.
There are three forms of declension, according as the base
ends in -a, -i, or -u.
Note. There are some exceptional forms, which are
best observed by practice. The following paradigms only
exhibit the declensions of such words as are declined
regularly.
§ i6.] SUBSTANTIVES, XXXvil
(i) A-form.
Thus are declined masc. fisks, a fish (base fiska) ; fem.
giba, a gift (base giba, for which Gothic substitutes gibo) ;
and neut. waurd, z. word (base waurda).
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Norn, fisk-j
N. V.
fisk-w
Gen. fisk-/j
Gen.
fisk-^
Dat. fisk-<z
Dat.
fisk-am
Ace. fisk
Ace.
fisk-ans
Voc. fisk
So also dags, day, fugls, bird (fowl), hlaifs, loaf, hunds, hound, laufs,
leaf, stains, stone, wigs, way, wulfs, wolf. Hlaifs, loaf, /<a:w/j, leaf,
make the pi. hlaibos, laubos; thius, servant, makes the pi. thiwos.
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N.A.V. gib-a gib-os N.A.V. waurd waurd-<z
Gen. g\b-os gib-o Gen. waurd-/.? waurd-<?
Dat. gib-ai gib-om Dat. waurd-<z waurd-a/?/
So also fem. airtha, earth, hairda, herd, halba, half, saiwala, soul ;
neut. agis, awe, ahs, ear of corn, akran, fruit, barn, child, bloth, blood,
daur, door, gulth, gold, hatirn, horn, jer, year, juk, yoke, &c.
Remarks. Masculine bases in -SA form the nom. sing, by merely
dropping the final vowel of the base. Thus the base halsa, neck, has
the nom. sing, hals (not halsas) ; so also nom. sing, ans, a beam (not
ansas).
Similarly, masc. bases in -RA merely drop the final vowel of the base ;
as in wair, a ma,n, from the base WAIRA ; stiur, a steer, from the base
STIURA. But if another consonant precedes -r, the formation is regular,
as in akrs, an acre or field, from the base AKRA.
Some masculines have a stem ending in -ja. The nom.
sing, is formed by adding -s to the weakened stem -ji, whilst
the ace. and vocative singular have the final -j vocalised to -i.
Moreover, the nom. sing, suffix -jis is altered to -eis when a
long syllable or more than one syllable precedes it. The
plural is regular. Examples are harjis, an army, base harja,
xxxviii SUBSTANTIVES. [§ i 7 .
and hatrdeis, a herd, shepherd, base hairdja ; which are
thus declined.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Norn.
harj-w haird-m
harj-flj hairdj-w
Gen.
harj-zj- haird -£*>
harj-* hairdj-*
Dat.
harj-a hairdj-a
harj-tf/rc hairdj-^OT
Ace.
hari haird
\i2L\)-ans hairdj-tf/w
Voc.
hari haird
(as nom.) (as nom.)
Neuter bases in -JA have a similar declension, but observe the rule of
making the nom. like the accusative. Hence kuni, kin, base kunja,
and andbahti, service, base ANDBAHTJA, make the nom. and ace. sing.
kuni, andbahti ; gen. kunj-is, attdbaht-eis, dat. kunj-a, andbahtj-a.
So also badi, bed ; nati, net, &c.
The fern, stem thiujA, a maiden, gives the nom. sing, thhvi. Here
thiwi = thiuj-, the suffix -a (o) being dropped.
Similarly, when stems end in -wa, the w is vocalised to u. From the
masc. stem thiwa, a servant, ate formed nom. thiu-s, ace. voc. thitt,
the gen. thiw-is and dat. thiw-a being regular. From the neut stem
kniwa, knee, are formed nom. ace. kniu, gen. kniw-is, dat. kniw-a.
But if a diphthong or a long vowel precedes 7v, the iv remains; as in
masc. saiws, sea, ace. saiw, from the base saivva.
§ 17. I-form.
Thus are declined masc. balgs, bag, base balgi ; fern.
ansts, grace, base ansti. (There are no neuters.)
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
balg-j
balg-m
anst-j
anst-m
Gen.
balg-Yj
balg-*
anst-ais
anst-<?
Dat.
balg-fl
balg-;>w
anst-<w
anst-z'w
Ace.
balg
ba\g-ins
anst
anst-ins
Voc.
balg
anst
So also masc. arms, arm, barms, bosom, gards, house (yard), bruth-
faths, bridegroom ; fern, mahts, might, kwens, woman, taikns token, &c.
As before, stems in -si and -Ri form the nom. sing, by merely drop-
§§ i8, 19.I SUBSTANTIVES. XXXIX
ping the final vowel of the base. Exx. fem. garuns, a market-place, base
GARUNSI ; masc. baur, a child, base BAURI.
The fem. haims, a village, base haimi, forms its plural as if it belonged
to the A-form. Hence the pi. haim^os (6. 56). '
Other exceptional forms appear in fem. baurgs, a town, gen. baurg-s,
dat. ace. baurg; pi. nom. ace. baurg, gen. baurg-e, dat. baurg-im.
Observe also fem. mitaths, a measure, dat. mitath (4. 24), not mitathai',
fem. alhs, a temple, gen. alhs (15. 38), dat. alh (12. 35); fem. nahts,
night, dat. naht (4. 27), dat. pi. nahtam (5. 5).
§ 18. U-form.
Thus are declined masc. sunus, son, base sunu ; fem. hand-
as, hand, base handu ; neut. faihu, property (fee), base
faihu. The feminine sbs. are declined precisely like the
masculine ; and the neuter sbs. only differ in the nom. and
ace. singular. The plural form of neuters of this declension
is not found ; hence only the singular is given.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR
Nom
sun-a^
sun-Jus
faih-«
Gen.
sun-aus
sun-iwe
faih-<mr
Dat.
sun-au
sun-um
faih-tfa
Ace.
sun-u
sun-uns
faih-#
Voc.
sun-u
So also masc. aims, messenger, skadus, shadow, wintrus, winter,
fotus, foot, &c. An exceptional form appears in the ace. handau (7. 32),
as this is really the dat. form.
§ 19. Bases in -ar.
Brothar, brother, fadar, father, dauhlar, daughter, swistar,
sister, are declined according to the following scheme. (The
Gothic for ' mother ' is ailhei.)
1 References such as this, between marks of parenthesis, are to the
chapter and verse of St. Mark's Gospel, unless some other book of the
Bible is distinctly mentioned.
Xl SUBSTANTIVES. [§§20.21.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. brothar brothr^W
Gn. brothr-j brothr-<?
Dat. brothr brothr-w/rc
Ace. brothar brothr-w>w
§ 20. Bases in -nda.
From some verbs are formed substantives, which were
originally present participles. Thus gibands, a giver, base
gibanda, is obviously the pres. part, otgiban, to give. A few
are formed from weak verbs in -on, of which the most re-
markable is frijonds, friend, originally the pres. part, oifrijon,
to love. Such sbs. are declined according to the following
scheme.
Nom. giband-j giband-j
Gen. giband-zj giband-<?
Dat. giband giband-aw
Ace. giband giband-j
So also daupjands, baptist, Jijands, enemy, &c.
§ 21. II. "Weak or Consonantal Declension.
In this declension, the base invariably ends in -n. The
vocative has no peculiar form, but resembles the nominative.
Typical examples are those of masc. nana, a cock, base
hanan ; fem. luggo (pronounced tungo), tongue, base tuggon,
and ?nanagei, multitude, base managein ; neut. nairfo, heart,
base hairtan, and wato, water, base watan.
A. Masculine.
Nom. han-a haxi-ans
Gen. han-z«j hzn-ane
Dat. han-m han-am
Ace. hsm-an han-ans
So also guma, man, mena, moon, sumia, sun, &c.
§21.]
SUBSTANTIVES.
xli
B. Feminine.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
tugg-<?
tugg-ons
Gen.
tugg-ons
tugg-ono
Dat.
tugg-on
tugg-om
Ace.
tugg-on
tugg-ons
Nom.
manag-^'
manzg-eins
Gen.
mznag-eins
man&g-eino
Dat.
manag-£z#
manag-eim
Ace.
maxizg-ein
m&nag-eins
So also gatwo, street, stairno, star, &c. ;
; aithei, mother, marei, sea, &c,
•
C. Neuter.
Nom. Ace.
hairt-0
hairt-owa
Gen.
hairt-z>w
ha\Yt-ane
Dat.
hairt-z/z
hairt-am
Nom. Ace.
wat-0
vtat-na
Gen.
wat-ins
vtat-ne
Dat.
wat-z>z
xvat-nam
Like hairto are declined ango, eye, auso, ear, kaurno, grain, &c.
Remarks. Weak substantives may generally be known by the ending
of the nom. sing, in -a, -o, or -ei. The only exception is in the case of
strong feminine substantives of the A-form, such as giba, gift ; and even
these may be distinguished by observing the gender; since all weak
substantives in -a are masculine.
The dat. pi. watnam (short for watan-am) preserves the n of the
base, which is lost in hairt-am, dat. pi. of hairto. There is only one
other neuter sb. which is declined like wato, viz. namo, name, stem
naman ; dat. pi. nam-nam. We also find dat. pi. ab-nam, from the
masculine sb. aba, man.
The declension of weak substantives is, in general, very-
regular. The only examples of irregularity occur in the two
xlii ADJECTIVES. [§22.
following words. Masc. manna, man, bases man and mannan,
is thus declined.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. mann-a mann-awj, man-j
Gen. man-j mann-<?
Dat. mann ma.nn-am
Ace. mann-a« marm-ans, man-j
Neut. fon, fire, is only found in the singular (9. 22). Nom.
and ace. fon ; gen. fun-ins , dat. fun-/« (9. 47, 49).
§ 22. ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives have three genders and two numbers, like sub-
stantives ; and have also a double form of declension, strong
and weak. It is important to know under what circumstances
these are used.
1. The strong declension is employed when the adjective
is used either without the definite article, or alone. So also
are declined the possessive pronouns, and nearly all demon-
strative pronouns, except sama, same, silba, self; all cardinal
numbers ; the ordinal ant/iar, second ; and the words fol-
lowing, viz. alls, all, fulls, full, ganohs, enough, halbs, half,
midjis, middle, sums, some, swaleiks, such.
2. The weak declension is used whenever the definite
article is used (with or without a substantive) ; also for some
adjectives used almost with the force of substantives, such
as unkarja, a careless person (4. 15), usfilma, an amazed
man (1. 12). So also the pronouns sama, same, silba, self;
all ordinals, except anlhar, second (which is strong), and
frumisis, first (both strong and weak); a few old superlatives,
such as afluma, last (10. 31), fruma, first (15. 42), iftuma,
next, the morrow (11. 12); hleiduma, left (10. 37). So also
all present participles, with the exception of the nom. sing.,
which often has the strong form.
§§ 23-25.]
ADJECTIVES.
xliii
§ 23. I.
STRONG DECLENSION.
A-form.
Blind-
s, blind, base
blinda, is thus declined.
SINGULAR.
Masc*
Fern.
JVeut.
Norn.
blind-.?
blind-0
blind, blind-a/tf
Gen.
blind-/.?
bY\x\d-aizos
blind-/.?
Dat.
bXmd-amma
bY\x\d-ai
bYmd-amma
Ace.
bYind-ana
blind-tf
PLURAL.
blind, blind-ata
Norn.
blind-a**
b\\nd-os
blind-a
Gen.
blind-d7J3<?
blind-aizo
b\\nd-aize
Dat.
bYmd-aim
blind-aim
bYmd-ai'm
Ace.
bYmd-ans
b\ind-os
blind-0
Bases in -JA show similar forms ; Exx. midj-ctim, dat. pi. (9. 36) ;
unsibj-aim, dat. pi. (15. 28) ; airzj-ai, nom. pi. (12. 24). So also bases
in -WA, as faw-aim, dat. pi. (6 5); kwiw-aize, gen. pi. (12. 27), from
the nom. sing. masc. kwiu-s, where the w is vocalised to u. Th and/
pass into d and b ; thus the gen. of froths, wise, is f rod-is ; and that
of liufs, dear, is liub-is.
§ 24. I-form.
There are but slight traces of bases in -1, but we may
notice gamainj-aim, dat. pi. (7. 2) from the base gamaini ;
authj-ana. ace. sing. masc. (1. 35), from the base authi.
Here, as usual, i becomes/' before another vowel.
§ 25. U-form.
Hardu-s, hard, base hardu, is thus declined.
SINGULAR.
Fern. JVeut.
hard-«f hard-#, ha.rdj-ata
hardj-aizos hardj-/.?
hardj-az' hardyamma
hardj-a hard-«, hardj-tf/a
Masc.
Nom.
hard-us
Gen.
hardj-/.?
Dat.
hardj-amma
Ace.
hard]-ana
xliv ADJECTIVES. [§§ 26, 27.
The plural is hardj-az', -0j, -a ; &c.
This resembles blinds except in the nominative, in the ace.
neuter, and in the introduction of the/
Not many adjectives are of this form ; we may note aglu, nom. sing,
neut. (10. 24) ; thlakwus, nom. sing. masc. (13. 28) ; manwjata, ace.
sing. neut. (14. 15).
§ 26. II. WEAK DECLENSION.
This declension agrees with that of the three substantives
hana (masc), tuggo (fem.), and hairio (neut.); see § 21, p. xl.
Hence it is as follows. Sa blinda, the blind ; used with the
article.
SINGULAR.
Masc.
Fem.
Neut.
Nom.
blind-a
blind-<?
blinds
Gen.
blind-z>w
blind-0;w
blind-z«£
Da/.
blind-zV*
blind-0«
blind-z'«
Ace.
blind-a^
bXmd-on
PLURAL.
blind-0
Nom.
bYmd-ans
blind-0/w
b\\n&-ona
Gen.
blind-aw*
blind-0;/0
blind-a«<?
Dat.
blind-affz
blind-0W
b\\nd-am
Ace.
bYmd-ans
blind-0/z.r
bX\nd-ona
We may note a trace of the U-form in the weak declen-
sion in the introduction of the j in lausha?idjan, ace. sing,
masc. (12. 3), as if from a base laus-handu.
Hote. — But adjectives in the comparative degree, and
present participles (which, as observed above, are usually
strong in the nom. sing, masc.) form their feminines in -ei,
following the declension of managei, not of tuggo ; see p. xli.
§ 27. Degrees of Comparison.
The comparative degree is formed by adding -zza, or
occasionally -oza (Eng. -er) to the stem. Comparatives
§ 28.] PARTICIPLES. xlv
follow the weak declension, but have their feminines in -ei\
not -o. Examples are hard-iza, hard-er, blind-oza, blind-er ;
sut-izo, nom. neut. sing. (6. n). The corresponding ad-
verbial suffixes are -is, -os, see § 39.
The superlative degree is formed by adding the suffix -isl
(really a double suffix -is-ta) to the stem ; and follows both
declensions. Examples are blind-isis, blind-est, sa blind-ista,
the blind-est ; this hauh-ist-ins, of the highest (5. 7). The
strong neuter ends in -ist, not -istaia, which is too long.
The following are irregular in their comparison : —
gods, batiza, batists good, better, best.
ubils, wairsiza, (wairsists ?) evil, worse, worst.
mikils, maiza, maists mickle, more, most.
leitils, minniza, minnists little (less, least).
1 althets ' I a ^ za > s i n i sta o\d t older (oldest),
juggs, juhiza, young, younger, ....
A few old superlatives exhibit the Aryan suffix -MA ; cf. Lat. firi-mus,
first. Examples are fi~u-?na, first, innu-ma, inmost. A few others
exhibit the Aryan suffix -ta-ma ; cf. Lat. op-ti-mus, best. This is
weakened in Gothic to -tuma or -duma, and the superlative sense is
sometimes lost. Examples are af-tuma, last, if-tuma, next, hin-duma,
hindmost, hlei-duma, left (most on the left). The loss of the super-
lative sense gave rise to the further addition of -ist, as in af-tum-ists,
last, fru-m-ists, first, auhu-m-ists. highest, hin-dum-ists, hindmost. Here
af-tumists really exhibits a quadruple suffix, composed of the Aryan
-TA, -ma, -AS, and -TA. The English words foremost, hindmost, are,
similarly, double superlatives, being corruptions of fore-m-est, hind-
m-est due to confusion with most.
§ 28. Participles.
Present participles can be used as equivalent either to a
substantive or an adjective. In the former case, the declen-
sion has been already exhibited under bases in -nda, p. xl. In
the latter case, it has already been explained that the nom.
sing. masc. may be either strong or weak, and that other-
xlvi NUMERALS. [§§29, 30.
wise they are declined (like comparatives) like the words
hana, managei, and hairto, i. e. according to the weak de-
clension ; see p. xliv.
Past participles follow both declensions. Past participles
of weak verbs, which terminate in -iths, change the ih into d
whenever a syllable is added ; hence from daup-iths, pp. of
daupjan, we have the nom. pi. masc. daup-idai (1. 5).
§ 29. Proper Names and Foreign words.
These are frequently undeclined ; hence we find ace.
Kafarnaum (2. 1); dat. sabbalo (2. 28). Yet we find dat.
pi. sabbaiim (2. 24, 3. 4), gen. pi. sabbaie (16. 1). Greek
words frequently follow the Greek declension ; hence gen.
sing. Galileias (1. 9); ace. sing. Andraian (1. 16); syna-
gogen (1. 21). Yet synagogen is also used as a dative (1. 29).
We also find Gothic suffixes, as in Satan-in (1. 13). There
is a good deal of uncertainty here in the author's method ;
as might be expected.
§ 30. NUMERALS.
Cardinals. The cardinal numbers are as follows : —
1. ains. 2. twai. 3. threis. 4. fidivor. 5. fimf, fif.
6. saihs. 7. sibun. 8. ahtau. 9. niun. 10. iaihun. 11.
ainlif. 12. twalif. 14. fidwor-laihun. 15. fimf-laihun.. 20.
twai ligjas. 30. threis ligjus. 40. fidwor tigjus. 50. fimf
tigjus. 60. saihs tigjus. 70. sibun-tehund. 80. ahtau-tehund.
90. niwi-tehund. 100. taihun-tchund, or taihun-taihund. 200.
iwa hunda. 300. ihrija hunda. 500. fi??if ' hunda. 900. niun
hunda. 1000. thusundi.
Most of these are undeclined, except 1, 2, and 3. The
declensions are as follows.
1. ains is declined in the singular as a strong adjective,
§ 3 i.] PRONOUNS. xlvii
but when it means ' alone/ is weak. In the plural, it is
declined strong, with the signification ' only ' (Gk. fiovot) ;
hence dat. pi. ainaim (2. 26).
2. Twai is necessarily plural. It takes the following
forms : nom. twai, twos, twa ; gen. iwaddje ; dat. iwaim ;
ace. /wans, twos, liva.
3. Threis only occurs in the nom. in the neut. thrija.
The gen. is thrije\ dat. thrim; ace. masc. thrins, neut.
thrija.
4. The teX. fidworim occurs (2. 3).
9. The gen. is niune.
11. The dat. is ainlibim.
12. The dat. is iwalibim (4. 10), or iwalif] gen. iwalibe
(5. 42). We may also note ace. fidwor-tiguns (1. 13); nom.
twos thusundjos (5. 13) ; fidwor-thusundjos (8. 9), dat. fidwor-
thasundjom (8. 20) ; &c.
Ordinals. Of these only the following occur : —
1 st. fruma. 2nd. anthar (E. other); formed with a
comparative suffix from a pronominal base ana. 3rd. thridja.
6th. saihsta. 8th. aihtada. 9th. niunda. 10th. taihunda.
15th. fimfta-taihunda. All these follow the weak declension,
with the exception of anthar.
Other numeral adjectives. 'Both' is expressed by
masc. bai, dat. bairn, ace. bans; neuter, nom. and ace. ba.
Also by bajoths (Luke, 5. 38). The only distributive form is
tweihnai, two apiece (Luke, 9. 3). Multiplicative forms are
neut. ain-falth, one-fold, single; fidur-fallh, fourfold; manag-
falih, many-fold ; taihun-taihund-falih, a hundred-fold.
§ 31. PRONOUNS.
Personal. The personal pronouns of the first and second
person are ik, I ; thu, thou. Of these, dual forms are found,
viz. wit, we two ; jut (?), ye two. They are thus declined : — -
xlviii
PRONOUNS.
[§3i-
SINGULAR.
Norn, ik
Gen. meina
Dat. mis
Ace. mik
wit
ugkara
ugkis
ugkis, ugk
PLURAL.
weis
unsara
unsis, uns
unsis, uns
Nom. thu O ut - ? ) J us
Gen. theina igkwara izwara
Dat. thus igkwis, iggkwis izvvis
Ace. thuk igkwis, iggkwis izwis
A reflexive form of the third personal pronoun is used
for all genders, in the oblique cases only. Gen. seina, dat.
sis, ace. sik.
The third personal pronoun is is, si, ita, he, she, it. It
is made up from two other pronouns, originally demon-
strative ; the Aryan base sya being used for the nom. fern,
sing, only, and the base 1 for the rest. It is thus declined : —
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. is, si, ita 'eis, ijos, ija
Gen. is, izos, is ize, izo, ize
Dat. imma, izai, imma im, im, im
Ace. ina, ija, ita ins, ijos, ija
Possessive Pronouns. These are meins, mine, theins,
thine, seins, his (reflexive) ; declined like strong adjectives.
So also unsar, our, izwar, your, seins, their (reflexive).
There is one example of the dual form in Matt. 9. 29: 'hi galaubeinai
iggkivarai wairthai iggkwis,' according to the faith of you two be it
done unto you two.
Demonstrative Pronouns. The simple demonstrative
pronoun is sa, so, thata, this, that ; also used as the definite
article, and therefore in very frequent use. Cf. the A. S.
article se, seo, ^Scet.
§3i-l
PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR.
Masc.
Fern.
Neut.
Nom.
sa
so
thata
Gen.
this
thizos
this
Dat.
thamma
thizai
thamma
Ace.
thana
tho
thata
Inst.
the
the
PLURAL.
the
Nom.
thai
thos
tho
Gen.
thize
thizo
thize
Dat.
thaim
thaim
thaim
Ace.
thans
thos
tho
xli;
The instrumental case the occurs in the compounds du-the
or duth-the, therefore, bi-the, whilst, Jath-the, whether. Cf.
A. S. o>'.
Sa is often followed by the enclitic particle uh, and is
then contracted to sah. This is so common that the declen-
sion of sah is here given in full.
SINGULAR.
Nom.
sah
soh
thatuh
Gen.
thizuh
thizozuh
thizuh
Dat.
thammuh
thizaih
thammuh
Ace.
thanuh
thoh
PLURAL.
thatuh
Nom.
thaih
thozuh
thoh
Gen.
thizeh
thizoh
thizeh
Dat.
thaimuh
thaimuh
thaimuh
Ace.
thanzuh
thozuh
thoh.
From the demonstrative stem hi, this, are formed the dat.
sing. masc. and neut. himma, the accus. masc. hina, and the
ace. neut. hila. These occur chiefly in such phrases as himma
d
1 PRONOUNS. [§31.
daga, on this day, und hina dag, till this day, und hita, till
now, /ram himma, henceforth. Cf. E. him, it (A. S. hit).
Another demonstrative pronoun is Jains, that (E. yon),
declined like strong adjectives; the neut. sing, is jain-ata.
Sama, same, silba, self, are declined like weak adjectives.
Swaleiks, such, swelauds, such, are declined like strong
adjectives.
Relative Pronouns. Relatives are formed by the addi-
tion of the particle ei, that, which is freely added to various
pronouns. Hence we find ik-ei, I who, I that, thu-ei, thou
who, thou that, thuk-ei, thee who, whom, juz-ei, ye who ; &c.
Ex. in thuzei waila galeikaida, in whom (lit. thee that) I am
well pleased (1. 11).
From the pronoun is, he, is formed the relative iz-ei,
who, which is indeclinable, so that we find it used in the
plural, and even in the contracted form ize. Moreover, the
demonstrative force of is in this compound was so entirely
lost, that a second demonstrative was prefixed ; hence thai
ize = who (lit. they they who ; 9. 1).
The particle ei is often added to sa, giving sa-ei, used as a
relative. It is thus declined : —
SINGULAR.
Masc.
Fein.
Ncnt. f
Norn.
sa-ei
so-ei
that-ei
Gen.
thiz-ei
thizoz-ei
thiz-ei
Dal.
thamm-ei
thizai-ei
thamm-ei
Ace.
than-ei
tho-ei
PLURAL.
that-ei
Norn.
thai-ei
thoz-ei
tho-ei
Gen.
thize-ei
thizo-ei
thize-ei
Dal.
thaim-ei
thaim-ei
thaim-ei
Ace,
thanz-ei
thoz-ei
tho-ei
Nom.
hwas
Gen.
hwis
Dat.
hwamma
Ace.
hwana
Inst.
hwe
§31.] PRONOUNS. II
Interrogative Pronouns. Hwas, who, fern, hwo, neut.
hwa, what, only occurs in the singular.
hwo hwa
hwizos hwis
hwizai hwamma
hwo hwa
hwe hwe
The instrumental case appears in du-hwe, wherefore (2. 18);
also in hwe-lauds, what sort of, hwe-leiks, what sort of (4. 30),
which are declined like strong adjectives.
Hwathar, which of two (E. whether), occurs in the nom.
masc. and neut. only (2. 9), and in the dat. masc. sing, hwa-
tharamma.
Hwarjis, which (of more than two) is declined like a strong
adjective (9. 34, 12. 23). The neut. is hwarjata.
Hwileiks, hweleiks, what sort of, is similarly declined ; but
the neut. is hwileik or hweleik.
Indefinite Pronouns. The following are the indefinite
forms.
Sums, some; of the strong declension. It also occurs
with the addition of the particle uh, as in the ace. pi. masc.
sumanz-uh, and some (12. 5).
From the sb. manna, a man, with the suffix -hun, when
preceded by the negative ni, we obtain the indefinite pronoun
ni manna-hun, no one ; gen. ni mans-hun ; dat. ni mann-hun ;
ace. ni mannan-hun ; only in the singular. The numeral
ains, one, with the suffix -hun, and preceded by ni, gives
ni ains-hun, none. Only the following singular forms occur.
Masculine ; nom. ains-hun, gen. ainis-hun, dat. ainumme-hun,
ace. ainno-hun, aino-hun. Feminine ; nom. aino-hun, dat. ainai-
hun, ace. ainno-hun, aino-hun. Neuter; nom. and ace. ain-hun.
Ni hwas-hun, no one, only occurs in the nom. sing. masc.
(10. 18, 29).
d2
lii VERBS. [§ 32.
Hwas, who, with the suffix -uh, gives hwaz-uh, every
(9^ 49). The dat. hwamma-uh is contracted to hwammeh
(14. 49); and the ace. masc. hwana-uh to hwanoh. The
phrase twans hwanz-uh (ace. pi. masc.) means ' two and two '
(6. 7). From hwazuh are deduced the phrases sahwazuh
saez, whosoever (9. 37); dat. this-hwammeh saez, to whom-
soever (4. 25); this-hwazuh ei, whosoever (11. 23); gen.
this-hwtzuh ihei, whatsoever (6. 22); this-hwah thei, what-
soever (6. 23).
Hwarjis, which, with the suffix -uh, gives the indef.
hwarjiz-uh, each, every; ace. fem. hwarjo-h (for hwarja-uh,
15. 6). Cf. hwarjizuh hwa nemi, who should take what (tU
tL apn, 15. 24).
It must also be observed that the word hwas, properly an
interrogative pronoun (see p. li.), is frequently used indefi-
nitely with the sense of ' any one ' or ' any ' (8. 4). Hence
nth hwa = nothing (4. 22); ei hwas, that any one (9. 30);
jabai hwas, if any one, whosoever (4. 23).
§ 32. VERBS.
Of Verbs in general. Verbs have three forms or Voices,
Active, Passive, and Middle. The Passive voice has a
special form for the present tense only, being otherwise
made up of a past participle used with wairthan, to become,
or wisan, to be.
Besides the Infinitive, there are three Moods ; Indicative,
Subjunctive, and Imperative.
There are but two Tenses ; the Present, also used as a
Future ; and the Past tense, used generally to express
imperfect, perfect, aorist, &c.
There are three Numbers; Singular, Dual, and Plural.
Dual forms are scarce.
§ 33-1 ACTIVE VERBS. liii
There are two Participles; the Present, with an active
sense, and the Past, with a passive sense.
The forms of conjugation are distinguished as strong and
weak. Strong verbs form the past tense by vowel-change,
as giban, to give, ik gaf, I gave ; or else by reduplication, as
haldan, to hold, ik haihald, I held. Weak verbs form the
past tense with the suffix -da (-i-da, -ai-da, -o-da) or -ia.
§33. Active Voice; Beduplicating Verbs.
A. Simple form. As a good example, take the verb
haldan, to hold ; where hald-an is the infinitive mood, hald-
being the stem, and -an the suffix.
For the scheme of conjugation, see that of the verb
rinn-an, to run, on p. liv.
The peculiarity of the verb is in the mode of formation of
the past tense. The reduplication consists in repeating the
first letter of the stem before the diphthong at', thus from
haldan is formed the past tense hai-hald. If the stem begins
with a combination of consonants, both consonants are
repeated in the case of verbs beginning with st, sk, hi, hw,
but not otherwise. Hence the past tenses of slaggan,
skaidan, hlaupan, hwopan, are, respectively, stai-stagg, skai-
skaid, hlai-hlaup, and hwai-hwop. But the past tense of
fraisan is fai-frais. That of shpan is both sai-slep and sai-
zlep (with z for s). If the first letter be a vowel, the prefix is
simply at'-, as in althan, pt. t. ai-alth.
B. Form with vowel-change. In all verbs (with the
exception of slepan, pt. t. saizlep, noted above) which contain
the vowel e in the stem, the pt. t. has 0. Thus the pt. t. of
fiek-an is fai-flok. When the stem ends in at-, the pt. t.
likewise has ; thus the pt. t. of wai-an is wai-wo.
It is probable that some verbs belong to this class, of which the past
tense does not happen to occur. In many cases, the pt. t. is only found
in a compound of the verb. The following are examples : —
llV STRONG VERBS. [§ 34.
A-form. az'kan, to say, whence af-ai-aik, denied (14. 68);
aukan, to increase, whence ana-ai-auk (Luke, 3. 20); fahan,
to catch, ^\..X.fai-fah',falthan } to fold, pt. t./ai-fallh (Luke,
4. 20) ; fraisan, to tempt, pt. X./ai-frais ; hahan, to suspend,
whence us-hai-hah (Matt. 27. 5); haitan, to call, pt. t. hat-
hat't; haldan, to hold, pt. t. hai-hald; hwopan, to boast, pt. t.
hwai-hwop ; laikan, to skip, pt. t. lai-laik ; mat'/an, to cut, pt. t.
mai-mait (11. 8); ska/dan, to sever, whence af-skai-skaid
(Gal. 2. 12); slepan, to sleep, whence ga-sai-zlep (Joh. 1 1. 1 1);
staldan, to win, whence ga-stai-staldjau (1 Cor. 9. 19).
B-form. flekan, to lament, pt. t. fai-flok (Luke, 8. 52);
gretan, to weep, pt. t. gai-grot (ibid.) ; laian, to revile, pt. t.
lai-lo\ letan, to let, pt. t. lai-lot (5. 19); redan, to provide
for, whence faura-ga-rai-roth (Eph. 1. 5); saian, to sow,
pt. t. sai-so (4. 4); tekan, to touch, pt. t. tai-tok (5. 30);
waian, to blow, pt. t. wai-wo (Matt. 7. 25). 1
The past participle of a reduplicating verb is formed by
merely adding s to the infinitive mood. Thus from haldan,
to hold, is formed the pp. haldans, holden, held.
§ 34. Active Voice ; Strong Verbs,
with vowel-change.
The general form of a strong verb may be exemplified by
the following conjugation of rinnan, to run.
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense. Past Tense.
Sing. 1. rinn-a rann
2. -is rann-/
3. -ith rann
1 Several others are given by German grammarians; but whoever
attempts to verify them will meet with much difficulty, and will cer-
tainly fail in most cases, the results given being merely theoretical.
§34-1
STRONG VERBS.
lv
Indicative Mood.
Present Tense. Past Tense.
Dual i.
rinn-^j
runn
-u
2.
-tf/.r
runn
-uts
Plu. I.
-am
runn
-um
2.
-iih
runn
-uth
3-
-and
runn
-un
Subjunctive
Mood.
Sing. i.
xmix-au
runn
-jau
2.
-ais
-eis
3-
-ai
-i
Dual i.
-aiwa
-eiwa
2.
-aits
-eits
P/«. i.
-aima
-eima
2.
-aith
-eith
Imperative Mood.
Sing. 2. rinn. Dual 2. rirm-als. Plu. 1. rinn-rt#z.
2. nxm-tth.
Pres. Part. Act. r'mn-ands. Past Part. Pass, mnn-ans.
It will here be observed that the stem-form, which in the
present is rinn-, becomes rann- in the past tense singular,
and runn- in the past tense dual and plural and in the past
participle. Vowel-changes of this character prevail through-
out all strong verbs ; but the vowels vary. In some verbs
the vowel of the past participle is different from that of the
past tense plural. In others, again, the vowel remains
unchanged throughout the past tense.
Instead of adhering to the order of conjugations in Gabe-
lentz and Lobe, I here rearrange them so as to agree with
lvi
STRONG VERBS.
[§34-
the order of Early English Verbs in Morris's Specimens of
English, Part I. (The mere order is not material.)
The first conjugation of Strong verbs (Morris, p. Ixvi)
answers to that of the Gothic reduplicating verbs, discussed
above.
The simplest way of exhibiting the conjugations is to
name them after English verbs which resemble them. There
are thus seven conjugations, viz. — i. hold. 2. draw. 3.
break. 4. give. 5. drink. 6. drive. 7. choose}
The ' principal parts ' of the verb, on which the conjuga-
tions depend, are the infinitive mood, the first person singular
of the past tense, the first person plural of the past tense, and
the past participle. These are frequently given in the Glossary
within a parenthesis, as : bindan (band, bundum, bundans).
The above representative verbs have the following ' prin-
cipal parts ' in Gothic.
INFIN. PT. T. I P. SING. PT. T. I P. PL. PAST PART.
i. haldan
haihald
haihaldum
haldans
2. dragan
drog
drogum
dragans
3. brikan
brak
brekum
brukans
4. giban
gaf
gebum
gibans
5. driggkan
draggk
druggkum
druggkans
6. dreiban
draib
dribum
dribans
7. kiusan
kaus
kusum
kusans
It must here be noted that bairan, to bear, and some
others having ai for i in the infinitive, belong to conj. 3 or
conj. 5, and put au for u. Hence for such verbs the scheme
is bairan, bar, berum, baurans ; wairpan, warp, waurpum,
waurpans. So also saihwan, to see, in conj. 4.
1 These agree with the Early English verbs; since hold and fall
belong to the same conjugation, and so also draw and shake. &c. For
the last four conjugations, the very same representative words have been
chosen.
§ 34-] STRONG VERBS. Ivii
A list of a few representative verbs of each conjugation is
here added.
i. See above; p. liv.
2. Faran (for, forum, fa.Ta.ns), /are, go ; graban (grob, grob-
um, grabans), grave, dig; slahan (sloh, slohum, slahans),
slay, strike; standan (stoth, stothum, stothans 1 ), stand;
swaran, swear; wakan, watch.
3. Niman (nam, nemum, numans) take; kwiman (kwam,
kwemum, kwumans), come; stilan, steal.
4. Itan (at, etum, itans), eat; kwithan (kwath, kwethum, 4/r
kwithans), say (cf. E. quoth) ; ligan, lit ; sitan, sit ; saihwan 2
(sahw, sehwum, saihwans), see. Bidjan (bath or bad, bedum,
bidans), ask, has a weak form for its infinitive. The pt. t. of
fra-itan, devour, is contracted to fret (=fra-at).
Note. — In all verbs of this conjugation the vowel i or
diphthong ai occurs before a single consonant (ih, hw being
single letters).
5. Bindan, bind; brinnan, burn ; duginnan, begin; flnthan,
find; hilpan, help; rinnan, run; siggwan, sing. So also
bairgan (barg, baurgum, baurgans), keep; wairpan (warp,
waurpum, waurpans), throw; wairthan (warth, waurthum,
waurthans), become. Here again ai : au : : i : u.
Note. — In all verbs of this conjugation the vowel i or
diphthong ai is followed by two consonants or a doubled
consonant.
6. Beidan, bide; beitan, bile; leithan, go, travel; skeinan,
shim ; steigan, climb ; urreisan, arise.
1 The pt. t. stoth is for stond*, the n being dropped ; but the pp.
stothans is irregular. Some verbs belonging to this conjugation have a
weak form (in -Jan) for the infinitive mood ; as skath-jan (skoth, skothum,
skathans), to injure.
8 The vowel (ai) of the infin. reappears in the pp. ; as in all other
verbs of this conjugation.
INFIN. PT.
T. I P. SING.
i. {hold)
a, ai, &c.
{redup.)
2. {draw)
a
3. (break)
i(ai) 1
a
4- {g^e)
i (ai) '
a
5. {drink)
i(ai)>
a
6. {drive)
ei
ai
7. {choose)
iu
au
lviil JTOMir VERBS. [§35.
7. Biudan, <5z#, pt. t. bauth; biugan, bow; driusan, /all;
giutan, pour ; liugan, tell lies ; skiuban, shove ; sliupan, slip'
Also (with breaking) tiuhan (tauh, tauhum, tauhans), draw.
The vowel-scheme of strong verbs is therefore as follows.
PT. T. PL. PAST PART.
{redup.) a, ai, &c.
o a
e u (au) l
e i (ai) '
u (au) 1 u(au) 1
i (ai) x i (ai) J
u (au) * u (au) *
In conj. 1 and 2, the stem remains the same throughout
the past tense. Conj. 3 and 4 have the same vowels in the
pt. tense. In conj. 4 the vowel of the pp. is that of the in-
finitive. In conj. 5, 6, and 7 the vowel of the pp. is that of
the pt. t. plural.
We learn, from comparative philology, that the root-vowel
or fundamental vowel is a in conj. 1-5, 1 in conj. 6, and u in
conj. 7.
§ 35. Active Voice; "Weak Verbs.
There are three classes of weak verbs (1) those in which
the pt. t. ends in -ida, and the pp. in -ilhs ; (2) those in
which it ends in -aida, and the pp. in -aiths ; (3) those in
which it ends in -oda, and the pp. in -oths.
Class 1. To this class belong most verbs with the infin.
in -Jan, as lag/an, to lay. The pt. t. lag-ida = lag/- da, the /'
being due to the -J- of the base. Lagjan is thus conjugated.
1 The diphthongs ai, ati occur when the succeeding consonant is h,
hw, or r. See the notes on ' breaking ' ; pp. xxx. and xxxi.
§35-1
WEAK VERBS.
Indicative.
lix
Present Tense.
Past Tense.
Sing.
i.
teg-ja
hg-ida
2.
-jis
-ides
3-
-jith
-ida.
Dual.
i.
-jos
-idedu
2.
-jats
-ideduls
Plu.
I.
-jam
-idedum
2.
-jith
-ideduth
3-
-jand
Subjunctive.
-idedun
Sing.
i
\agjau
\d.g-idedjau
2
-jats
-idedeis
3
jai
-idedi
Dual.
i
-jaiwa
-idedeiwa
2
-jails
-idedeits
Plu.
I
-jaima
-idedeima
2
jaith
-idedeith
3
-jama
Imperative.
-idedeina
Sing. 2. \d.g-ei.
Dual. 2. lag-jals.
Plu. i. \z.g-jam.
2. jith.
Pres. Part. Act
la
gjands. Past Part. Pass, \dig-ilhs.
Exception. Some verbs, like sokjan (to seek) depart
from the above form, in substituting ei for ji wherever it
occurs, viz. in the 2nd and 3rd p. sing, and the 2nd p. pi. of
the pres. indie, and in the 2nd p. pi. imperative. Thus for
sok-jis, sok-jilh we find sok-eis, sok-eith.
Hence the 1st class of weak verbs is subdivided into two classes :
(A) like lagjan ; (B) like sokjan.
lx WEAK VERBS. [§ 35.
(A). Like lagjan are conjugated verbs with a short stem-syllable, or
in which the stem-syllable ends in a vowel or diphthong. Examples
are: hramjan, crucify; nasjan, save ; satjan, set; waljan, choose; wrak-
jan, persecute. Also : stojan, judge (pt. t. stauida) ; straujan, strew (pt.
t. strawida) ; taujan, do (pt. t. tawida). Also: afdaujan, vex; ananiu-
jan, renew ; gakwiujan, quicken ; siujan, sew.
(B). Like sokjan are conjugated verbs with long vowels within the
stem-syllable, or in which the stem-syllable ends with two consonants
or a double consonant. Examples are : domjan, deem ; draibjan, drive ;
gaskeirjan, explain ; hausjan, hear ; meljan, write ; merjan, proclaim.
Also airzjan, err ; balthjan, be bold, dare; fulljan, fill; sandjan, send.
So also verbs with stems of more than one syllable, as: audagjan, bless;
glitmunjan, glisten ; mikiljan, magnify ; swogatjan, sigh ; &c.
Class 2. Haban, to have, is thus conjugated.
Indicative.
Present Tense. Past Tense.
Sing. 1. hab-0 h&b-aida
2. -ais -aides
3. -ailh -at da
Dual. 1. -os -aidedu
2. -als -aideduls
Plu. 1. -am -aidedum
2. -aith -aidedu th
3. -and -aidedun
Subjunctive.
Sing. 1. hab-aw hab-aidedjau
2. -ais -aidedeis
3. -ai -aidedi
Dual. 1. -aiwa -aidedeiwa
2. -ails -aidedeils
Plu. 1. -aima -aidedeima
2. -ailh -aidedeilh
3. -aina -aidedeina
§ 36.] VERBS IN -NAN. lxi
Imperative.
Sing. 2. hab-ai. Dual. 2. hab-a/j. Plu. 1. hab-am.
2 . -aith.
Pres. Part, hab-ands. Past Part. Pass, hab-ailhs.
Some of the principal verbs of this class are : arman, pity ; bauan,
build ; fastan, fast; fijan, hate; hlifan, steal; leikan, please; liban,
live; liugan, marry; munan, consider; skaman, be ashamed of;
slawan, be silent; sweran, honour', thahan, be silent; thulan, suffer;
trauan, trow, trtist.
Class 3. To this class belong all infinitives in -on, and
the conjugation is like that of Class 2, but with throughout
in place of ai (or a, or 0). Thus the pres. indie, of spill-on
(to tell) is : spill-0, -os, -oth ; -os, -ots ; -om, -oth, -ond. The
pt. t. is : spiW-oda, -odes, &c. Subj. pres. spill-0, -os, -0, &c.
Note. — When we compare the three classes of strong verbs, it be-
comes obvious that the pt. t. is really formed by subjoining to the base
of the verb a suffix which is thus conjugated : -da, -des, -da ; -dedu,
-deduts ; -dedwn, -dedut, -dedun.
This suffix originated in a reduplicated past tense from the base da,
to do, which is still preserved in the mod. E. did (A. S. dy-de). Thus
habai-dedun = have-did, now abbreviated to had. We hence learn that
the -ed in mod. E. lov-ed is nothing but a much mutilated remnant of
the same reduplicated past tense. It is remarkable that the verb to do,
after being thus turned into an auxiliary suffix, was otherwise entirely
lost in Gothic, though preserved in Anglo-Saxon and English.
§ 36. Verbs ending in -nan.
Verbs ending in -nan have a passive signification, as
fullnan, to be filled or to become full, gahailnan, to be healed,
to become whole, gawaknan, to become awake. They are
weak verbs, regularly conjugated like lagjan (writing n for J)
in the present indicative and subjunctive, and like spillon
(Class 3) in the past tense. Thus the present of fullnan
is full-na, -nis, -nith, &c; and the past is fulln-oda, -odes,
-oda, &c. The second person sing, imperative \%fulln.
lxii PASSIVE VERBS. [§37.
The n is due to the strong pp. suffix ; thus us-gutn-an, to be poured
out, gush out, is derived from us, out, and gutan-s, pp. of giutan, to
pour ; though several of these verbs must have been formed by analogy
merely.
§ 37. Passive Voice.
There is a special form for the passive voice in the pre-
sent tense only, which is easily recognised, in general, by the
suffix -da (subj. -dau). The past tense is formed by using
the pp. in conjunction with wisan, to be, or wairthan, to be-
come. Moreover, this passive form only occurs in a limited
number of verbs.
The same form serves for verbs of all conjugations, and
may be exemplified in the verb haitan, to call, passive ik
haiiada, I am called, which is thus conjugated.
Indicative.
Sing. hait-fld2, -aza, -ada. Plu. 1. 2. 3. hdit-anda.
Subjunctive.
Sing, hzit-aidau, -aizau, -aidau. Plu. 1. 2. 3. h<-aindau.
Verbs in -on preserve the throughout. Thus the indie,
is spill-oda, -oza, -oda, pi. -onda; and the subj. is spiM-odau,
&c.
The following examples occur in St. Mark's Gospel.
(A). Strong verbs. Afletanda (2. 5); amimada (2. 20); saiada
(4. 15); saltada (9.49).
(B.) Weak verbs. Gadailjada (3. 24) ; satjaidau (4. 21); gabairht-
jaidau (4. 22); daupjada, daupjaindau (10. 38) ; gawagjanda (13. 25);
merjada, rodjada (14. 9) ; galewjada (14. 41).
Middle Voice.
The form is the same as for the passive. The traces
of a middle voice are very slight. In St. Mark's Gospel
there is one instance in the word atsieigadau, let him come
down (15. 32).
$38.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. lxiii
!§ 38. Anomalous and Auxiliary Verbs.
The verbs 1-13 below use as a present tense an old
strong preterite form, from which new weak preterites were
afterwards formed. Many of them are very imperfect, and
some of their forms are conjectural : ; but some are of com-
mon occurrence and of considerable importance. Compare
Sweet, A. S. Primer, p. 34.
1. Aigan, aihan, own, have. Pr. sing, aih, pi. aigum; pt. I.
aihta. (Cf. E. ought.)
2. Dugan*, avail, be worth. Pr. sing. daug. (Cf. A. S.
dtigan, whence E. doughty.) This verb is used impersonally.
3. Ga-daursan, dare. Pr. sing, gadars, //. gadaursum;
pt. I. gadaursta. (E. dare, durst)
4. Ga-motan*, find place. Pr. sing, gamot, pi. gamotum*;
pt. t. gamosta. (E. must)
5. Kunnan, know. Pr. sing, kann, pi. kunnum ; pt. t.
kuntha, pp. kunths. (E. can, could, un-couth)
6. Leisan*, learn. Only in the pr. s. lais = I have learnt, I
know (Phil. 4. 12).
7. Magan, may. Pr. s. mag, pi. magum ; pt. i. mahta;
pp. mahts (possible). (E. may, might.)
8. Munan, think, suppose. Pr. s. man, pi. munum ; pt. t.
munda. The form ga-munan also occurs ; pr. s. gaman, pi.
gamunum ; pt. l. gamunda. (A. S. geman, I remember.)
9. Nahan*, suffice. Only impersonally, in the compounds
bi-nah, ga-nah, it suffices. The pp. bi-nauhts, sufficient,
occurs in 1 Cor. 10. 23. (E. e-nough)
10. Og&n*,/ear. Pr. s. og, pi. ogum*; pt. t. ohta.
1 1 . Skulan* (be obliged to do). Pr. s. skal, pi. skulum ;
pt. l. skulda ; pp. skulds. (E. shall, should.)
'
1 The unauthorised forms are marked *.
lxiv ANOMALOUS VERBS. [§38.
1 2. Thaurban*, need. Pr. s. tharf, //. thaurbum ; pt. I.
thaurfta ; pp. thaurfts {necessary). (A. S. \>earf.)
13. Witan*, see, know. Pr. s. wait, pi. witum ; pt. I. wissa.
(E. wit, wot, wist)
Note 1. The above verbs kunnan, tnunan, and witan, are distinct
from the allied verbs gakunnan, to know (pt. t. gakunnaida), munan,
to intend (pt. t. munaida), and witan, to observe (pt. t. witaida, 3. 2).
Note 2. The above verbs are conjugated in the present tense like
the preterites of strong verbs ; thus the pres. t. of kunnan is kann,
kann-t, kann ; pi. kunnum, &c. The past tense follows the analogy of
the preterites of weak verbs ; thus the pt. t. is kunth-a, kunth-es, kunth-a;
pi. kunth-edum, kunth-eduth, kunth-edun. This abbreviated form is
due to the great antiquity of such formations and their consequent
corruption.
14. Wiljan, will, wish. This verb only appears (in the
present) in an optative form, which in Gothic is the same
as the subjunctive. This peculiar use is due to the peculiar
sense. It is thus conjugated. Sing. vji\-jau, -eis, -i; dual,
m\-eiwa, -eils ; pi. ml-eima, -eith, -eina. The pt. t. is wilda.
(E. will, would)
15. Wisan, be. This verb is made up from two separate
Aryan roots as and was. In Gothic the dual and plural of
the present have inflections resembling those of a past tense.
It is thus conjugated.
Indicative.
Sing.
Dual.
Plu.
Present Tense.
Past Tense.
I.
im
was
2.
is
wast
3-
ist
was
I.
siju
wesu
2.
sijuts
wesuts
I.
sijum
wesum
2.
sijuth
wesuth
3-
sind
wesun
§38.] ANOMALOUS VERBS. lxv
Subjunctive.
Present Tense. Past Tense.
Sing. i. sijau wesjau
2. sijais weseis
3. sijai wesi
Dual. 1. sijaiwa weseiwa
2. sijaits weseits
Plu. 1. sijaima weseima
2. sijaith weseith
3. sijaina weseina
Used with past participles, wisan helps to form passive
verbs; as, swa gamelith ist, as it is written (1. 2); daupidai
wesun, were baptized (1. 5).
Wisan also occurs in the sense 'to continue, remain'; cf.
wesun (8. 2).
16. Gaggan, go. The pt. t. is properly gaggida (Luke,
19. 12), but this only occurs once. The pt. t. iddja, went, is
commonly used, though it is from a different root. (Cf.
A. S. /ode, went, used as pt. t. of gdn, to go.) The pp. is
gaggans (see 7. 30).
17. The following weak verbs also have a peculiar forma-
tion of the pt. tense and pp.
a. Briggan, bring. Pt.t. brahta (^brought, 9. 17).
b. Brukjan, make use of. Pt. t. bruhta.
c. Bugjan, buy. Pt. t. bauhta {bought) ; pp. bauhts.
d. Thagkjan, think. Pi. t. thahta {thought, 8. 16); pp.
thahts.
e. Thugkjan, seem. Pt. t. thuhta ; pp. thuhts.
f. Waurkjan, work. Pt. t. waurhta ; pp. waurhts.
These past tenses are conjugated like kuntha ; see no. 13
above, note 2.
Note. Haban, have, is conjugated above, on p. Ix. So also wairthan,
become, which belongs to conj. 5 ; see p. lvii.
lxvi ADVERBS. [§ 39.
§ 39. ADVERBS.
The usual ending of adverbs formed from adjectives is
-aba (also -iba, -uba). The variation of vowel depends upon
the original final vowel of the base. Exx. baitr-aba, bitterly,
from baitrs (base baitra), bitter : analaugn-iba, secretly,
from analaugns, secret, pointing to a base analaugni : hard-
uba (but also hard-aba), hardly, from hardus (base hardu),
hard.
Another common suffix is -0 ; as uhteigo, seasonably, from
uhleigs, seasonable.
Comparison. The comparative suffix is properly -is, as
in ma-is, more, fram-is, further (1. 19); but also -s, as in
wair-s, worse. The superlative suffix is -ist, as in frum-ist,
first (4. 28).
Some of the more important adverbs are the following.
1. Of time. Aftra again, air early, anaks suddenly, bithe
whilst, hwan when, ni hwanhun never, hweilohun awhile,
ju already, juthan already, nauh still, yet, ni nauhthan not yet,
nu now, seithu late, simle once, sinteino always, suman once on
a time, suns soon, sunsaiw straightway, than then, thanuh then,
ufta often.
2. Of place. Faur forth, inn in (verbal prefix), nehw
nigh, ut out. With suffix -a : afta behind, dalatha below,
fairra far, faura before, inna in (verbal prefix), iupa above,
nehwa nigh, uta out. With suffix -ar (-er) : aljar elsewhere,
her here, hindar beyond, away (also a verbal prefix), hwar
where, jainar there, thar there, ufar beyond. With suffix -aro :
aftaro behind, ufaro thereon. With suffix -ana : aftana behind,
innana within, iupana again, utana without. With suffix
-ath : aljath away, dalath down, hwath whither. With suffix
-dre : hidre hither, hwadre whither, jaindre there {yonder).
With suffix -thro : aljathro by another way, fairrathro from
§§40,4i-] PREPOSITIONS. Ixvil
afar y hwathro whence, innathro from within, iupathro from
above, jainthro thence, thathro thence, utathro from without.
Compounded with ei : thadei whither, tharei where, thathroei
whence. With enclitic uh : tharuh there. Also : bisunjane
round about, sundro separately.
3. Of manner. Here belong adverbs in -aba, -iba, -uba,
-0, -leiko (E. -ly).
Other adverbs are: allis wholly, duhwe wherefore, duthe
therefore, filu much, hwe how, hweh only, ja, jai yes, ne no,
ni, nih nor, niu not, sunja verily, swa so, sware in vain,
thatainei only, thishun especially, waila well, wainei if only,
waitei perhaps, &c.
§ 40. PREPOSITIONS.
1. With the dative : af from, alja except, faura before,
fram from, mith with, undaro under, us out.
2. With the accusative : and along, at, faur for, before,
inuh without, thairh through, undar wft&r, withra against.
3. With both dative and accusative: afar a/fcr, ana on,
at 0/, bi 3y, du to, hindar behind, uf under, ufar 0Z>£r, und z#z/0.
Of these, du takes the accusative once only (Col. 4. 10).
4. With genitive, dative, and accusative : in in, on account
of With the sense 'on account of it takes the genitive.
Bi and du also occur with the instrumental, as in bi-the,
du-the. Faur takes the genitive in faur this, beforehand.
§41. CONJUNCTIONS.
These are (1) Copulative, as : jah and, -uh and (used as
an enclitic, and often abbreviated to -h), nih and not. So
also in the phrases : nih thatainei — ak jah, not only — but also,
nih — ak jah, not only — but also. (2) Disjunctive, as : aiththau
or, andizuh — aiththau, either — or, jabai — aiththau, either — or,
jaththe — jaththe, whether — or. (3) Denoting opposition, as :
ak but, akei however, aththan but, ith but, than but. (4) Causal,
lxviii INTERJECTIONS. [§§ 42, 43.
as : allis for, auk for, raihtis for, unte because. (5) Ex-
pressing a conclusion, as : eithan therefore, nu now, thannu
therefore, thanuh therefore, tharuh therefore. (6) Conditional,
as : jabai if, niba, nibai if not, except. (7) Expressing con-
cession, as : thauhjabai though, jah jabai even if, swethauh
however. (8) Final, as : ei that, thatei that, theei that, unte
in order that, swe so that, swaei j<? that, swaswe so as that.
(9) Of comparison, as : hwaiwa how ? swe so, swaswe so as,
as; and in the phrases: swe — jah, as — so, swe — swah,
as — so, swaswe — swa, as — so. (10) Of time, as: afar thatei
after that, bithe while, faurthizei before that, miththanei whilst,
sunsei as soon as, swe just as, than when, thande when, as
long as, unte until, und thatei until that.
§ 42. INTERJECTIONS.
These are : O oh I sai see ! wai woe ! We also find an
old imperative used interjectionally : hiri come thou hither !
hirjats come here, you two ! hirjith come ye hither !
§43. PREFIXES.
The following are the most important prefixes : —
af-, originally 'from,' 'away/ or 'off'; also used intensively.
(E. of off.)
afar-, ' after.'
ana-, 'on' or 'upon'; also used intensively, or with the
notion of addition. (E. on.)
anda-, 'in return/ like Gk. dvri; also 'against.'
and-, orig. the same as the above ; also used as a verbal
prefix with the notion of reversing an action, answering
to E. verbal un-. Ex. bindan, to bind, and-bindan, to
unbind. 1
1 We thus learn that the E. verbal prefix in un-bind is of totally
different origin from un- as a negative prefix (= Goth. un-).
§ 43-1 PREFIXES. lxiX
at-, 'at,' 'before,' 'near'; hence 'to' or 'towards,' 'upon.'
bi-, originally ' by' or • around'; sometimes used to specialise
the meaning of a verb. Cf. E. be-; thus Goth, bi-
ihaggkjan = E. be-ihink.
dis-, originally ' apart 'or 'in twain,' used as an intensive
prefix ; as in dis-tairan, to tear asunder.
du-, originally 'to' or 'towards.'
faur-, faura-, originally 'before'; the former also occurs in
the sense ' forth,' or ' by,' or intensively. (E.fore-.)
fra-, rarely fair-, an intensive prefix answering to E. for- in
for-bear (Goth, fra-bairan). It often implies ' loss ' or
' destruction/ as in fra-lusts, destruction (G. ver-lust).
We can explain E. fr-et as =for-eat (Goth, /ra-
ttan).
ga-, originally ' together/ or expressive of ' completion.' But
its sense is very weak, and it frequently seems to add
no force to the word. It is extremely common. (A. S.
id-, originally 'back' or 'again/ like Lat. re-. Occurs in
id-weit, reproach, id-weitjan, to reproach. (A.. S. ed-.)
in-, inn-, inna-, 'in' or 'on'; hence 'into' or 'upon.' (E.
in.)
missa-, answering to E. mi's- in mis-deed.
mith-, ' with'; merely the preposition. (A. S. mid.)
n-, negative prefix ; as in n-i, not, n-e, nay.
sama-, Eng. same) as in sama-kuns, of the same kin.
thairh-, ' through '; the preposition.
tus-, orig. ' apart.' Only in tuz-werjan, to doubt. Probably
the same as, or allied to, the following.
twis-, orig. 'in twain' or 'apart'; as in iwis-stass, sedition;
lit. a standing apart.
uf-, ' under ' or ' up.'
ufar-, ' over ' or ' above.' (E. over.)
e 3
lxx SVNTAX. [§§ 44, 45.
un-, negative prefix; common. (E. u?i-, except before
verbs; see p. lxviii., note 1.)
us- (which before r becomes ur-), orig. 'out'; used also as
an intensive prefix, like A. S. a-, E. a- in a-rise (Goth.
ur-reisan). Cf. also A. S. or-, E, or- in or-deal.
ut-, ' out.' (A. S. Ut, E. out.)
withra-, against; the preposition.
§ 44. SYNTAX.
So far as concerns the translation, the syntax presents but
little difficulty ; for the more minute points, the reader should
consult the Notes at p. 41, or Stamm's edition. The fol-
lowing hints may prove useful.
Article. The definite article sa, so, thata is declined
on p. xlix. It agrees with its sb. in gender and case. As it
was originally a demonstrative pronoun, we find it used
(when joined with ei) even as a relative, as in: thata badi, ana
thammei lag sa uslitha, the bed on which the paralytic man
lay (2. 4). Observe also Johannis sa daupjands, John the
Baptist (6. 14); hwo so laiseino so niujo, of what sort is this
doctrine, new as it is (1. 27). It is sometimes followed by
the genitive, as : Jakobau thamma Zaibaidaiaus James the
(son) of Zebedee (3. 17); cf. 16. 1.
§ 45. Adjectives.
The circumstances under which these take the strong or
weak declension are given in § 22. An example of the use
of the weak declension where there is no definite article is:
alfairgunja alewjin, at the Mount of Olives, lit. Olive Moun-
tain (11. 1). Sometimes the comparative is formed by help
of mais, more, instead of with a suffix, as : goth 1st imma
mat's, it is more good for him (9. 42).
§§46-48.] SYNTAX OF VERBS. lxxi
§ 46. Numerals.
These sometimes govern a genitive, as: /wans siponje
seinaize, two of his disciples (11. 1).
§ 47. Pronouns.
Pronouns are frequently omitted, where the person is suffi-
ciently indicated by the suffix of the verb. The insertion of
them renders them more emphatic, as : si, she (6. 24). Sama
without the def. article means ' one and the same ' (10. 8).
A curious use of the relative occurs in : hwa nu wileilh,
ei taujau thammei kwithith thiudan Iudaie, what now do ye
wish that I shall do to the man whom ye call the king of
the Jews? (15. 12.) Here thammei "= thamma thanei, i. e. to
the man, whom that ; the fact being that thamma is the dative
after taujau, whilst ei, the indeclinable relative, is the accusa-
tive governed by kwithith. Thai ize, those who (9. 1), stands
for thai eiz-ei, lit. they those who.
Hwas, the interrogative pronoun, is also used in the sense
of ' any one ' or ' one ' ; see 8. 4.
Alls can be used without a sb., as : aftra gaboteilh alia,
will restore all things (9. 12). It can even govern a geni-
tive, as : allata lhata frawaurhte, lit. the every one of trans-
gressions (3. 28).
§ 48. Verbs.
Verbs agree with their nominatives in number and person ;
)ut we find a plural verb with a noun of multitude, as : setun
bi ina managei, the multitude sat about him (3. 32).
The future is expressed by the present, as: gasaihwith
thana suna mans, they shall see the Son of man (14. 62).
lxxii SYNTAX OF VERBS. [§48.
Examples of the subjunctive are : ni haband hwa matjaina
lit. they have not what they may eat (8. 2); andrunnun,
hwarjis mai'sis west, lit. they disputed, which might be the
greatest (9. 34).
It is very common after ei (that), as : jah ni wilda ei hwas
ivissedi, and he would not that any one should know it
(9. 30).
The latter of two verbs is put in the infinitive, as in Latin,
as: ohledun ina fraihnan, they feared to ask him (9. 32).
When it is intended to express an intention, the prep, du
is used before the infinitive, as : sat du aihlron, he sat for
the purpose of begging (10. 46).
The passive infinitive is variously expressed. Sometimes
the phrase maht wisan or skuld wisan is employed, as : maht
wesi frabugjan, lit. it were possible to sell, i. e. it might have
been sold (14. 5). Sometimes the infinitive active is awk-
wardly employed for the passive, as : gawairpan = to be cast
(9- 45)-
The present participle can be used with wisan or wairthan
to express past time, as : was Johannes daupjands, John was
baptizing (1. 4). This is not only an English idiom, but
occurs in the original Greek (eyeWo ftairrifav).
Similarly the past participle can be used to express the
passive, as : was Iohannes gawasilhs, John was clothed
(1.6).
The rather common use of the dative absolute should
here be noticed. A curious instance is: jah wisandin Paitrau
in rohsnai da/a/ha jah aiiddja aina thiujo, and Peter being in
the hall below, there came also a maid-servant (14. 66).
The occurrence of the second jah is here quite superfluous
and exceptional. We even find a nominative absolute, as :
waurthans dags gatils, a convenient day being come (6. 21);
but this is quite unusual.
§ 49 .] SYNTAX OF VERBS. lxxiii
§ 49. Government of Verbs.
Accusative after Verbs. Most verbs govern an accu-
sative case. We also find a double accusative after verbs of
calling, naming, considering, taking, giving. Ex. : Daweid
kwiihith ina fraujan, David calls him Lord (12. 37); and
see 10. 45. The construction of 'the accusative before the
infinitive' is not uncommon, as : hwa wileits taujan mik igkwz's,
what will ye that I shall do for you two ? (10. 36). Compare :
baudans gataujith gahausjan, he makes the deaf to hear (7. 37).
Genitive after Verbs. Some verbs govern the genitive,
chiefly such as express freeing, filling full of or taking away
from, using, asking, &c. The verb wisan, to be, is often fol-
lowed by a genitive. Ex. : aim's thus wan z'st, there is lack of
one thing to thee (10. 21) ; hwis ist sa manleika, whose is the
image? (12. 16); Chrisiaus sijuth, ye are Christ's (9. 41)-
The occurrence of a genitive is sometimes due to ellipsis, as :
ei nemi akranis, that he might receive (some) of the fruit
(12. 2).
Dative after Verbs. This is most common in conjunc-
tion with an accusative. The accusative is understood in :
gif tharbam, give (it) to the poor (10. 21). Compare : and-
bahtos lofam slohun zna, the servants struck him with the
palms of their hands (14. 65).
Some verbs take the dative instead of an accusative, as :
galaistans waurthun imma, they followed him (1. 36); wairp
thus, cast thyself (11. 23).
1XX1V LIST OF INFLECTIONS. [§50.
§ 50. EPITOME OF THE PRINCIPAL INFLECTIONS.
The following brief epitome, shewing the inflections, etc., which are
of most frequent occurrence, may be of some help to the beginner.
Definite Article.
N. sa so thata PL thai thos tho
G. this thizos this thize thizo thize
D. thamma thizai thamma thaim thaim thaim
A. thana tho thata thans thos tho
Instrumental, the. Sa is often followed by the enclitic u/i or h ; as
sa-h, so-h, that-uh, etc.
Strong Substantives.
The cases are given in the order nom. gen. dat. ace. The vocative is
omitted.
1. Masc. Fisk-j, -is, -a, — ; -os, -e, -am, -ans. Fern. Gib-a, -os, -at,
-a ; -os, -0, -om, -os. Neut. Waurd, -is, -a, — ; -a, -e, -am, -a.
2. Masc. Balg-J - , -is, -a, — ; -eis, -e, -im, -ins. Fern. Anst-J, -ais,
-ai, — ; -eis, -e, -im, -ins.
3. Masc. Sxrn-us, -aus, -au, -u ; -jus, -iwe, -um, -uns. So also Fern.
Hand-w^. Neut. Faih-«, -aus, -au, -u.
4. Broth-ar, -rs, -r, -ar ; brothr-jus, -e, -um, -uns.
5. Giband-j, -is, — , — ; -s, -e, -am, -s.
"Weak Substantives.
1 . Masc. Han-a, -ins, -in, -an ; -ans, -ane, -am, -ans.
2. Fern. Tuggo (Managei), -ns, -n, -n ; -ns, -no, -m, -ns.
3. Neut, Hairt-0, -ins, -in, -0; -ona, -ane, -am, -ona.
Strong Adjectives.
1. Masc. Blind-.?, -is, -amtna, -ana ; -ai, -aize, -aim, -ans.
Fern. Blind-0, -aizos, -ai, -a ; -os, -aizo, -aim, -os.
Neut. ~Blind(ata), -is, -amma, -(ata) ; -a, -aize, -aim, -a.
2. Masc. Hard-wj-, harclj-zV, -amma, -ana ; hardj-az', etc.
Fern. Hard-wj, hurd'yaizos, -ai, -a ; hardj-^j, etc.
Neut. Hard-# (-jata), hardj-zV, -amma, hard-w {-jata) ; hardj-a, etc-
"Weak Adjectives.
Masc. as Hana ; Fern, as Tuggo ; Neut. as Hairto. See Weak Sbs.
§ 5 o.] LIST OF INFLECTIONS. lxXV
Pronouns.
Personal. I. Ik, meina, mis, mik; pi. weis, unsara, unsis (uns),
unsis (uns).
2. Thu, theina, thus, thuk ; jus, izwara, izwis, izwis.
3. Masc. is, is, imma, ina; eis, ize, im, ins.
Fern, si, izos, izai, ija ; ijos, izo, im, ijos.
Neut. ita, is, imma, ita ; ija, ize, im, ija.
Possessive. 1. Meins. 2. Theins. 3. Seins (as strong adj.).
So also: 1. Unsar. 2. Izwar. 3. Seins.
Belative. Commonly the def. art., followed by ei.
Interrogative (also indefinite). Hwas, fern, hwo, neut. hwa ; (de-
clined like sa). Hwas is often followed by -uh or -hun.
Strong "Verbs.
The principal parts are (1) infin. (2)pt. t. 1 p. s. (3) pt. t. ip.pl. (4) pp.
1. (hold). Haldan, haihald, haihaldum, haldans.
2. (draw). Dragan, drog, drogum, dragans . . . a, o, o, a.
3. (break). Brikan, brak, brekum, brukans . . . i, a, e, u.
4. (give). Giban, gaf, gebum, gibans . . . i, a, e, i.
5. (drink). Driggkan, draggk, druggkum, druggkans . . . i, a, u, u.
6. drive). Dreiban, draib, dribum, dribans . . . ei, ai, i, i.
7. (choose). Kiusan, kaus, kusum, kusans . . . iu, au, u, u.
"Weak Verbs.
1. (lay). Lagjan, pt. t. lagida, pp. lagiths.
2. (have). Haban,//. /. habaida, pp. habaiths.
3. (tell). Spillon, pt. t. spilloda,//. spilloths.
General Scheme of endings (strong verbs have also vozvel-change).
Indie. Pres. -a (-o), -s, -th ; -os, -ts ; -m, -th, -nd.
Past Tense (strong). — , -/, — ; -u, -uts ; -um, -uth, -un.
Past Tense (weak), -da, -des, -da; -dedu, -deduts ; -dedum, -deduth,
-dedun.
Subjunct. Pres. -au (-0), -s, -ai (-0) ; -wa, -ts ; -ma, -th, -na.
Past Tense (strong), -jau, -eis, -i ; . . ., -eits ; -eima, -eith, -eina.
Past Tense (weak), -dedjau, -dedeis, -dedi ; . . ., -dedeits ; -dedeima,
-dedeith, -dedeina.
Imperative. Dual. 2. -ts ; pi. 1. -m ; 2. -th.
Infinitive (strong), -an ; (weak) -jan, -an, -on.
Pres. Part, (strong), -ands ; (weak) -jands, -ands, -onds.
Past. Part, (strong), -ans ; (weak) -iths, -aiths, -oths.
For anomalous verbs, see § 38, pp. lxiii-lxv.
ERRATA.
P. 12, ch. v, verse 22. For Jaeirus read Iaeirus.
P. 52, note to ch. ix, verse 1. For those of them who read lit. ' they-
they-who'; see § 47, line 1 1.
AIWAGGELJO THAIRH MARKU
ANASTODEITH.
CHAPTER I.
i Anastodeins aiwaggeljons Iesuis Christaus sunaus guths.
2 Swe gamelith ist in Esai'in praufetau :
Sai, ik insandja aggilu meinana faura thus,
saei gamanweith wig theinana faura thus.
3 Stibna wopjandins in authidai :
Manweith wig fraujins,
raihtos waurkeith staigos guths unsaris.
4 Was Iohannes daupjands in authidai jah merjands daupein
5 idreigos du aflageinai frawaurhte. Jah usiddjedun du imma
all Iudaialand jah Iairusaulymeis, jah daupidai wesun allai in
Iaurdane ahwai fram imma, andhaitandans frawaurhtim sein-
6 aim. Wasuth-than Iohannes gawasiths taglam ulbandaus
jah gairda filleina bi hup seinana, jah matida thramsteins jah
7 milith haithiwisk ; Jah merida kwithands : kwimith swinthoza
mis sa afar mis, thizei ik ni im wairths anahneiwands and-
Sbindan skaudaraip skohe is. Aththan ik daupja izwis in
watin, ith is daupeith izwis in ahmin weihamma.
9 Jah warth in jainaim dagam, kwam Iesus fram Nazaraith
Galeilaias, jah daupiths was fram Iohanne in Iaurdane.
io Jah suns usgaggands us thamma watin gasahw usluknans
ii himinans, jah ahman swe ahak atgaggandan ana ina. Jah
io. MS. usluknans; U. usluknandans.
B
2 S. MARK 1. 3 2-27.
stibna kwam us himinam: thu is sunus meins sa liuba, in
thuzei waila galeikaida.
12,13 Jah suns sai, ahma ina ustauh in authida. Jah was in
thizai authidai dage fidwor tiguns fraisans fram Satanin, jah
was mith diuzam ; jah aggileis andbahtidedun imma.
14 Ith afar thatei atgibans warth Iohannes, kwam Iesus in
15 Galeilaia merjands aiwaggeljon thiudangardjos guths, Kwith-
ands, thatei usfullnoda thata mel jah atnehwida sik thiud-
angardi guths : idreigoth jah galaubeith in aiwaggeljon.
16 Jah hwarbonds faur marein Galeilaias gasahw Seimonu jah
Andraian brothar is, this Seimonis, wairpandans nati in mar-
i7ein; wesun auk fiskjans. Jah kwath im Iesus: hirjats afar
18 mis, jah gatauja igkwis wairthan nutans manne. Jah suns
19 afletandans tho natja seina laistidedun afar imma. Jah
jainthro inn gaggands framis leitil gasahw Iakobu thana
Zaibaidaiaus jah Iohanne brothar is, jah thans in skipa
20 manwjandans natja. Jah suns haihait ins. Jah afletandans
attan seinana Zaibaidaiu in thamma skipa mith asnjam,
galithun afar imma.
21 Jah galithun in Kafarnaum ; jah suns sabbato daga ga-
22 leithands in synagogen laisida ins. Jah usfilmans waurthun
ana thizai laiseinai is : unte was laisjands ins swe waldufni
23 habands jah ni swaswe thai bokarjos. Jah was in thizai
synagogen ize manna in unhrainjamma ahmin, jah ufhropida,
24 Kwithands : fralet, hwa uns jah thus, Iesu Nazorenai, kwamt
frakwistjan uns ? Kann thuk, hwas thu is, sa weiha guths.
25 Jah andbait ina Iesus kwithands : thahai, jah usgagg ut us
26 thamma, ahma unhrainja. Jah tahida ina ahma sa unhrainja,
27 jah hropjands stibnai mikilai usiddja us imma. Jah afslauth-
nodedun allai sildaleikjandans, swaei sokidedun mith sis
misso kwithandans : hwa sijai thata ? hwo so laiseino so
12. M. sa ahma. 19. MS. leita; L. leitil; U. leitilata.
S. MARK 1. 38-44. 3
niujo, ei mith waldufnja jah ahmam thaim unhrainjam
28 anabiudith jah ufhausjand imma? Usiddja than meritha is
suns and allans bisitands Galeilaias. *
29 Jah suns us thizai synagogen usgaggandans kwemun in
garda Seimonis jah Andraiins mith Iakobau jah Iohannen.
30 Ith swaihro Seimonis lag in brinnon ; jah suns kwethun
31 imma bi ija. Jah duatgaggands urraisida tho undgreipands
handu izos, jah aflailot tho so brinno suns, jah andbahtida
im.
32 Andanahtja than waurthanamma, than gasaggkw sauil,
berun du imma allans thans ubil habandans jah unhulthons
33 habandans. Jah so baurgs alia garunnana was at daura.
34 Jah gahailida managans ubil habandans missaleikaim sauh-
tim, jah unhulthons managos uswarp, jah ni fralailot rodjan
thos unhulthons, unte kunthedun ina.
35 Jah air uhtwon usstandands usiddja, jah galaith ana auth-
36jana stath, jah jainar bath. Jah galaistans waurthun imma
37 Seimon jah thai mith imma. Jah bigitandans ina kwethun
38 du imma, thatei allai thuk sokjand. Jah kwath du im :
gaggam du thaim bisunjane haimom jah baurgim, ei jah
39 jainar merjau, unte duthe kwam. Jah was merjands in
synagogim ize and alia Galeilaian jah unhulthons uswairp-
ands.
40 Jah kwam at imma thrutsfill habands, bidjands ina jah
kniwam knussjands jah kwithands du imma, thatei jabai
41 wileis, magt mik gahrainjan. Ith Iesus infeinands, ufrak-
jands handu seina attaitok imma, jah kwath imma : wiljau,
42 wairth hrains. Jah bithe kwath thata Iesus, suns thata thruts-
43 fill aflaith af imma, jah hrains warth. Jah gahwotjands
44 imma, suns ussandida ina, Jah kwath du imma: saihw ei
mannhun ni kwithais waiht; ak gagg thuk silban ataugjan
38. MS. haimon.
B 2
4 S. MARK 1. 45-2. 12.
gudjin, jah atbair fram gahraineinai theinai thatei anabauth
45 Moses, du weitwodithai im. Ith is usgaggands dugann
merjan filu jah uskwithan thata waurd, swaswe is juthan
ni mahta andaugjo in baurg galeithan, ak uta ana authjaim
stadim was ; jah iddjedun du imma allathro.
CHAPTER II.
i Jah galaith aftra in Kafarnaum afar dagans, jah gafrehun
2 thatei in garda ist. Jah suns gakwemun managai, swaswe
juthan ni gamostedun nih at daura, jah rodida im waurd.
3 Jah kwemun at imma uslithan bairandans, hafanana fram
4 fidworim. Jah ni magandans nehwa kwiman imma faura
manageim, andhulidedun hrot tharei was Iesus ; jah usgrab-
andans insailidedun thata badi jah fralailotun, ana thammei
5 lag sa uslitha. Gasaihwands than Iesus galaubein ize kwath
du thamma uslithin : barnilo, afletanda thus frawaurhteis
6 theinos. Wesunuh than sumai thize bokarje jainar sitandans
7 jah thagkjandans sis in hairtam seinaim : Hwa sa swa rodeith
naiteinins ? hwas mag afletan frawaurhtins, niba ains guth ?
8 Jah suns ufkunnands Iesus ahmin seinamma thatei swa thai
mitodedun sis, kwath du im : duhwe mitoth thata in hairtam
9 izwaraim? Hwathar ist azetizo du kwithan thamma uslithin:
afletanda thus frawaurhteis theinos, thau kwithan : urreis jah
io nim thata badi theinata jah gagg ? Aththan ei witeith thatei
waldufni habaith sunus mans ana airthai afletan frawaurhtins,
ii kwath du thamma uslithin : Thus kwitha : urreis, nimuh thata
12 badi thein jah gagg du garda theinamma. Jah urrais suns
jah ushafjands badi usiddja faura andwairthja allaize, swaswe
usgeisnodedun allai jah hauhidedun mikiljandans guth, kwith-
andans thatei aiw swa ni gasehwun.
3. MS. fidworin. 9. MS. aflethanda. 12. M. gasehwum.
S. MARK 2. 13-24. 5
13 Jah galaith aftra faur marein, jah all manageins iddjedun
14 du imma, jah laisida ins. Jah hwarbonds gasahw Laiwwi
thana Alfaiaus sitandan at motai jah kwath du imma : gagg
15 afar mis ; jah usstandands iddja afar imma. Jah warth,
bithe is anakumbida in garda is, jah managai motarjos jah
frawaurhtai mith anakumbidedun Iesua jah siponjam is;
16 wesun auk managai jah iddjedun afar imma. Jah thai
bokarjos jah Fareisaieis gasaihwandans ina matjandan mith
thaim motarjam jah frawaurhtaim, kwethun du thaim siponjam
is : hwa ist [thatei mith motarjam jah] frawaurhtaim matjith
17 jah driggkith? Jah gahausjands Iesus kwath du im : ni
thaurbun swinthai lekeis, ak thai ubilaba habandans ; ni
kwam lathon uswaurhtans, ak frawaurhtans.
18 Jah wesun siponjos Iohannis jah Fareisaieis fastandans ;
jah atiddjedun jah kwethun du imma: duhwe siponjos
Iohannis jah Fareisaieis fastand, ith thai theinai siponjos ni
19 fastand ? Jah kwath im Iesus : ibai magun sunjus bruth-
fadis, und thatei mith im ist bruthfaths, fastan? swa lagga
hweila swe mith sis haband bruthfad, ni magun fastan.
20 Aththan atgaggand dagos than afnimada af im sa bruthfaths,
21 jah than fastand in jainamma daga. Ni manna plat fanins
niujis siujith ana snagan fairnjana; ibai afnimai fullon af
thamma sa niuja thamma fairnjin, jah wairsiza gataura wairth-
22 ith. Ni manna giutith wein juggata in balgins fairnjans ;
ibai aufto distairai wein thata niujo thans balgins, jah wein
usgutnith jah thai balgeis frakwistnand ; ak wein juggata in
balgins niujans giutand.
23 Jah warth thairhgaggan imma sabbato daga thairh atisk,
24 jah dugunnun siponjos is skewjandans raupjan ahsa. Jah
Fareisaieis kwethun du imma: sai, hwa taujand siponjos
16. MS. omits thatei mith motarjam jah ; and for frawaurhtaim has
fra a urhtaim. 18. For the second Iohannis the MS. has Iohannes.
6 S. MARK 2. 25-3. 10.
25 theinai sabbatim thatei ni skuld ist ? Jah is kwath du im :
niu ussuggwuth aiw hwa gatawida Daweid, than thaurfta jah
26 gredags was, is jah thai mith imma ? Hwaiwa galaith in gard
guths uf Abiathara gudjin jah hlaibans faurlageinais matida,
thanzei ni skuld ist matjan niba ainaim gudjam, jah gaf jah
127 thaim mith sis wisandam? Jah kwath im : sabbato in mans
28 warth gaskapans, ni manna in sabbato dagis ; Swaei frauja
ist sa sunus mans jah thamma sabbato.
CHAPTER III.
1 Jah galaith aftra in synagogen, jah was jainar manna ga-
2 thaursana habands handu. Jah witaidedun imma hailidediu
3 sabbato daga, ei wrohidedeina ina. Jah kwath du thamma
mann thamma gathaursana habandin handu: urreis in
4 midumai. Jah kwath du im : skuldu ist in sabbatim thiuth
taujan aiththau unthiuth taujan, saiwala nasjan aiththau
5 uskwistjan ? Ith eis thahaidedun. Jah ussaihwands ins mith
moda, gaurs in daubithos hairtins ize, kwath du thamma
mann : ufrakei tho handu theina ! Jah ufrakida, jah gastoth
6 aftra so handus is. Jah gaggandans than Fareisaieis sunsaiw
mith thaim Herodianum garuni gatawidedun bi ina, ei imma
uskwemeina.
7 Jah Iesus aflaith mith siponjam seinaim du marein, jah
filu manageins us Galeilaia laistidedun afar imma, jah us
8 Iudaia, Jah us Iaimsaulymim, jah us Idumaia, jah hindana
Iaurdanaus ; jah thai bi Tyra jah Seidona, manageins filu,
9 gahausjandans hwan filu is tawida, kwemun at imma. Jah
kwath thaim siponjam seinaim ei skip habaith wesi at imma
10 in thizos manageins, ei ni thraiheina ina. Managans auk
gahailida, swaswe drusun ana ina ei imma attaitokeina, jah
2. M. hailidedi. 7. MS. Galeilaian.
S. MARK 3. II-29. 7
1 1 swa managai swe habaidedun wundufnjos jah ahmans un-
hrainjans, thaih than ina gasehwun, drusun du imma jah
12 hropidedun kwithandans, thatei thu is sunus guths. Jah filu
andbait ins ei ina ni gaswikunthidedeina.
13 Jah usstaig in fairguni jah athaihait thanzei wilda is, jah
14 galithun du imma. Jah gawaurhta twalif du wisan mith sis,
15 jah ei insandidedi ins merjan, Jah haban waldufni du hailjan
16 sauhtins jah uswairpan unhulthons. Jah gasatida Seimona
17 namo Paitrus; Jah Iakobau thamma Zaibaidaiaus, jah Iohanne
brothr Iakobaus, jah gasatida im namna Bauanairgais, thatei
18 ist : sunjus theihwons ; Jah Andraian jah Filippu jah Bar-
thaulaumaiu jah Matthaiu jah Thoman jah Iakobu thana
19 Alfaiaus, jah Thaddaiu jah Seimona thana Kananeiten, Jah
Iudan Iskarioten, saei jah galewida ina.
20 Jah atiddjedun in gard, jah gai'ddja sik managei, swaswe
21 ni mahtedun nih hlaif matjan. Jah hausjandans fram imma
bokarjos jah antharai usiddjedun gahaban ina : kwethun auk,
22 thatei usgaisiths ist. Jah bokarjos thai af Iairusaulymai
kwimandans kwethun thatei Baiailzaibul habaith, jah thatei
in thamma reikistin unhulthono uswairpith thaim unhulthom.
23 Jah athaitands ins in gajukom kwath du im : hwaiwa mag
24 Satanas Satanan uswairpan ? Jah jabai thiudangardi withra
25 sik gadailjada, ni mag standan so thiudangardi jaina. Jah
jabai gards withra sik gadailjada, ni mag standan sa gards
26 jains. Jah jabai Satana usstoth ana sik silban jah gadailiths
27 warth, ni mag gastandan, ak andi habaith. Ni manna mag
kasa swinthis galeithands in gard is wilwan, niba faurthis
thana swinthan gabindith ; ja [than] thana gard is diswilwai.
28 Amen, kwitha izwis, thatei allata afletada thata frawaurhte
sunum manne, jah naiteinos swa managos swaswe wajamer-
?9Jand; Aththan saei wajamereith ahman weihana ni habaith
13. MS. ustaig; M. usstaig. 27. MS. omits than.
8 S. MARK 3. 30 - 4. IO.
3ofralet aiw, ak skula ist aiweinaizos frawaurhtais. Unte
kwethun : ahman unhrainjana habaith.
3 1 Jah kwemun than aithei is jah brothrjus is, jah uta standand-
32 ona insandidedun du imma, haitandona ina. Jah setun bi
ina managei ; kwethun than du imma : sai, aithei theina jah
brothrjus theinai jah swistrjus theinos uta sokjand thuk.
33 Jah andhof im kwithands : hwo ist so aithei meina aiththau
34 thai brothrjus meinai ? Jah bisaihwands bisunjane thans bi
sik sitandans kwath : sai, aithei meina jah thai brothrjus
35 meinai. Saei allis waurkeith wiljan guths, s"a jah brothar
meins jah swistar jah aithei ist.
CHAPTER IV.
1 Jah aftra Iesus dugann laisjan at marein, jah galesun sik
du imma manageins filu, swaswe ina galeitha[nda]n in skip
gasitan in marein; jah alia so managei withra marein ana
2 statha was. Jah laisida ins in gajukom manag, jah kwath
3 im in laiseinai seinai : Hauseith ! Sai, urrann sa saiands du
4 saian fraiwa seinamma. Jah warth, miththanei saiso, sum
raihtis gadraus faur wig, jah kwemun fuglos jah fretun thata.
5 Antharuth-than gadraus ana stainahamma, tharei ni habaida
airtha managa, jah suns urrann, in thizei ni habaida diupai-
6 zos airthos ; At sunnin than urrinnandin uf brann, jah unte ni
7 habaida waurtins, gathaursnoda. Jah sum gadraus in thaurn-
uns ; jah ufarstigun thai thaurnjus jah af hwapidedun thata,
8 jah akran ni gaf. Jah sum gadraus in airtha goda, jah gaf
akran urrinnando jah wahsjando ; jah bar ain *1' jah ain *j'
9 jah ain *r Jah kwath : saei habai ausona hausjandona,
gahausjai.
10 Ith bithe warth sundro, frehun ina thai bi ina mith thaim
iv. 1. MS. galeithan.
S. MARK 4. 11-26. 9
11 twalibim thizos gajukons. Jah kwath im: izwis atgiban ist
kunnan runa thiudangardjos guths, ith jainaim thaim uta in
12 gajukom allata wairthith, Ei saihwandans saihwaina jah ni
gaumjaina, jah hausjandans hausjaina jah ni frathjaina, nibai
13 hwan gawandjaina sik jah afletaindau im frawaurhteis. Jah
kwath du im : ni wituth tho gajukon, jah hwaiwa alios thos
14, 15 gajukons kunneith ? Sa saijands waurd saijith. Aththan
thai withra wig sind, tharei saiada thata waurd, jah than
gahausjand unkarjans, suns kwimith Satanas jah usnimith
16 waurd thata insaiano in hairtam ize. Jah sind samaleiko
thai ana stainahamma saianans, thaiei than hausjand thata
1 7 waurd, suns mith fahedai nimand ita, Jah ni haband waurtins
in sis, ak hweilahwairbai sind ; thathroh, bithe kwimith agio
18 aiththau wrakja in this waurdis, suns gamarzjanda. Jah thai
sind thai in thaurriuns saianans, thai waurd hausjandans,
19 Jah saurgos thizos libainais jah afmarzeins gabeins jah thai
bi thata anthar lustjus inn atgaggandans afhwapjand thata
20 waurd, jah akranalaus wairthith. Jah thai sind thai ana
airthai thizai godon saianans, thaiei hausjand thata waurd
jah andnimand jah akran bairand, ain *1* jah ain -j- jah
ain t
21 Jah kwath du im: ibai lukarn kwimith duthe ei uf melan
satjaidau aiththau undar ligr ? niu ei ana lukarnastathan
22 satjaidau? Nih allis ist hwa fulginis thatei ni gabairhtjaidau ;
23 nih warth analaugn, ak ei swikunth wairthai. Jabai hwas
24 habai ausona hausjandona, gahausjai. Jah kwath du im :
saihwith, hwa hauseith! In thizaiei mitath mitith, mitada
25 izwis, jah biaukada izwis thaim galaubjandam. Unte this-
hwammeh saei habaith, gibada imma; jah saei ni habaith,
jah thatei habaith afnimada imma.
26 Jah kwath : swa ist thiudangardi guths, swaswe jabai
11. MS. gajukon; see verse 33.
IO S. MARK 4. 27-5. 2.
27 manna wairpith fraiwa ana airtha. Jah slepith jah urreisith
naht jah daga, jah thata fraiw keinith jah liudith swe ni wait
28 is. Silbo auk airtha akran bairith : frumist gras, thathroh
29 ahs, thathroh fulleith kaurnis in thamma ahsa. Thanuh
bithe atgibada akran, suns insandeith giltha, unte atist
asans.
30 Jah kwath : hwe galeikom thiudangardja guths, aiththau
31 in hwileikai gajukon gabairam tho? Swe kaurno sinapis,
thatei than saiada ana airtha, minnist allaize fraiwe ist thize
32 ana airthai ; Jah than saiada, urrinnith jah wairthith allaize
grase maist, jah gataujith astans mikilans, swaswe magun uf
skadau is fuglos himinis gabauan.
33 Jah swaleikaim managaim gajukom rodida du im thata
34 waurd, swaswe mahtedun hausjon. Ith inuh gajukon ni
rodida im, ith sundro siponjam seinaim andband allata.
35 Jah kwath du im in jainamma daga, at andanahtja than
36 waurthanamma : usleitham jainis stadis. Jah afletandans
tho managein andnemun ina swe was in skipa; jah than
37 anthara skipa wesun mith imma. Jah warth skura windis
mikila jah wegos waltidedun in skip, swaswe ita juthan
38 gafullnoda. Jah was is ana notin ana waggarja slepands,
jah urraisidedun ina jah kwethun du imma : laisari, niu kara
39 thuk thizei frakwistnam ? Jah urreisands gasok winda jah
kwath du marein: gaslawai, afdumbn! Jah anasilaida sa
40 winds jah warth wis mikil. Jah kwath du im: duhwe
faurhtai sijuth swa? hwaiwa ni nauh habaith galaubein?
41 Jah ohtedun sis agis mikil jah kwethun du sis misso : hwas
thannu sa sijai, unte jah winds jah marei ufhausjand imma ?
CHAPTER V.
1, 2 Jah kwemun hindar marein in landa Gaddarene. Jah
usgaggandin imma us skipa, suns gamotida imma manna us
S. MARK 5. 3-I9. II
3 aurahjom in ahmin unhrainjamma, Saei bauain habaida in
aurahjom : jah ni naudibandjom eisarneinaim manna mahta
4 ina gabindan. Unte is ufta eisarnam bi fotuns gabuganaim
jah naudibandjom eisarneinaim gabundans was, jah galausida
af sis thos naudibandjos jah tho ana fotum eisarna gabrak,
5 jah manna ni mahta ina gatamjan. Jah sinteino nahtam jah
dagam in aurahjom jah in fairgunjam was hropjands jah
6bliggwands sik stainam. Gasaihwands than Iesu fairrathro
7 rann jah inwait ina, Jah hropjands stibnai mikilai kwath : hwa
mis jah thus, Iesu, sunau guths this hauhistins? biswara
8 thuk bi gutha, ni balwjais mis ! Unte kwath imma : usgagg,
9 ahma unhrainja, us thamma mann ! Jah frah ina : hwa
namo thein? Jah kwath du imma: namo mein Laigaion,
10 unte managai sijum. Jah bath ina filu ei ni usdrebi im us
11 landa. Wasuh than jainar hairda sweine haldana at thamma
i2fairgunja. Jah bedun ina alios thos unhulthons kwithan-
deins : insandei unsis in tho sweina, ei in tho galeithaima.
13 Jah uslaubida im Iesus suns. Jah usgaggandans ahmans
thai unhrainjans galithun in tho sweina, jah rann so hairda
and driuson in marein ; wesunuth-than swe twos thusundjos,
14 jah afhwapnodedun in marein. Jah thai haldandans tho
sweina gathlauhun, jah gataihun in baurg jah in haimom, jah
15 kwemun saihwan hwa wesi thata waurthano. Jah atiddje-
dun du Iesua, jah gasaihwand thana wodan sitandan jah
gawasidana jah frathjandan thana saei habaida laigaion, jah
16 ohtedun. Jah spillodedun im thaiei gasehwun, hwaiwa
i7warth bi thana wodan jah bi tho sweina. Jah dugunnun
18 bidjan ina galeithan hindar markos seinos. Jah inn gaggand-
an ina in skip bath ina, saei was wods, ei mith imma wesi.
19 Jah ni lailot ina, ak kwath du imma: gagg du garda thein-
6. MS. gasaisaihwands ; obviously an error.
10. MS. usdrebi ; but read usdribi.
\% S. MARK 5. 20-36.
amma du theinaim, jah gateih im, hwan filu thus frauja
20 gatawida jah gaarmaida thuk. Jah galaith jah dugann merjan
in Daikapaulein, hwan filu gatawida imma Iesus; jah allai
sildaleikidedun.
21 Jah usleithandin Iesua in skipa aftra hindar marein, ga-
kwemun sik manageins filu du imma, jah was faura marein.
22 Jah sai, kwimith ains thize synagogafade namin Jaeirus; jah
23 saihwands ina gadraus du fotum Iesuis, Jah bath ina filu,
kwithands, thatei dauhtar meina aftumist habaith, ei kwimands
24lagjais ana tho handuns, ei ganisai jah libai. Jah galaith
mith imma; jah iddjedun afar imma manageins filu jah
thraihun ina.
25 Jah kwinono suma wisandei in runa blothis jera twalif,
26 Jah manag gathulandei fram managaim lekjam jah frakwim-
andei allamma seinamma jah ni waihtai botida, ak mais
27 wairs habaida, Gahausjandei bi Iesu, atgaggandei in mana-
28 gein aftana attaitok wastjai is. Unte kwath, thatei jabai
29wastjom is atteka, ganisa. Jah sunsaiw gathaursnoda sa
brunna blothis izos, jah ufkuntha ana leika thatei gahailnoda
30 af thamma slaha. Jah sunsaiw Iesus ufkuntha in sis silbin
tho us sis maht usgaggandein ; gawandjands sik in managein
31 kwath: hwas mis taitok wastjom? Jah kwethun du imma
siponjos is : saihwis tho managein threihandein thuk, jah
32 kwithis : hwas mis taitok. Jah wlaitoda saihwan tho thata
33 taujandein. Ith so kwino ogandei jah reirandei, witandei
thatei warth bi ija, kwam jah draus du imma, jah kwath imma
34 alia tho sunja. Ith is kwath du izai : dauhtar, galaubeins
theina ganasida thuk ; gagg in gawairthi, jah sijais haila af
thamma slaha theinamma.
35 Nauhthanuh imma fodjandin, kwemun fram thamma syn-
agogafada, kwithandans, thatei dauhtar theina gaswalt; hwa
36 thanamais draibeis thana laisari ? Ith Iesus sunsaiw gahaus-
jands thata waurd rodith, kwath du thamma synagogafada :
s. mark 5. 37-6. 6. 13
37 ni faurhtei ; thatainei galaubei. Jah ni fralailot ainohun ize
mith sis afargaggan, nibai Paitru jah Iakobu jah Iohannen
38 brothar Iakobis. Jah galaith in gard this synagogafadis, jah
gasahw auhjodu jah gretandans jah waifairhwjandans filu.
39 Jah inn atgaggands kwath du im : hwa auhjoth jah gretith ?
4othata barn ni gadauthnoda, ak slepith. Jah bihlohun ina.
Ith is uswairpands allaim ganimith attan this barnis jah
aithein jah thans mith sis, jah galaith inn tharei was thata
41 barn ligando. Jah fairgraip bi handau thata barn kwathuh
du izai : taleitha kumei, thatei ist gaskeirith : mawilo, du thus
42 kwitha : urreis. Jah suns urrais so mawi jah iddja ; was
43 auk jere twalibe ; jah usgeisnodedun faurhtein mikilai. Jah
anabauth im filu ei manna ni funthi thata; jah haihait izai
giban matjan.
CHAPTER VI.
1 Jah usstoth jainthro jah kwam in landa seinamma, jah
2 laistidedun afar imma siponjos is. Jah bithe warth sabbato,
dugann in synagoge laisjan, jah managai hausjandans silda-
leikidedun kwithandans : hwathro thamma thata, jah hwo so
handugeino so gibano imma, ei mahteis swaleikos thai'rh
3handuns is wairthand? Niu thata ist sa timrja, sa sunus
Marjins, ith brothar Iakoba jah Iuse jah Iudins jah Seimonis ?
jah niu sind swistrjus is her at unsins? Jah gamarzidai
4waurthun in thamma. Kwath than im Iesus thatei nist
praufetus unswers, niba in gabaurthai seinai jah in ganithjam
5 jah in garda seinamma. Jah ni mahta jainar ainohun mahte
gataujan, niba fawaim siukam handuns galagjands gahailida.
6 Jah sildaleikida in ungalaubeinais ize, jah bitauh weihsa
bisunjane, laisjands.
37. Perhaps ainnohun ; but see ix. 8.
14 S. MARK 6. 7-31.
7 Jah athaihait thans twalif jah dugann ins insandjan twans
8 hwanzuh, jah gaf im waldufni ahmane unhrainjaize. Jah
faurbauth im ei waiht ni nemeina in wig, niba hrugga aina,
9 nih matibalg nih hlaif nih in gairdos aiz, Ak gaskohai suljom :
io jah ni wasjaith twaim paidom. Jah kwath du im: thishwaduh
thei gaggaith in gard, thar saljaith, unte usgaggaith jainthro.
ii Jah swa managai swe ni andnimaina izwis, nih hausjaina izwis,
usgaggandans jainthro ushrisjaith mulda tho undaro fotum
izwaraim du weitwodithai im. Amen, kwitha izwis : sutizo
ist Saudaumjam aiththau Gaumaurjam in daga stauos thau
1 2 thizai baurg ja[i]nai. Jah usgaggandans meridedun ei
13 idreigodedeina. Jah unhulthons managos usdrihun, jah
gasalbodedun alewa managans siukans, jah gahailidedun.
14 Jah gahausida thiudans Herodes, swikunth allis warth
namo is, jah kwath thatei Iohannis sa daupjands us dauth-
aim urrais, duththe waurkjand thos mahteis in imma.
15 Antharai than kwethun thatei Helias ist ; antharai than
16 kwethun thatei praufetes ist swe ains thize praufete. Gahaus-
jands than Herodes kwath, thatei thammei ik haubith afmai-
17 mait Iohanne, sa ist : sah urrais us dauthaim. Sa auk raihtis
Herodes insandjands gahabaida Iohannen jah gaband ina in
karkarai in Hairodiadins kwenais Filippaus brothrs seinis,
18 unte tho galiugaida. Kwath auk Iohannes du Heroda, thatei
19 ni skuld ist thus haban kwen brothrs theinis. Ith so Herodia
20 naiw imma jah wilda imma uskwiman, jah ni mahta ; Unte
Herodis ohta sis Iohannen, kunnands ina wair garaihtana
jah weihana, jah vvitaida imma jah hausjands imma manag
21 gatawida jah gabaurjaba imma andhausida. Jah waurthans
dags gatils, than Herodis mela gebaurthais seinaizos nahta-
10. MS. usgaggaggaith. 11. MS. nihausjaina. MS. janai.
19. For naiw the MS. has naiswor, but, according to Uppstrom, it is
corrected to naiw by the scribe.
5". MARK 6. 11 - 7. 3. 15
mat waurhta thaim maistam seinaize jah thusundifadim jah
22 thaim frumistam Galeilaias, Jah atgaggandein inn dauhtr
Herodiadins jah plinsjandein jah galeikandein Heroda jah
thaim mith anakumbjandam, kwath thiudans du thizai maujai :
23 bidei mik thishwizuh thei wileis, jah giba thus. Jah swor
izai, thatei thishwah thei bidjais mik, giba thus, und halba
24 thiudangardja meina. Ith si usgaggandei kwath du aithein
seinai : hwis bidjau ? Ith si kwath : haubidis Iohannis this
25 daupjandins. Jah atgaggandei sunsaiw sniumundo du tham-
ma thiudana bath kwithandei : wiljau ei mis gibais ana mesa
26 haubith Iohannis this daupjandins. Jah gaurs waurthans sa
thiudans in thize aithe jah in thize mith anakumbjandane ni
2 7wilda izai ufbrikan. Jah suns insandjands sa thiudans
spaikulatur, anabauth briggan haubith is. Ith is galeithands
28 afmaimait imma haubith in karkarai. Jah atbar thata haubith
is ana mesa, jah atgaf ita thizai maujai, jah so mawi atgaf ita
29 aithein seinai. Jah gahausjandans siponjos is kwemun jah
usnemun leik is jah galagidedun ita in hlaiwa.
30 Jah gaiddjedun apaustauleis du Iesua jah gataihun imma
allata jah swa filu swe gatawide[dun]
53? 54 jah duatsniwun. Jah usgaggandam im us skipa,
55 sunsaiw ufkunnandans ina, Birinnandans all thata gawi du-
gunnun ana badjam thans ubil habandans bairan, thadei
56 hausidedun ei is wesi. Jah thishwaduh thadei iddja in
haimos aiththau baurgs aiththau in weihsa, ana gagga lagide-
dun siukans jah bedun ina ei thau skauta wastjos is attaitok-
eina ; jah swa managai swe attaitokun imma, ganesun.
CHAPTER VII.
1 Jah gakwemun sik du imma Fareisaieis jah sumai thize
2 bokarje, kwimandans us Iairusaulymim. Jah gasaihwandans
22. MS. dauhtar. 3°~53- A gap in the MS.
\6 S. MARK 7. 3-18.
sumans thize siponje is gamainjaim handum, that-ist un-
3 thwahanaim, matjandans hlaibans ; Ith Fareisaieis jah allai
Iudaieis, niba ufta thwahand handuns, ni matjand, habandans
4 anafilh thize sinistane, Jah af mathla niba daupjand ni mat-
jand, jah anthar ist manag thatei andnemun du haban,
5 daupeinins stikle jah aurkje jah katile jah ligre; Thathroh than
frehun ina thai Fareisaieis jah thai bokarjos : duhwe thai
siponjos theinai ni gaggand bi thammei anafulhun thai sinist-
6 ans, ak unthwahanaim handum matjand hlaif ? Ith is andhaf-
jands kwath du im, thatei waila praufetida EsaYas bi izwis
thans liutans, swe gamelith ist :
So managei wairilom mik sweraith,
ith hairto ize fairra habaith sik mis.
7 Ith sware mik blotand,
laisjandans laiseinins, anabusnins manne ;
8 Afletandans raihtis anabusn guths habaith thatei anafulhun
mannans, daupeinins aurkje jah stikle, jah anthar galeik
9 swaleikata manag taujith. Jah kwath du im : waila inwidith
10 anabusn guths, ei thata anafulhano izwar fastaith. Moses auk
raihtis kwath : swerai attan theinana jah aithein theina ; jah
saei ubil kwithai attin seinamma aiththau aithein seinai,
11 dauthau afdauthjaidau. Ith jus kwithith: jabai kwithai manna
attin seinamma aiththau aithein : kaurban, thatei is maithms,
12 thishwah thatei us mis gabatnis, Jah ni fraletith ina ni waiht
13 taujan attin seinamma aiththau aithein seinai, Blauthjandans
waurd guths thizai anabusnai izwarai, thoei anafulhuth ; jah
14 galeik swaleikata manag taujith. Jah athaitands alia tho
15 managein kwath im : hauseith mis allai jah frathjaith. Ni
waihts ist utathro mans inn gaggando in ina thatei magi ina
gamainjan ; ak thata ut gaggando us mann thata ist thata
16 gamainjando mannan. Jabai hwas habai ausona hausjand-
17 ona, gahausjai. Jah than galaith in gard us thizai mana-
18 gein, frehun ina siponjos is bi tho gajukon, Jah kwath du
S. MARK 7. 19-35. 17
im : swa jah jus unwitans sijuth ? Ni frathjith thammei all
thata utathro inn gaggando in mannan ni mag ina gamainjan:
19 Unte ni galeithith imma in hairto, ak in wamba, jah in ur-
20 runsa usgaggith, [jah] gahraineith allans matins. Kwathuth-
than thatei thata us mann usgaggando thata gamaineith
21 mannan. Innathro auk us hairtin manne mitoneis ubilos
22 usgaggand: kalkinassjus,horinassjus,maurthra,Thiubja,faihu-
frikeins, unseleins, liutei, aglaitei, augo unsel, wajamereins,
23 hauhhairtei, unwiti. Tho alia ubilona innathro usgaggand
jah gagamainjand mannan.
24 Jah jainthro usstandands galaith in markos Tyre jah Sei-
done, jah galeithands in gard ni wilda witan mannan jah ni
25 mahta galaugnjan. Gahausjandei raihtis kwino bi ina, thizozei
habaida dauhtar ahman unhrainjana, kwimandei draus du
26 fotum is. Wasuth-than so kwino haithno, Saurini-fynikiska
gabaurthai, jah bath ina ei tho unhulthon uswaurpi us dauhtr
2 7izos. Ith Iesus kwath du izai : let faurthis sada wairthan
barna, unte ni goth ist niman hlaib barne jah wairpan hund-
28 am. Ith si andhof imma jah kwath du imma : jai, frauja ;
jah auk hundos undaro biuda matjand af drauhsnom barne.
29 Jah kwath du izai : in this waurdis gagg ; usiddja unhultho
30 us dauhtr theinai. Jah galeithandei du garda seinamma
bigat unhulthon usgaggana jah tho dauhtar ligandein ana
ligra.
31 Jah aftra galeithands af markom Tyre jah Seidone kwam
at marein Galeilaie mith tweihnaim markom Daikapaulaios.
32 Jah berun du imma baudana stammana, jah bedun ina ei
33 lagidedi imma handau. Jah afnimands ina af managein
sundro, lagida figgrans seinans in ausona imma jah spewands
34 attaitok tuggon is, Jah ussaihwands du himina gaswogida, jah
35 kwath du imma : aiffatha, thatei ist, uslukn. Jah sunsaiw
20. MS. omits jah. 33. M. speiwands.
l8 S. MARK 7. 36-8. 13.
usluknodedun imma hliumans jah andbundnoda bandi tugg-
36 ons is jah rodida raihtaba. Jah anabauth im ei mann ni
kwetheina. Hwan filu is im anabauth, mais thamma eis
37 meridedun, Jah ufarassau sildaleikidedun kwithandans : waila
allata gatawida, jah baudans gataujith gahausjan jah unrod-
jandans rodjan.
CHAPTER VIII.
1 In jainaim than dagam aftra at filu managai managein
wisandein jah ni habandam hwa matidedeina, athaitands
2 siponjans kwathuh du im : Infeinoda du thizai managein,
unte ju dagans thrins mith mis wesun, jah ni haband hwa
3 matjaina ; Jah jabai fraleta ins lauskwithrans du garda ize,
4 ufligand ana wiga ; sumai raihtis ize fairrathro kwemun. Jah
andhofun imma siponjos is : hwathro thans mag hwas
5 gasothjan hlaibam ana authidai ? Jah frah ins : hwan mana-
6 gans habaith hlaibans ? Ith eis kwethun : sibun. Jah ana-
bauth thizai managein anakumbjan ana airthai ; jah nimands
thans sibun hlaibans jah awiliudonds gabrak jah atgaf sipon-
jam seinaim, ei atlagidedeina faur; jah atlagidedun faur tho
7 managein. Jah habaidedun fiskans fawans, jah thans ga-
8 thiuthjands kwath ei atlagidedeina jah thans. Gamatidedun
than jah sadai waurthun ; jah usnemun laibos gabruko sibun
9 spyreidans. Wesunuth-than thai matjandans swe fidwor
10 thusundjos ; jah fralailot ins. Jah galaith sunsaiw in skip
mith siponjam seinaim jah kwam ana fera Magdalan.
11 Jah urrunnun Fareisaieis jah dugunnun mithsokjan imma
12 sokjandans du imma taikn us himina, fraisandans ina. Jah
ufswogjands ahmin seinamma kwath : hwa thata kuni taikn
sokeith ? Amen, kwitha izwis : jabai gibaidau kunja thamma
i3taikne. Jah afletands ins, galeithands aftra in skip uslaith
hindar marein.
S. MARK 8. 14-3I. 19
14 Jah ufarmunnodedun niman hlaibans jah niba ainana hlaif
15 ni habaidedun mith sis in skipa. Jah anabauth im kwithands :
saihwith ei atsaihwith izwis this beistis Fareisaie jah beistis
16 Herodis. Jah thahtedun mith sis misso kwithandans : unte
17 hlaibans ni habam. Jah frathjands Iesus kwath du im : hwa
thaggkeith, unte hlaibans ni habaith ? ni nauh frathjith nih
18 wituth, unte daubata habaith hairto izwar. Augona habandans
ni gasaihwith, jah ausona habandans ni gahauseith, jah ni
19 gamunuth. Than thans fimf hlaibans gabrak fimf thusundjom,
hwan managos tainjons fullos gabruko usnemuth ? Kwethun
20 du imma : twalif. Aththan than thans sibun hlaibans fidwor
thusundjom, hwan managans spyreidans fullans gabruko
21 usnemuth? Ith eis kwethun: sibun. Jah kwath du im :
hwaiwa ni nauh frathjith?
22 Jah kwemun in Bethaniin jah berun du imma blindan, jah
23 bedun ina ei imma attaitoki. Jah fairgreipands handu this
blindins ustauh ina utana weihsis jah speiwands in augona is,
24 atlagjands ana handuns seinos frah ina gau-hwa-sehwi ? Jah
ussaihwands kwath : gasaihwa mans, thatei swe bagmans-
25 gasaihwa gaggandans. Thathroh aftra galagida handuns ana
tho augona is jah gatawida ina ussaihwan ; jah aftra gasatiths
26warth jah gasahw bairhtaba allans. Jah insandida ina du
garda is kwithands : ni in thata weihs gaggais, ni mannhun
kwithais in thamma wehsa.
27 Jah usiddja Iesus jah siponjos is in wehsa Kaisarias thizos
Filippaus ; jah ana wiga frah siponjans seinans, kwithands du
28 im : hwana mik kwithand mans wisan ? Ith eis andhofun :
Iohannen thana daupjand, jah antharai Helian ; sumaih than
29 ainana praufete. Jah is kwath du im : aththan jus, hwana
mik kwithith wisan? Andhafjands than Paitrus kwath du
30 imma: thu is Christus. Jah faurbauth im ei mannhun ni
31 kwetheina bi ina. Jah dugann laisjan ins thatei skal sunus
mans filu winnan, jah uskiusan skulds ist fram thaim sinistam
c 2
20 S. MARK 8. 32 - 9. 7.
jah thaim auhumistam gudjam jah bokarjam, jah uskwiman
32Jah afar thrins dagans usstandan. Jah swikunthaba thata
waurd rodida ; jah aftiuhands ina Paitrus dugann andbeitan
33 ina ; Ith is gawandjands sik jah gasaihwands thans siponjans
seinans andbait Paitru kwithands : gagg hindar mik, Satana ;
34 unte ni frathjis thaim guths, ak thaim manne. Jah athaitands
tho managein mith siponjam seinaim kvvath da im : saei wili
afar mis laistjan, inwidai sik silban jah nimai g algan seinana
35 jah laistjai mik. Saei allis wili saiwala seina ganasjan,
frakwisteith izai; ith saei frakwisteith saiwalai seinai in meina
36 jah in thizos aiwaggeljons, ganasjith tho. Hwa auk boteith
mannan, jabai gageigaith thana fairhwu allana jah gasleitheith
37 sik saiwalai seinai ? Aiththau hwa gibith manna inmaidein
38 saiwalos seinaizos ? Unte saei skamaith sik meina jah waurde
meinaize in gabaurthai thizai horinondein jah frawaurhton,
jah sunus mans skamaith sik is, than kwimith in wulthau
attins seinis mith aggilum thaim weiham.
CHAPTER IX.
j Jah kwath du im : amen, kwitha izwis thatei sind sumai
thize her standandane, thai ize ni kausjand dauthaus, unte
gasaihwand thiudinassu guths kwumanana in mahtai.
2 Jah afar dagans saihs ganam Iesus Paitru jah Iakobu jah
Iohannen, jah ustauh ins ana fairguni hauh sundro ainans:
3 jah inmaidida sik in andwairthja ize. Jah wastjos is waurth-
un glitmunjandeins, hweitos swe snaiws, swaleikos swe
4 wullareis ana airthai ni mag gahweitjan. Jah ataugiths
warth im Helias mith Mose; jah wesun rodjandans mith
5 Iesua. Jah andhafjands Paitrus kwath du Iesua ; Rabbei,
goth ist unsis her wisan, jah gawaurkjam hlijans thrins, thus
6 ainana jah Mose ainana jah ainana Helijin. Ni auk wissa
S. MARK 9. 8-21. 21
7 hwa rodidedi ; wesun auk usagidai. Jah warth milhma
ufarskadwjands im, jah kwam stibna us thamma milhmin :
8 sa ist sunus meins sa liuba, thamma hausjaith. Jah anaks
insaihwandans ni thanaseiths ainohun gasehwun, alja Iesu
ainana mith sis.
9 Dalath than atgaggandam im af thamma fairgunja, ana-
bauth im ei mannhun ni spillodedeina thatei gasehwun, niba
io bithe sunus mans us dauthaim usstothi. Jah thata waurd
habaidedun du sis misso sokjandans : hwa ist thata us
1 1 dauthaim usstandan ? Jah frehun ina kwithandans : unte
kwithand thai bokarjos thatei Helias skuli kwiman faurthis ?
12 Ith is andhafjands kwath du im : Helias swethauh kwimands
faurthis aftra gaboteith alia; jah hwaiwa gamelith ist bi
13 sunu mans, ei manag winnai jah frakunths wairthai. Akei
kwitha izwis thatei ju Helias kwam jah gatawidedun imma,
swa filu swe wildedun, swaswe gamelith ist bi ina.
14 Jah kwimands at siponjam gasahw filu manageins bi ins,
15 jah bokarjans sokjandans mith im. Jah sunsaiw alia man-
agei gasaihwandans ina usgeisnodedun, jah durinnandans in-
16 witun ina. Jah frah thans bokarjans: hwa sokeith mith thaim?
17 Jah andhafjands ains us thizai managein kwath: laisari,
brahta sunu meinana du thus habandan ahman unrodjandan.
18 Jah thishwaruh thei ina gafahith, gawairpith ina, jah hwath-
jith jah kriustith tunthuns seinans jah gastaurknith ; jah
kwath siponjam theinaim ei usdreibeina ina, jah ni mahtedun.
19 Ith is andhafjands im kwath : o kuni ungalaubjando ! und
hwa at izwis sijau ? und hwa thulau izwis ? Bairith ina du
20 mis. Jah brahtedun ina at imma. Jah gasaihwands ina
sunsaiw sa ahma tahida ina ; jah driusands ana airtha
21 walwisoda hwathjands. Jah frah thana attan is : hwan lagg
8. See v. 37. 12. MS. Heliaswethauh. 18. MS. usdrei-
beina ; for usdribeina.
22 S. MARK 9. 22-37.
mel ist ei thata warth imma ? Ith is kwath : us barniskja.
22 Jah ufta ina jah in fon atwarp jah in wato, ei uskwistidedi
imma; akei jabai mageis, hilp unsara, gableithjands unsis.
23 Ith Iesus kwath du imma thata jabai mageis galaubjan ;
24allata mahteig thamma galaubjandin. Jah sunsaiw ufhrop-
jands sa atta this barnis mith tagram kwath : galaubja ; hilp
25 meinaizos ungalaubeinais ! Gasaihwands than Iesus thatei
samath rann managei, gahwotida ahmin thamma unhrainjin,
kwithands du imma: thu ahma, thu unrodjands jah bauths, ik
thus anabiuda: usgagg us thamma, jahthanaseiths ni galeithais
26 in ina. Jah hropjands jah filu tahjands ina usiddja ; jah warth
27 swe dauths, swaswe managai kvvethun thatei gaswalt. Ith
Iesus undgreipands ina bi handau urraisida ina ; jah usstoth.
28 Jah galeithandan ina in gard, siponjos is frehun ina sundro :
29 duhwe weis ni mahtedum usdreiban thana ? Jah kwath du
im: thata kuni in waihtai ni mag usgaggan, niba in bidai
jah fastubnja.
30 Jah jainthro usgaggandans iddjedun thairh Galeilaian;
31 jah ni wilda ei hwas wissedi, Unte laisida siponjans seinans,
jah kwath du im thatei sunus mans atgibada in handuns
manne, jah uskwimand imma, jah uskwistiths thridjin daga
32 usstandith. Ith eis ni frothun thamma waurda, jah ohtedun
ina fraihnan.
33 Jah kwam in Kafarnaum, jah in garda kwumans frah ins :
34hwa in wiga mith izwis misso mitodeduth ? Ith eis slaw-
aidedun; du sis misso andrunnun, hwarjis maists wesi.
35 Jah sitands atwopida thans twalif jah kwath du im : jabai
hwas wili frumists wisan, sijai allaize aftumists jah allaim
36 andbahts. Jah nimands barn gasatida ita in midjaim im,
37 jah ana armins nimands ita kwath du im : Saei ain thize
swaleikaize barne andnimith ana namin meinamma, mik
28. MS. mahtedun.
S. MARK 9. 38-50. 23
andnimith ; jah sahwazuh saei mik andnimith, ni mik and-
nimith, ak thana sandjandan mik.
38 Andhof than imma Iohannes kwithands : laisari ! sehwum
sumana in theinamma namin usdreibandan unhulthons, saei
ni laisteith unsis, jah waridedum imma, unte ni laisteith
39 unsis. Ith is kwath : ni warjith imma ; ni mannahun auk
ist saei taujith maht in namin meinamma jah magi sprauto
40 ubilwaurdjan mis ; Unte saei nist withra izwis, faur izwis ist.
41 Saei auk allis gadragkjai izwis stikla watins in namin mein-
amma, unte Christaus sijuth, amen kwitha izwis ei ni
42 frakwisteith mizdon seinai. Jah sahwazuh saei gamarzjai
ainana thize leitilane thize galaubjandane du mis, goth ist
imma mais ei galagjaidau asilukwairnus ana halsaggan is
43 jah frawaurpans wesi in marein. Jah jabai marzjai thuk
handus theina, afmait tho ; goth thus ist hamfamma in libain
galeithan, thau twos handuns habandin galeithan in gaiain-
44 nan, in fon thata unhwapnando, Tharei matha ize ni gaswiltith
45 jah fon ni afhwapnith. Jah jabai fotus theins marzjai thuk,
afmait ina ; goth thus ist galeithan in libain haltamma, thau
twans fotuns habandin gawairpan in gaiainnan, in fon thata
46 unhwapnando, Tharei matha ize ni gaswiltith jah fon ni
47 afhwapnith. Jah jabai augo thein marzjai thuk, uswairp
imma; goth thus ist haihamma galeithan in thiudangardja
guths, thau twa augona habandin atwairpan in gaiainnan
48 funins, Tharei matha ize ni gadauthnith jah fon ni afhwapnith.
49 Hwazuh auk funin saltada jah hwarjatoh hunsle salta salt-
5oada. Goth salt; ith jabai salt unsaltan wairthith, hwe
supuda? Habaith in izwis salt, jah gawairtheigai sijaith
mith izwis misso.
42. MS. balsaggan. 50. MS. supuda ; for supoda.
24 S. MARK 10. I-19.
CHAPTER X.
j Jah jainthro usstandands kwam in markom Iudaias hindar
Iaurdanau ; jah gakwemun sik aftra manageins du imma,
2 jah, swe biuhts, aftra laisida ins. Jah duatgaggandans
Fareisaieis frehun ina, skuldu sijai mann kwen afsatjan,
3 fraisandans ina. Ith is andhafjands kwath : hwa izwis
4 anabauth Moses ? Ith eis kwethun ; Moses uslaubida unsis
5 bokos afsateinais meljan jah afletan. Jah andhafjands Iesus
kwath du im : withra harduhairtein izwara gamelida izwis
6tho anabusn. Ith af anastodeinai gaskaftais gumein jah
7 kwinein gatawida guth. Inuh this bileithai manna attin
8 seinamma jah aithein seinai, Jah sijaina tho twa du leika
9 samin, swaswe thanaseiths ni sind twa, ak leik ain. Thatei
10 nu guth gawath, manna thamma ni skaidai. Jah in garda
11 aftra siponjos is bi thata samo frehun ina. Jah kwath du
im : sahwazuh saei afletith kwen seina jah liugaith anthara,
12 horinoth du thizai. Jah jabai kwino afletith aban seinana
jah liugada antharamma, horinoth.
13 Thanuh atberun du imma barna, ei attaitoki im; ith thai
1 4 siponjos is sokun thaim bairandam du. Gasaihwands than
Iesus unwerida jah kwath du im : letith tho barna gaggan
du mis jah ni warjith tho, unte thize ist thiudangardi guths.
15 Amen, kwitha izwis : saei ni andnimith thiudangardja guths
16 swe barn, nih thauh kwimith in izai. Jah gathlaihands im,
lagjands handuns ana tho thiuthida im.
17 Jah usgaggandin imma in wig, duatrinnands ains jah
knussjands bath ina kwithands : laisari thiutheiga, hwa tau-
i8jau ei libainais aiweinons arbja wairthau? Ith is kwath du
imma: hwa mik kwithis thiutheigana ? ni hwashun thiuth-
iQeigs, alja ains guth. Thos anabusnins kant: ni horinos ;
13, 14. L. reads bairandam. Dugasaihwands.
S. MARK 10. 20-31. 25
ni maurthrjais ; ni hlifais ; ni sijais galiugaweitwods ; ni
20 anamahtjais; swerai attan theinana jah aithein theina. Tharuh
andhafjands kwath du imma : laisari, tho alia gafastaida us
21 jundai meinai. Ith Iesus insaihwands du imma frijoda ina
jah kwath du imma : ainis thus wan ist ; gagg, swa filu swe
habais frabugei jah gif tharbam, jah habais huzd in himinam;
22 jah hiri laistjan mik nimands galgan. Ith is ganipnands in
this waurdis galaith gaurs ; was auk habands faihu manag.
23 Jah bisaih wands Iesus kwath siponjam seinaim : sai,
hwaiwa agluba thai faiho gahabandans in thiudangardja
2+ guths galeithand. Ith thai siponjos afslauthnodedun in
waurde is. Tharuh Iesus aftra andhafjands kwath im : barn T
ilona, hwaiwa aglu ist thaim hugjandam afar faihau in
25 thiudangardja guths galeithan. Azitizo ist ulbandau thairh
thairko nethlos galeithan, thau gabigamma in thiudangardja
26 guths galeithan. Ith eis mais usgeisnodedun kwithandans
27 du sis misso : jah hwas mag ganisan? Insaihwands du im
Iesus kwath : fram mannam unmahteig ist, akei ni fram
28gutha; allata auk mahteig ist fram gutha. Dugann than
Paitrus kwithan du imma : sai, weis aflailotum alia jah
29 laistidedum thuk. Andhafjands im Iesus kwath : amen,
kwitha izwis: ni hwashun ist saei aflailoti gard aiththau
brothruns aiththau aithein aiththau attan aiththau kwen aith-
thau barna aiththau haimothlja in meina jah in thizos aiw-
30 aggeljons, Saei ni andnimai t faith, nu in thamma mela
gardins jah brothruns jah swistruns jah attan jah aithein
jah barna jah haimothlja mith wrakom, jah in aiwa thamma
31 anawairthin libain aiweinon. Aththan managai wairthand
frumans aftumans, jah aftumans frumans.
23. MS. faiho ; for faihu. 24. In the MS., hugjandam is in-
distinct and uncertain. 25. MS. Azitizo; for Azetizo. 27. In
the MS., akei wrongly follows kwath. 29. MS. aflailailoti. MS.
attin.
26 S. MARK 10. 32-45.
32 Wesunuth-than ana wiga gaggandans du Iairusaulymai
jah faurbigaggands ins Iesus, jah sildaleikidedun jah afar-
laistjandans faurhtai waurthun. Jah andnimands aftra thans
twalif dugann im kwithan thoei habaidedun ina gadaban.
33 Thatei sai, usgaggam in Iairusaulyma jah sunus mans atgib-
ada thaim ufargudjam jah bokarjam, jah gawargjand inadauth-
34 au, Jah bilaikand ina jah bliggwand ina, jah speiwand
ana ina jah uskwimand imma, jah thridjin daga usstandith.
35 Jah athabaidedun sik du imma Iakobus jah Iohannes,
sunjus Zaibaidaiaus, kwithandans: laisari, wileima ei thatei
36thuk bidjos, taujais uggkis. Ith Iesus kwath im : hwa
37 wileits taujan mik igkwis ? Ith eis kwethun du imma :
fragif ugkis ei ains af taihswon theinai jah ains af hleidumein
38 theinai sitaiwa in wulthau theinamma. Ith Iesus kwathuh
du im : ni wituts hwis bidjats ; maguts-u driggkan stikl
thanei ik driggka, jah daupeinai thizaiei ik daupjada, ei
39 daupjaindau ? Ith eis kwethun du imma : magu. Ith Iesus
kwathuh du im : swethauh thana stikl thanei ik driggka,
driggkats, jah thizai daupeinai thizaiei ik daupjada [daup-
40 janda] ; Ith thata du sitan af taihswon meinai aiththau af
hleidumein nist mein du giban, alja thaimei manwith was.
41 Jah gahausjandans thai taihun dugunnun unwerjan bi Iakobu
42 jah lohannen. Ith is athaitands ins kwath du im : wituth
thatei [thaiei] thuggkjand reikinon thiudom, gafraujinond
43 im, ith thai mikilans ize gawaldand im. Ith ni swa sijai in
izwis ; ak sahwazuh saei wili wairthan mikils in izwis, sijai
44 izwar andbahts ; Jah saei wili izwara wairthan frumists, sijai
45 allaim skalks. Jah auk sunus mans ni kwam at andbahtjam,
ak andbahtjan jah giban saiwala seina faur managans lun.
33. In the MS., the verse is unfinished. 34. MS. ustandith.
38. MS. wituths. 39. MS. omits daupjanda. 42. MS. omits
thaiei. 44. MS. frumist sijai.
S. MARK 10. 46 - 11. 7. 27
46 Jah kwemun in Iairikon. Jah usgaggandin imma jain-
thro mith siponjam seinaim jah managein ganohai, sunus
Teimaiaus, Barteimaiaus blinda, sat faur wig du aihtron.
47 Jah gahausjands thatei Iesus sa Nazoraius ist, dugann hrop-
48 jan jah kwithan : sunau Daweidis, Iesu, armai mik ! Jah
hwotidedun imma managai ei gathahaidedi ; ith is filu mais
49 hropida : sunau Daweidis, armai mik ! Jah gastandans Iesus
haihait atwopjan ina. Jah wopidedun thana blindan, kwith-
50 andans du imma : thrafstei thuk ; urreis, wopeith thuk. Ith
is afwairpands wastjai seinai ushlaupands kwam at Iesu.
51 Jah andhafjands kwath du imma Iesus : hwa wileis ei taujau
thus ? Ith sa blinda kwath du imma : Rabbaunei, ei us-
52 saihwau. Ith Iesus kwath du imma: gagg, galaubeins
theina ganasida thuk. Jah sunsaiw ussahw jah laistida in
wiga Iesu.
CHAPTER XI.
1 Jah bithe nehwa wesun Iairusalem, in Bethsfagein jah
Bithaniin at fairgunja alewjin, insandida twans siponje sein-
2 aize, Jah kwath du im : gaggats in haim tho withrawairthon
iggkwis, jah sunsaiw inn gaggandans in tho baurg bigitats
fulan gabundanana, ana thammei nauh ainshun manne ni
3 sat : andbindandans ina attiuhats. Jah jabai hwas iggkwis
kwithai : duhwe thata taujats ? kwithaits : thatei frauja this
4 gairneith ; jah sunsaiw ina insandeith hidre. Galithun than
jah bigetun fulan gabundanana at daura uta ana gagga ; jah
5 andbundun ina. Jah sumai thize jainar standandane kweth-
6 un du im : hwa taujats andbindandans thana fulan ? Ith
eis kwethun du im, swaswe anabauth im Iesus, jah lailotun
7 ins. Jah brahtedun thana fulan at Iesua ; jah galagidedun
46. Read Barteimaius.
28 S. MARK 11. 8-21.
8 ana wastjos seinos, jah gasat ana ina. • Managai than wast-
jom seinaim strawidedun ana wiga ; sumai astans maimaitun
9 us bagmam jah strawidedun ana wiga. Jah thai fauragagg-
andans hropidedun kwithandans : osanna, thiuthida sa
iokwimanda in namin fraujins! Thiuthido so kwimandei
thiudangardi in namin attins unsaris Daweidis, osanna in
hauhistjam !
ii Jah galaith in Iairusaulyma Iesus jah in alh ; jah bi-
saihwands alia, at andanahtja juthan wisandin hweilai usiddja
in Bethanian mith thaim twalibim.
12 Jah iftumin daga usstandandam im us Bethaniin gredags
13 was. Jah gasaihwands smakkabagm fairrathro habandan
lauf atiddja, ei aufto bigeti hwa ana imma ; jah kwimands at
imma ni waiht bigat ana imma niba lauf ; ni auk was mel
usmakkane. Jah usbairands kwath du imma : ni thanaseiths
us thus aiw manna akran matjai. Jah gahausidedun thai
siponjos is.
15 Jah iddjedun du Iairusaulymai. Jah atgaggands Iesus in
alh dugann uswairpan thans frabugjandans jah bugjandans
in alh, jah mesa skattjane jah sitlans thize frabugjandane
16 ahakim uswaltida. Jah ni lailot ei hwas thairhberi kas thairh
i;tho alh. Jah laisida kwithands du im : niu gamelith ist
thatei razn mein razn bido haitada allaim thiudom ? ith jus
18 gatawideduth ita du filigrja waidedjane. Jah gahausidedun
thai bokarjos jah gudjane auhumistans jah sokidedun, hwaiwa
imma uskwistidedeina : ohtedun auk ina, unte alia managei
sildaleikidedun in laiseinais is.
19 Jah bithe andanahti warth, usiddja ut us thizai baurg.
20 Jah in maurgin faurgaggandans gasehwun thana smakka-
21 bagm thaursjana us waurtim. Jah gamunands Paitrus
9. After fauragaggandans we should probably insert jah thai afargagg-
andans.
S.MARK 11. 23-12. I. 29
kwath du imma : Rabbei, sai, smakkabagms thanei frakwast
22 gathaursnoda. Jah andhafjands Iesus kwath du im: habaith
23 galaubein guths ! Amen auk kwitha izwis, thishwazuh ei
kwithai du thamma fairgunja : ushafei thuk jah wairp thus
in marein, jah ni tuzwerjai in hairtin seinamma, ak galaubjai
thata, ei thatei kwithith gagaggith, wairthith i'mma thishwah
24thei kwithith. Duththe kwitha izwis, allata thishwah thei
bidjandans sokeith, galaubeith thatei nimith, jah wairthith
25 izwis. Jah than standaith bidjandans, afletaith, jabai hwa
habaith withra hwana, ei jah atta izwar sa in himinam aflelai
26 izwis missadedins izwaros. Ith jabai jus ni afletith, ni thau
atta izwar sa in himinam afletith izwis missadedins izwaros.
27 Jah iddjedun aftra du Iairusaulymai. Jah in alh hwarbond-
in imma, atiddjedun du imma thai auhumistans gudjans jah
28 bokarjos jah sinistans. Jah kwethun du imma: in hwamma
waldufnje thata taujis? jah hwas thus thata waldumi atgaf,
29 ei thata taujis? Ith Iesus andhafjands kwath du im : fraihna
jah ik izwis ainis waurdis jah andhafjith mis, jah kwitha izwis
30 in hwamma waldufnje thata tauja. Daupeins Iohannis uzuh
31 himina was thau uzuh mannam? andhafjith mis. Jah thaht-
edun du sis misso kwithandans, jabai kwitham : us himina,
32 kwithith : aththan duhwe ni galaubideduth imma ? Ak
kwitham : us mannam, uhtedun tho managein. Allai auk
alakjo habaidedun Iohannen thatei bi sunjai praufetes was.
^ Jah anhafjandans kwethun du Iesua : ni witum. Jah andhaf-
jands Iesus kwath du im : nih ik izwis kwitha in hwamma
waldufnje thata tauja.
CHAPTER XII.
1 Jah dugann im in gajukom kwithan : weinagard ussatida
manna, jah bisatida ina fathom jah usgrof dal uf mesa jah
32. Read ohtedun.
30 S. MARK 12. 2-l6.
gatimrida kelikn, jah anafalh ina waurstwjam, jah aflaith
2 aljath. Jah insandida du thaim waurstwjam at mel skalk, ei
3 at thaim waurstwjam nemi akranis this weinagardis. Ith eis
nimandans ina usbluggwun jah insandidedun laushandjan.
4 Jah aftra insandida du im antharana skalk; jah thana
stainam wairpandans gaaiwiskodedun jah haubith wundan
5 brahtedun jah insandidedun ganaitidana. Jah aftra insand-
ida antharana; jah jainana afslohun, jah managans an-
tharans, sumans usbliggwandans, sumanzuh than uskwimand-
6 ans. Thanuh nauhthanuh ainana sunu aigands, liubana
sis, insandida jah thana du im spedistana, kwithands thatei
7 gaaistand sunu meinana. Ith jainai thai waurstwjans kwethun
du sis misso thatei sa ist sa arbinumja, hirjith ! uskwimam
8 imma, jah unsar wairthith thata arbi. Jah irndgreipandans
ina uskwemun, jah uswaurpun imma ut us thamma weina-
9 garda. Hwa nuh taujai frauja this weinagardis? Kwimith
jah uskwisteith thans waurstwjans, jah gibith thana weinagard
io antharaim. Nih thata gamelido ussuggwuth :
Stains thammei uswaurpun thai timrjans,
sah warth du haubida waihstins ?
ii Fram fraujin warth sa,
jah ist sildaleiks in augam unsaraim.
12 Jah sokidedun ina undgreipan, jah ohtedun tho managein;
frothun auk thatei du im tho gajukon kwath. Jah afletand-
ans ina galithun.
ij Jah insandidedun du imma sumai thize Fareisaie jah Hero-
14 diane, ei ina ganuteina waurda. Ith eis kwimandans kwethun
du imma : laisari, witum thatei sunjeins is jah ni kara thuk
manshun ni auk saihwis in andwairthja manne, ak bi sunjai
wig guths laiseis : skuldu ist kaisaragild giban kaisara, thau
i5niu gibaima? Ith Iesus gasaihwands ize liutein kwath du
im : hwa mik fraisith ? atbairith mis skatt, ei gasaihwau.
16 Ith eis atberun, jah kwath du im : hwis ist sa manleika jah
S. MARK 12. 17-32. 31
17 so ufarmeleins? Ith eis kwethun du imma : Kaisaris. Jah
andhafjands Iesus kwath du im : usgibith tho Kaisaris Kaisara
1 jah tho guths gutha. Jah sildaleikidedun ana thamma.
18 Jah atiddjedun Saddukaieis du imma thaiei kwithand
19 usstass ni wisan, jah frehun ina kwithandans : Laisari, Moses
• gamelida unsis thatei jabai hwis brothar gadauthnai, jah
bileithai kwenai, jah barne ni bileithai, ei nimai brothar is
20 tho kwen is, jah ussatjai barna brothr seinamma. Sibun
brothrahans wesun; jah sa frumista nam kwen, jah ga-
21 swiltands ni bilaith fraiwa. Jah anthar nam tho; jah
gadauthnoda, jah ni sa bilaith fraiwa. Jah thridja samaleiko.
22 Jah nemun tho samaleiko thai sibun, jah ni bilithun fraiwa.
23 Spedumista allaize gaswalt jah so kwens. In thizai usstassai,
than usstandand, hwarjamma ize wairthith kwens ? Thai
24 auk sibun aihtedun tho du kwenai. Jah andhafjands Iesus
kwath du im : niu duthe airzjai sijuth, ni kunnandans mela
25 nih maht guths? Allis than usstandand usdauthaim, ni liugand
26 ni liuganda, ak sind swe aggiljus thai in himinam. Aththan
bi dauthans, thatei urreisand, niu gakunnaideduth ana bokom
Mosezis ana aihwatundjai, hwaiwa imma kwath guth kwith-
27 ands : ik im guth Abrahamis jah guth Isakis jah Iakobis? Nist
guth dauthaize, ak kwiwaize. Aththan jus niu airzjai sijuth.
28 Jah duatgaggands ains thize bokarje, gahausjands ins
samana sokjandans, gasaihwands thatei waila im andhof,
29 frah ina : hwarja ist allaizo anabusne frumista ? Ith Iesus
andhof imma thatei frumista allaizo anabusns : hausei Israel,
30 frauja guth unsar frauja ains ist. Jah frijos fraujan guth
theinana us allamma hairtin theinamma jah us allai saiwalai
theinai jah us allai gahugdai theinai jah us allai mahtai
31 theinai. So frumista anabusns. Jah anthara galeika thizai :
frijos nehwundjan theinana swe thuk silban. Maizei thaim
32 anthara anabusns nist. Jah kwath du imma sa bokareis :
waila, laisari, bi sunjai kwast thatei ains ist, jah nist anthar
33 s. mark 12. 33-13. 23.
33 alja imma ; Jah thata du frijon ina us allamma hairtin jah us
allamma frathja jah us allai saiwalai jah us allai mahtai, jah
thata du frijon nehwundjan swe sik silban, managizo ist
34 allaim thaim alabrunstim jah saudim. Jah Iesus gasaihwands
ina thatei frodaba andhof, kwath du imma : ni fairra is
thiudangardjai guths. Jah ainshun thanaseiths ni gadaursta
ina fraihnan.
35 Jah andhafjands Iesus kwath laisjands in alh : hwaiwa
kwithand thai bokarjos thatei Christus sunus ist Daweidis ?
36 Silba auk Daweid kwath in ahmin weihamma :
Kwithith frauja du fraujin meinamma,
Sit af taihswon meinai,
unte ik galagja fijands theinans fotubaurd fotiwe theinaize.
37 Silba raihtis Daweid kwithith ina fraujan, jah hwathro imma
sunus ist? Jah alia so managei hausidedun imma gabaur-
jaba.
38 Jah kwath du im in laiseinai seinai : saihwith faura bo-
[karjam]
CHAPTER XIII.
16,17 wastja seina. Aththan wai thaim kwithuhaftom
18 jah daddjandeim in jainaim dagam. Aththan bidjaith ei ni
19 wairthai sa thlauhs izwar wintrau. Wairthand auk thai dagos
jainai agio swaleika, swe ni was swaleika fram anastodeinai
20 gaskaftais thoei gaskop guth, und hita, jah ni wairthith. Jah
ni frauja gamaurgidedi thans dagans, ni thauh ganesi ainhun
leike ; akei in thize gawalidane thanzei gawalida, gamaurgida
21 thans dagans. Jah than jabai hwas izwis kwithai: sai, her
22 Christus, aiththau sai, jainar, ni galaubjaith; Unte urreisand
galiugachristjus jah galiugapraufeteis, jah giband taiknins jah
fauratanja du afairzjan, jabai mahteig sijai, jah thans gawal-
23 idans. Ith jus saihwith, sai, fauragataih izwis allata.
xii. 38— xiii. 16. A gap in the MS.
S. MARK 13. 24-14. 12. 3$
24 Akei in jainans dagans afar tho aglon jaina sauil rikwizeith
25Jah mena ni gibith liuhath sein. Jah stairnons himinis
wairthand driusandeins jah mahteis thos in himinam ga-
26 wagjanda. Jah than gasaihwand sunu mans kwimandan in
27 milhmam mith mahtai managai jah wulthau. Jah than
insandeith aggiluns seinans jah galisith thans gawalidans
seinans af fidwor windam fram andjam airthos und andi
himinis.
28 Aththan af smakkabagma ganimith tho gajukon. Than
this juthan asts thlakwus wairthith jah uskeinand laubos,
29 kunnuth thatei nehwa ist asans. Swah jah jus, than ga-
saihwith thata wairthan, kunneith thatei nehwa sijuth at
CHAPTER XIV.
4,5 [frakwis]teins this balsanis warth ? Maht wesi auk
thata balsan frabugjan in managizo thau thrija hunda skatte
6 jah giban unledaim. Jah andstaurraidedun tho. Ith Iesus
kwath : letith tho ! duhwe izai usthriutith ? thannu goth
7 waurstw waurhta bi mis. Sinteino auk thans unledans
habaith mith izwis, jah than wileith, maguth im waila taujan ;
8 ith mik ni sinteino habaith. Thatei habaida so gatawida ;
9 faursnau salbon mein leik du usfilha. Amen, kwitha izwis :
thishwaruh thei merjada so aiwaggeljo and alia manaseth,
jah thatei gatawida so rodjada du gamundai izos.
10 Jah Iudas Iskarioteis, ains thize twalibe, galaith du thaim
1 1 gudjam, ei galewidedi ina im. Ith eis gahausjandans fagi-
nodedun jah gahaihaitun imma faihu giban; jah sokida
hwaiwa gatilaba ina galewidedi.
1 2 Jah thamma frumistin daga azyme, than paska salidedun,
kwethun du imma thai siponjos is : hwar wileis ei galeith-
29. Last word uncertain; a gap in the MS.
D
34 S. MARK 14. I3-54.
13 andans manwjaima, ei matjais paska? Jah insandida twans
siponje seinaize kwathuh du im : gaggats in tho baurg, jah
gamoteith igkwis manna kas watins bairands : gaggats afar
14 thamma, Jah thadei inn galeithai, kwithaits thamma heiwa-
fraujin thatei laisareis kwithith : hwar sind salithwos tharei
15 paska mith siponjam meinaim matjau ? Jah sa izwis taikneith
kelikn mikilata, gastrawith, manwjata; jah jainar manwjaith
16,41 unsis. Jah usiddjedun thai siponfjos] sai, galevvjada
42 sunus mans in handuns frawaurhtaize. Urreisith, gaggam !
Sai, sa lewjands mik atnehwida.
43 Jah sunsaiw nauhthanuh at imma rodjandin kwam Iudas,
sums thize twalibe, jah mith imma managei mith hairum jah
triwam fram thaim auhumistam gudjam jah bokarjam jah
44 sinistam. Atuh-than-gaf sa lewjands im bandwon kwithands:
thammei kukjau, sa ist : greipith thana jah tiuhith arniba.
45 Jah kwimands sunsaiw, atgaggands du imma kwath : Rabbei,
46 Rabbei ! jah kukida imma. Ith eis uslagidedun handuns ana
47 ina jah undgripun ina. Ith ains sums thize atstandandane
imma uslukands hairu sloh skalk auhumistins gudjins jah
48 afsloh imma auso thata taihswo. Jah andhafjands Iesus
kwath du im : swe du waidedjin urrunnuth mith hairum jah
49 triwam greipan mik. Daga hwammeh was at izwis in alh
laisjands jah ni griputh mik : ak ei usfullnodedeina bokos.
50 Jah afletandans ina gathlauhun allai.
51 Jah ains sums juggalauths laistida afar imma bivvaibiths
52leina ana nakwadana; jah gripun is thai juggalaudeis. Ith
is bileithands thamma leina nakwaths gathlauh faura im.
53 Jah gatauhun Iesu du auhumistin gudjin; jah garunnun
mith imma auhumistans gudjans allai jah thai sinistans jah
54bokarjos. Jah Paitrus fairrathro laistida afar imma, unte
kwam in garda this auhumistins gudjins; jah was sitands
1 3. For the second gaggats, MS. has gaggast. 1 6-41 . A gap in the MS.
S. MARK 14. 55-70. 35
55 mith andbahtam jah warmjands sik at liuhada. Ith thai
auhumistans gudjans jah alia so gafaurds sokidedun ana
56 Iesu weitwoditha du afdauthjan ina; jah ni bigetun. Mana-
gai auk galiug weitwodidedun ana ina, jah samaleikos thos
57 weitwodithos ni wesun. Jah sumai usstandandans galiug
58 weitwodidedun ana ina kwithandans : Thatei weis gahausi-
dedum kwithandan ina thatei ik gataira alh tho handu-
waurhton, jah bi thrins dagans anthara unhanduwaurhta
59 gatimrja. Jah ni swa samaleika was weitwoditha ize.
60 Jah usstandands sa auhumista gudja in midjaim frah Iesu
kwithands: niu andhafjis waiht, hwa thai ana thuk weit-
61 wodjand ? Ith is thahaida, jah waiht ni andhof. Aftra sa
auhumista gudja frah ina jah kwath du imma : thu is Christus
62 sa sunus this thiutheigins ? Ith is kwathuh : ik im ; jah
gasaihwith thana sunu mans af taihswon sitandan mahtais,
63 jah kwimandan mith milhmam himinis. Ith sa auhumista
gudja disskreitands wastjos seinos kwath: hwa thanamais
64 thaurbum weis weitwode ? Hausideduth tho wajamerein is :
hwa izwis thugkeith? Tharuh eis allai gadomidedun ina
65 skulan wisan dauthau. Jah dugunnun sumai speiwan ana
wlit is jah huljan andwairthi is jah kaupatjan ina, jah
kwethun du imma : praufetei 1 jah andbahtos gabaurjaba
lofam slohun ina.
66 Jah wisandin Paitrau in rohsnai dalatha jah atiddja aina
67 thiujo this auhumistins gudjins, Jah gasaihwandei Paitru
warmjandan sik, insaihwandei du imma kwath : jah thu mith
68 Iesua thamma Nazoreinau wast. Ith is afaiaik kwithands :
ni wait, ni kann hwa thu kwithis. Jah galaith faur gard, jah
69 hana wopida. Jah thiwi gasaihwandei ina aftra dugann
70 kwithan thaim faurastandandam, thatei sa thizei ist. Ith is
aftra laugnida. Jah afar leitil aftra thai atstandandans
69. Read thize.
D 2
$6 ST. MARK 14. 7 1-15. 14.
kwethun du Paitrau : bi sunjai, thizei is ; jah auk razda
71 theina galeika ist. Ith is dugann afaikan jah swaran thatei
72 ni kann thana mannan thanei kwithith. Jah antharamma
sintha hana wopida. Jah gamunda Paitrus thata waurd,
swe kwath imma Iesus, thatei faurthize hana hrukjai twaim
sintham, inwidis mik thrim sintham. Jah dugann greitan.
CHAPTER XV.
1 Jah sunsaiw in maurgin garuni taujandans thai auhu-
mistans gudjans mith thaim sinistam jah bokarjam, jah alia
so gafaurds gabindandans Iesu brahtedun ina at Peilatau.
2 Jah frah ina Peilatus : thu is thiudans Iudaie ? Ith is andhaf-
3Jands kwath du imma: thu kwithis. Jah wrohidedun ina
4 thai auhumistans gudjans filu. Ith Peilatus aftra frah ina
kwithands : niu andhafjis ni waiht ? sai, hwan filu ana thuk
5 weitwodjand. Ith Iesus thanamais ni andhof, swaswe silda-
leikida Peilatus.
6 Ith and dulth hwarjo[h] fralailot im ainana bandjan thanei
7 bedun. Wasuh than sa haitana Barabbas mith thaim mith
imma drobjandam gabundans, thaiei in auhjodau maurthr
8 gatawidedun. Jah usgaggandei alia managei dugunnun
9 bidjan, swaswe sinteino tawida im. Ith Peilatus andhof im
kwithands : wileidu fraleitan izwis thana thiudan Iudaie ?
10 Wissa auk thatei in neithis atgebun ina thai auhumistans
1 1 gudjans. Ith thai auhumistans gudjans inwagidedun tho
12 managein ei mais Barabban fralailoti im. Ith Peilatus aftra
andhafjands kwath du im : hwa nu wileith ei taujau thammei
13 kwithith thiudan Iudaie ? Ith eis aftra hropidedun : ushramei
14 ina. Ith Peilatus kwath du im : hwa allis ubilis gatawida?
70. R ead thize. 72. Read faurthizei. Read gretan. xv. 6. MS.
hwarjo. 9. Read fraletan.
S. MARK 15. 15-33. tf
1 5 Ith eis mais hropidedun : ushramei ina. Ith Peilatus wil-
jands thizai managein fullafahjan, fralailot im thana Barab-
ban, ith Iesu atgaf usbliggwands, ei ushramiths wesi.
16 Ith gadrauhteis gatauhun ina innana gardis, thatei ist prai-
i7toriaun, jah gahaihaitun alia hansa, Jah gawasidedun ina
paurpurai, jah atlagidedun ana ina thaurneina wipja uswind-
18 andans, Jah dugunnun goljan ina : hails, thiudan Iudaie !
19 Jah slohun is haubith rausa, jah bispiwun ina, jah lagjand-
20 ans kniwa inwitun ina. Jah bithe bilailaikun ina andwasi-
dedun ina thizai paurpurai, jah gawasidedun ina wastjom
swesaim, jah ustauhun ina ei ushramidedeina ina.
2 1 Jah undgripun sumana manne, Seimona Kyreinaiu, kwim-
andan af akra, attan Alaiksandraus jah Rufaus, ei nemi
22 galgan is. Jah attauhun ina ana Gaulgautha stath thatei ist
23 gaskeirith hwairneins staths. Jah gebun imma drigkan wein
24mith smyrna; ith is ni nam. Jah ushramjandans ina dis-
dailjand wastjos is wairpandans hlauta ana thos, hwarjizuh
25 hwa nemi. Wasuh than hweila thridjo, jah ushramidedun
26 ina. Jah was ufarmeli fairinos is ufarmelith : sa thiudans
27 Iudaie. Jah mith imma ushramidedun twans waidedjans,
28 ainana af taihswon jah ainana af hleidumein is. Jah usfull-
noda thata gamelido thata kwithano : jah mith unsibjaim
29 rahniths was. Jah thai faurgaggandans wajameridedun ina,
withondans haubida seina jah kwithandans : o sa gatairands
3otho alh jah bi thrins dagans gatimrjands tho, Nasei thuk
31 silban jah atsteig af thamma galgin ! Samaleiko jah thai
auhumistans gudjans bilaikandans ina mith sis misso mith
thaim bokarjam kwethun ; antharans ganasida, ith sik silban
32 ni mag ganasjan. Sa Christus, sa thiudans Israelis, atsteig-
adau nu af thamma galgin, ei gasaihwaima jah galaubjaima.
Jah thai mith ushramidans imma idweitidedun imma.
24. MS. disdailjandans. 29. MS. fauragaggandans.
38 S. MARK 15. 33-47.
33 Jah bithe warth hweila saihsto, rikwis warth ana allai
34airthai und hweila niundon. Jah niundon hweilai wopida
Iesus stibnai mikilai kwithands : ailoe ailoe, lima sibakthanei,
thatei ist gaskeirith: guth meins, guth meins, duhwe mis
35 bilaist ? Jah sumai thize atstandandane gahausjandans kweth-
36 un : sai, Helian wopeith. Thragjands than ains jah
gafulljands swam akeitis, galagjands ana raus, dragkida ina
kwithands : let, ei saihwam kwimaiu Helias athafjan ina.
37, 38 Ith Iesus aftra letands stibna mikila uzon. Jah faurahah
39 al[h]s disskritnoda in twa iupathro und dalath. Gasaihwands
than sa hundafaths sa atstandands in andwairthja is thatei
swa hropjands uzon, kwath : bi sunjai, sa manna sa sunus
40 was guths. Wesunuth-than kwinons fairrathro saihwandeins,
in thaimei was Marja so Magdalene jah Marja Iakobis this
41 minnizins jah Iosezis aithei jah Salome. Jah than was in
Galeilaia, jah laistidedun ina jah andbahtidedun imma, jah
antharos managos thozei mith iddjedun imma in Iairusalem.
42 Jah juthan at andanahtja waurthanamma, unte was para-
43 skaiwe, saei ist fruma sabbato, Kwimands Iosef af Areima-
thaias, gaguds ragineis, saei was silba beidands thiudan-
gardjos guths, anananthjands galaith inn du Peilatau jah
44 bath this leikis Iesuis. Ith Peilatus sildaleikida ei is juthan
gaswalt; jah athaitands than[a] hundafath frah ina juthan
45 gadauthnodedi. Jah finthands at thamma hundafada fragaf
46 thata leik Iosefa. Jah usbugjands lein jah usnimands ita
biwand thamma leina jah galagida ita in hlaiwa thatei was
gadraban us staina, jah atwalwida stain du daura this hlaiwis.
47 Ith Marja so Magdalene jah Marja Iosezis sehwun hwar
galagiths wesi.
38. MS. als. 44. MS. than.
S. MARK 16. I-I2. 39
CHAPTER XVI.
i Jah inwisandin[s] sabbate dagis Marja so Magdalene jah
Marja so Iakobis jah Salome usbauhtedun aromata, ei at-
2 gaggandeins gasalbodedeina ina. Jah filu air this dagis
afarsabbate atidd[j]edun du thamma hlaiwa at urrinnandin
3 sunnin. Jah kwethun du sis misso : hwas afwalwjai unsis
4thana stain af daurom this hlaiwis? Jah insaihwandeins
gaumidedun thammei afwalwiths ist sa stains; was auk
5 mikils abraba. Jah atgaggandeins in thata hlaiw gasehwun
juggalauth sitandan in taihswai biwaibidana wastjai hweitai ;
6 jah usgeisnodedun. Tharuh kwath du im: ni faurhteith
izwis, Iesu sokeith Nazoraiu thana ushramidan; nist her,
7 urrais, sai thana stath tharei galagidedun ina. Akei gaggith
kwithiduh du siponjam is jah du Paitrau thatei faurbigaggith
izwis in Galeilaian; tharuh ina gasaihwith, swaswe kwath
8 izwis. Jah usgaggandeins af thamma hlaiwa gathlauhun ;
dizuh-than-sat ijos reiro jah usfilmei, jah ni kwethun mann-
hun waiht ; ohtedun sis auk.
9 Usstandands than in maurgin frumin sabbato ataugida
frumist Marjin thizai Magdalene, af thizaiei uswarp sibun
io unhulthons. Soh gaggandei gataih thaim mith imma wis-
nandam, kwainondam jah gretandam. Jah eis hausjandans
thatei libaith jah gasaihwans warth fram izai, ni galaubi-
dedun.
12 Afaruh than thata
xvi. I. MS. inwisandin. 2. MS. atiddedun. 12-20. A gap in the MS.
NOTES.
The student should take an early opportunity of reading
over and learning by heart the very common words, of con-
stant occurrence, given in the list immediately preceding the
Glossary, at p. 59.
The meaning of the longer words will be found in the Glossary, but
it is by no means a bad plan to try to analyse each word, and hence to
obtain the sense by comparison with the nearest cognate word in English.
By this method many words can be thoroughly understood, and are then
easily remembered.
In this analysis, it is requisite to divest each word of all suffixes and
prefixes, leaving only the monosyllable which contains the root. Then,
if the root be known, the word can again be put together in such a
manner as to show the meaning. A few examples will make this
clear.
Thus, in i. i, we have anastodeins, and in I. i, insandja. These are
to be thus analysed.
Ana-stod-ein-s consists of the prefix ana-, on ; the root-syllable
stod, a derivative from stoth, pt. t. of standan, to stand, and therefore
implying the idea ' stand ' ; the suffix -tin-, which has much the same
force as the E. noun-suffix -ing; and, lastly, the final -s, the inflexion of
the nom. case. The sense is, literally, an ' on-standing,' i. e. an entering
upon, or, in a metaphorical sense, a beginning.
In-sand-ja consists of the prefix in-, i.e. in, to; sand, the root-
syllable, is E. 'send'; and -ja is the 1st pers. sing. pres. from the
infinitive form -Jan, which is the ordinary form employed for weak
verbs used in a transitive sense. The sense is, literally, ' I send in,' or
' I send to,' a slightly strengthened form of ' I send.'
A few more examples, explained more briefly, may be added.
Wop-jand-ins (1. 3) is the gen. of wop-jand-s, pres. part, of wop-jan,
to cry aloud ; allied to E. weep.
Af-lag-ein-ai (1. 4) is the dat. of af-lag-ein-s, an 'off-laying,' i.e. a
putting off or aside, remission.
42 NOTES TO CHAPTER I.
Ga-was-ith-s (i. 6) is the pass. pp. of ga-was-jan, where ga- is a
very common prefix adding little or nothing to the sense of the word,
whilst -was- contains the same root as the Lat. ues-tire, to clothe, and
the E. ves-ture ; the sense is, accordingly, ' clothed.'
If this method of analysis be frequently applied, the meanings of
many words can be obtained, without reference to the glossary, by help
of the well-known context. As the translation was made from the
Greek, the best commentary on the Gothic version is a Greek Testa-
ment ; for which the Authorized (or the Revised) English version is a
very good substitute.
CHAPTER I.
1. Aiwaggelj-ons, gen. of aiwaggelj-o, wk. s. f„ evangel, gospel.
Note the use of gg for ng, precisely as the Gk. 77 is used for 1/7. So
also aggilu = angihi, angel, in verse 1.
Sun-aus, gen. oisun-us, str. s. m., son.
Guth-s is an exceptional form, standing for guth-is, gen. of guth,
really a strong neuter form, though used in a masculine sense and
considered as masculine.
2. Ga-mel-ith, neut. oiga-mel-ith-s, pp. of ga-meljan, to write. See
the strong declension of adjectives.
'In Isaiah the prophet.' So in the Revised Version (18S1), and in
the best MSS. But the quotation is rather from Malachi iii. 1.
Literally, ' See, I in-send angel mine before thee.'
Sa-ei, he who, who. Particularly notice the use of the suffix -ei,
with the force of an indeclinable relative. So again, in verse 7, thiz-ci
■=this ei, of the one who, i.e. whose. In all such cases, the suffix ei
should be detached, and the declension of the rest of the word is then
easily perceived.
Gamanweith, will prepare, lit. prepares; the present being used
with a fut. sense, as in A.-S. In ga-mamv-cith, we may neglect the
prefix ga-, and we find mamo-ei/k = manw-jith, 3 pers. sing, from
manw-jan, where the suffix -Jan shows that the verb is a secondary
one, formed from the adj. mamv-us, ready, with the sense 'to make
ready.' The imper. pi. takes the very same suffix, so that in v. 3, we
have manweith = prepare ye; ivaurkcith, work ye, make ye.
3. Authidai, dat. sing, of authi-da, str. sb. f., 'a waste place';
derived from auths, adj. waste, cognate with G. ode.
Fraujins, gen. oifrauja, masc, a lord, A.-S. /r/a ; the fern, appears
in the G. frau, lady.
Staigos, ace. pi. of siaiga, str. sb. f., a path ; cf. G. stcg, and Cumber-
NOTES TO CHAPTER I. 43
land s/ee, a ladder, Sty head, head of the pass; E. sti-le, a. place to
climb over.
Guths unsaris, of our God; but the usual Gk. text has simply
clvtov, His. It is not my intention to compare the Greek text with the
Gothic version, as the reader can do this without help.
4. Daup-jands, dipping, i. e. baptizing.
Fra-waurhte, mis-workings, misdeeds, sins. The prefix fra-, like
G. ver-, A.-S. for-, has a sinister and intensive sense.
5. And-hait-andans, confessing; with a dative case. So also and-
bahtidedun takes the dative in v. 13.
7. Swinthoza mis, stronger than me ; the dative being used after
the comparative. In the A.-S. swift, strong, the n is dropped, the i
being lengthened in consequence of the loss of n.
Sa afar mis, he after me, the one (who is) after me.
Thizei; see note to v. 2.
And-bindan, to un-bind ; the E. verbal prefix un-, cognate with
Goth, and- and Gk. avri, is quite distinct from the E. negative prefix
un-, cognate with Goth, un-, Lat. in-, Gk. av-.
9. "Warth, it became, it happened. Note the distinction between
wairthan and wisan.
Jains, that; IL.yon.
Fram Johanne, by John (not from, though from is the same word).
10. TJsluknans, ace. pi. masc. oiuslukns, adj., open, lit. 'unlocked.'
Uppstrom suggests the reading usluknandans, ace. pi. masc. of pres.
part. Massmann suggests uslukanans, ace. pi. masc. of past part.
There seems no sufficient reason for emendation.
11. Sunus meins sa liuba, lit. son mine the dear one ; my dear son.
12. 'And soon, behold, the Spirit,' &c. Massmann reads suns sa
ahma, soon the Spirit. Here again, there seems no sufficient reason for
emendation, which should seldom be resorted to.
13. Dage, gen. pi. ; governed by tiguns; lit. forty of days.
Diuzam, dat. pi. of dius, a wild beast, E. deer, G. thier. Here we
may note (1) the substitution of r for s in E. deer, and (2) the change
of s to z between two vowels, precisely as in thuzei, v. 11, and in thizei.
15. Usfullnoda, has been fulfilled. The passive sense is due to the
letter -n ; verbs in -nan being so used. See note to 4. 37.
Atnehwida sik, has drawn itself near, has approached ; the use of
sik being reflexive.
16. Is, this Seimonis, lit. of him, of that Simon ; i. e. of him, viz.
Simon.
17. Hirjats is only used as an imperative dual, ' come here, ye two ! '
It only occurs in two other forms, viz. hiri, which is the corresponding
singular, ' come thou here,' and hirjith, pi. ' come ye here.'
44 NOTES TO CHAPTER I.
Gatauja, &c. ; ' I will make you two to become catchers of men.'
1 8. Laistidedun, they followed; lit. 'they took the tracks'; from
laists, sb. a track.
19. Leitil, a little, is the proposed reading in Gabelentz and Lobe,
the MS. having leita. Uppstrom proposes leitilata as being the strict
neuter form; but leitil will do as well, the suffix -ata being occasionally
dropped.
20. Hai-liait, he called ; here hai- is the reduplicating prefix, just as
in Lat. ce-cidi and the Gk. ri-rvcpa. It is used to form the past tense of
some (not all) of the strong verbs. It is obtained by adding ai to the
first letter of the verb.
21. Sabbato is here indeclinable; or we may take sabbato-daga
as a compound word in the dative case. See the expression again
in 2. 23.
Laisida, he taught, pt. t. of lais-jan, secondary verb from a base
lais-, appearing in the cognate A.-S. Idr (=lair=lais), E. lore. Thus
laisida = A.-S. l<krde = G. lehrte.
i*l. Swa-ei, so that ; cf. note on saei, v. 2.
Hwo, &c. ; ' what is the teaching, the new ? ' = what is the new
doctrine ? This answers to the Gk. idiom, which admits of the expres-
sion ris -fj diSax^i % Kaivrj ; and see 6. 2.
Jah after waldufnja has the force of ' even,' lit. ' also'; cf. v. 38.
28. And allans bisitands Galeilaias, throughout all the inhabitants
of Galilee. The regular ace. pi. would be bisitandans, but certain pres.
participles, when treated as substantives, make the ace. pi. in -s instead
of -ans. See nouns in -nds in the Grammar.
29. In garda, in the house, where garda is the dative. We should
rather have expected the accusative (as in Latin, after verbs of motion) ;
and, indeed, in gard occurs in 2. 26 and 3. 20.
30. Bi, concerning ; just as by was used in Middle English.
31. Af-lai-lot, left, lit. 'let'; here af- is the prefix, and lat- the
reduplication ; see note to v." 20. And seefra-lai-lot in v. 34.
32. The dative absolute in Gothic answers to the ablative absolute
in Latin; hence andanahtja than waurthanamma = ' twilight being
then come.' The following t /tan — 'when. 1
TJbil-habandans, evil-having, i. e. having an illness ; precisely
answering to the Gk. «a«cws tx oVTas an d the Latin male habentcs. So
also in 6. 55 ; but in 2. 17 we find ubilaba habandans, where -aba is the
regular adverbial suffix.
36. Galaistans waurthun, were followers ; a periphrasis for ' fol-
lowed.' The same idiom recurs in Gal. 6. 16.
38. Thaim bisunjane haimom, the villages round about. Here
bisunjane is an adverb ; see 3. 34, 6. 6. The MS. reading haimon is
NOTES TO CHAPTERS I, II. 45
a mere slip on the part of the scribe, who put the sing, for the pi.,
although he had just written thaim.
40. Thatei, that, is constantly thus used to introduce a dependent
clause, with a change of construction ; it here introduces the very words
of the speech.
41. Wiljau, I am willing; this verb, when used in the present
tense, invariably takes the form of the subjunctive, not the indicative,
mood.
42. Aflaith. af imma ; the reduplication of af appears also in the
Greek — &Trr}\0€v air' avrov.
44. Gagg ataugjan, go to show ; i'. e. go and show. At-aug-jan
is lit. ' to present to the eye ' ; from ango, the eye. This explains the
A. S. cetywan, to show, which is similarly derived from eage, the eye, by
the usual vowel-change from ea to y, and a change from g to w.
Fram, because of ; Gk. irepi.
45. Is, he (the healed leper) ; but immediately after, is refers to
Christ. This inartificial use of the pronouns is very common in A. S.,
so that it is not always easy to know the real subject of the sentence.
CHAPTER II.
1 . Gra-freh-un, they learnt by inquiry. Such is frequently the sense
of the corresponding A. S. verb frignan ; see Glossary to Sweet's A. S.
Reader. 1st, is, i. e. was ; Gk. eari.
2. ETi gamostedun, lit. were not able, could not; but the meaning
is extended, as in other passages, to the sense ' could not find room.'
Gamostedun is from the strong-weak verb gamotan.
4. Thar-ei, where that, where. Cf. sa-ei.
TJs-grab-and-ans, lit. graving or digging out, hence breaking through.
The use of this peculiar word is due to the Gk. e£opv£avTes. Cf. 12. 1,
where the Gk. has &pv£ev.
Insailidedun jah fralailotun, lowered by cords and let down ; but
the usual Gk. text merely has xa^&fft.
5. Af-let-anda, are let off, are remitted or forgiven. Notice the
characteristic suffix -da of the passive voice. So also in v. 9.
6. Thagk-jand-ans sis, thinking to themselves. Here gk is for nk ;
and sis is the dat. of the reflexive pronoun. Cf. Latin sibi.
7. Niba ains guth, except one, viz. God ; except God alone.
11. Nnnuh., and take. The enclitic particle uh requires particular
notice ; it is here used precisely like the Lat. que, being suffixed to the first
word in the sentence which it joins to the preceding. It is also used
like the Lat. -que in composition (as in quis-que), so that we have the
46 NOTES TO CHAPTERS II, III.
forms sah, short for sa-uh, hwaz-uh for hwas-uh, &c. Cf. kwathuh,
i. e. and said, 14. 13. And see notes to 3. 2, 8. 23.
12. Aiw ni, aye not, ever not, i. e. never ; see 3. 29.
Gasehwun, third pers. pi. ; not the first person, as in the Gk. and
A.V.
15. Jan. warth, and it came to pass; lit. it became.
16. The words supplied are necessary to the sense; the scribe prob-
ably omitted them by accident.
17. Ubilaba habandans, they that are sick ; see note to 1. 32.
19. Ibai magun, lit. if may, whether may, a way of introducing a
question ; we drop the if.
Und thatei, unto (the time) that, i. e. as long as.
20. Afnimada, shall be taken away; here we may note (1) the
repetition of af after the verb ; (2) the passive ending in -da ; (3) the
use of the present for the future.
21. Ibai afnimai, &c. ; lit. 'lest it may take away the fulness from
it, the new from the old.' Here sa niuja, being feminine, agrees with
fullo understood ; and faimjin, being masculine, relates to snaga. The
sentence is ill-constructed and, in fact, wrong, and is only intelligible when
compared with the Gk. text — «i Se firj, atpti rb irXrjpcufia avrov to Kaiviiv
tov iraXaiov, /cat \Hpov oxioy.a. ylvtrcu. The translator has taken rd
irKS/pco/m to be an accusative, and has then translated every word just as
it stands.
22. Giutand, they pour, people pour.
23. Here we have a construction resembling the Latin accusative
with the infinitive. ' And it came to pass, that he is going through ' ;
the present infinitive being used descriptively.
26. TJf, in the time of, lit. under ; used to translate Gk. em.
Thanz-ei = thans-ei, which that.
Ainaim gudjam, lor the priests alone ; see v. 7.
Mith sis wisandam, being with himself, i.e. them that were
with him.
28. Jah, even ; Gk. «cu.
CHAPTER III.
2. Hailidedi-u, whether he would heal. The sense of ' whether ' is
given by the suffixed particle -u, which is omitted in the MS. in this
particular instance, but must be supplied as in other passages. In the
very next verse, we have skuld-u ist, whether it is obligatory ; and in
10. 38 we have maguts-u, whether are ye able.
6. Us-kwem-eina, pt. pi. subj. of us-kwiman. So also thraiheina
from threihan in v. 9; attaiiokeina in v. 10.
NOTES TO CHAPTERS III, IV. 47
9. Ei skip habaith. wesi, that a ship might be had, i.e. kept in
readiness. Here habaith is the neuter of the pp. of haban.
11. Tbaib = thai-uh, pi. of sah=sa-uh. Thaih than — whensoever
they, as soon as they.
12. Ga-swi-kunth-i-ded-eina ; here ga- is the prefix, swi- another
prefix, kunth- a pp. with the sense ' known,' -i- the suffix helping to
form a causal verb, -ded- the mark of the past tense of a weak verb,
and -eina the suffix of the pi. of the pt. t. subjunctive. For swikunth,
see 6. 14.
15. Sauhtins, diseases, lit. sicknesses. It is exactly represented by
the obsolete E. sought. Thus Fitzherbert, in his Book of Husbandry,
speaks of lotige-sought, i. e. lung-disease, as incident to cattle.
17. Gasatida im namna, he set to them names, he gave them the
names. Namna is the pi. of the neut. sb. namo, just as watna is pi. of
wato.
20. Ga-iddja sik, lit. went themselves together, i.e. came together.
Here ai is not the usual diphthong, but due to the juxta-position of two
distinct vowels.
22. Uswairpith governs the dative; so also in 5. 40 and 9. 47.
27. Kasa is governed by wilwan.
Galeithands in gard is, entering into his house ; dosXQwv els 7-771/
ol/ciav airov.
Than, then, must be supplied; its omission is clearly due to the
repetition of than- in the following thana.
28. Af-let-ada, shall be forgiven.
Allata, all, neut. sing.
Thata frawaurhte, the (kind) of sins ; here frawaurhte is gen. pi.
after the neut. sing, thata, and the two words form a phrase together.
31. Standand-ona. This use of the neuter pi. is very remarkable,
as we should expect the masculine. Precisely the same construction
occurs in the parallel passage in St. Luke viii. 20, where we have gasaih-
wan thuk gairnjandona, desiring to see thee.
32. Setun ; a pi. verb, to agree with managei, a noun of multitude.
Cf. thans sitandans, those sitting, in v. 34; and see 4. T.
35. Saei allis, for whosoever. Here allis translates the Gk. yap, as
in other passages, and is the second word in the sentence. So also sat
allis = for behold, Luke i. 44.
Sa, he.
Jan. . . jah, both . . and.
CHAPTER IV.
1. Ina, ace. with infinitive; f so that he, entering into a ship, is
sitting in the sea.' The MS. galeithan is certainly a clerical error for
48 NOTES TO CHAPTER IV.
galeithandan ; cf. uhttc avrbv kfiPdvra ds rb irXoTov KaOrjaOai iv rfj
OaXdaarj.
2. Manag, many a thing, much; neut. ace. sing.
4. Kaihtis, however ; this is used with but little force, and answers
to Gk. fiiv, which it translates.
5. Antharuth-than = anthar-uh than, but then other; Gk. a\\o 81.
In thiz-ei = in this ei, on this account that, because ; in with the
genitive denotes 'on account of.' Cf. in this waurdis, 4. 17.
6. At, &c, at the sun then arising ; here at with the dative is used
with the force of the usual dative absolute. So also in v. 35, q. v.
8. The use of letters to denote numbers is borrowed from Gk. The
Gothic /, like the Gk. A.', stands for 30; r, like Gk. p', means 100;
whilst/ occupies the same position in the alphabet as the Gk. £, and
therefore means 60.
9. Aus-ona haus-jand-ona, hearing ears.
10. Thai bi ina, they (that were) beside him ; ol irepi avrov.
Frehun takes here a double accusative.
11. At-gib-an, not the infinitive, but neut. of the pp.
Jainaim thaim uta, to them that are without ; enuvots 8c rots e£<v.
12. Nibai hwan, lest at any time. Nibai = ni ibai, if not.
15. TTnkarjans, (being) careless. There is no such word in the
Gk. text. According to Massmann, a few Latin texts have negli-
genter.
19. Bi thata anthar lustjus, lit. desires concerning the other thing,
i. e. concerning other things ; ittpl rci \011rd. kmOvfiiai.
21. Ibai . . duthe ei, lit. if . . for the purpose that. Here ibai intro-
duces a question.
Ni-u = ni-uh, and not. In the next verse, nih also = ni-uh ; but there
is a difference in the syntax, niu being used in the interrogative clause
(as in v. 38), but nih in the direct statement, the final -h having the
force of ydp.
22. Nih allis ist hwa fulginis, for there is not anything of that
which is hidden. Hwa is a neuter nom., followed by a genitive.
24. Mitath occurs again as a dative form in 2 Cor. x. 13. +'
Izwis thaim galaubjandam, to you that believe; lit. to you^e
believing.
25. Jah thatei, even that which.
33. Hausjon occurs, as a by-form of hausjan, in other passages also.
34. Inuh, prep, without. Inuh also occurs as a mere compound of
in, in, with the enclitic particle -uh.
37. Gafullnoda, became full, was filled. The passive sense is given
by the inserted n ; we thus have gafull-j-an, to make full, gafull-n-an,
to become full. This n evidently arose from the suffix of the pp. of a
NOTES TO CHAPTERS IV, V. 49
strong verb ; thus and-hundn-an, to become unbound = and-bundan-an,
where bundan- is the stem of the pp.
38. U"iu kara thuk thizei, is there not a care to thee of the fact
that, does it not concern thee that ? The word ist is omitted, though
occurring in other passages ; the phrase kara ist is used (as here) with
the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing. So also in
12. 14.
39. Af-dumb-n, become dumb. Verbs in -nan make the imperative
singular in -n. Cf. note to verse 37.
41. Ohtedun sis agis mikil, they feared for themselves (with) a
great fear. Here agis is the accusative ; imitated from the Gk. kcpo^rj-
$T)<xav (pofiov /xiyav.
Sijai, lit. may be.
CHAPTER V.
4. Eisarnam bi fotuns, with irons by his feet ; a periphrasis for
'fetters'; Gk. nidais. Just below the Gk. -rriSas is rendered by ana
fotum eisarna, irons on his feet.
7. Hwa mis jah thus, rt k/xol ical aoi ;
Sunau may be either dat. or voc. ; it is doubtless here a vocative ;
Gk. vii.
10. TJsdrebi; read usdribi, pt. s. subj. of us-dreiban. See 6. 13.
13. And driuson, down the slope. Driuso is ' that which falls
away,' from driusan, to fall.
14. Kwemun, they (the villagers) came; the subject being changed,
as in the Gk.
Hwa wesi thata waurthano, what that which was done might be.
15. The repetition of thana is due to that of rov in the Gk.
18. The word ina (repeated) is governed by bath, the nom. to
which is sa, understood from saei. 'And him, as (he was) entering the
ship, he who had been mad prayed him.'
21. Us-leith-and-in Iesua ; dative absolute. The Gk. has the gen.
absolute.
23. Aftumist habaith, lit. hath (i. e. fares) at the last, lies in ex-
tremity, is at the point of death ; a literal translation of kaxarws ex«-
After habaith, we must mentally supply I pray thee, as is actually done
in the A. V.
Kwlmands lagjais, coming thou mayst lay, i. e. thou mayst come
and lay ; e\9u>v kmOrjs.
25. Kwinona suma, a certain one of women, i. e. a certain woman.
So also sumai thize bokarje, certain of the scribes, Matt. 9. 3 ; and
compare ains used with the gen. pi. in verse 22 above.
E
50 NOTES TO CHAPTERS V, VI.
29. Slaha, stroke, i. e. plague ; Gk. /xaanyos. The Lat. plaga has
the same double sense.
30. Tho us sis maht usgaggandein, the might (virtue) going out
of himself. So also tho thata taujandein, the woman that is doing this,
in verse 32. The use of the pres. part, is very graphic.
34. Sijais, mayst thou be ; the subj. used for the imperative.
36. Kodith, neut. of the pp. of rodjan ; agreeing with waurd. So
also gaskeirith is neut. in verse 41.
39. Hwa, why ? Cf. the use of Gk. ri.
40. Thans mith sis, those with him, i. e. his chosen disciples.
41. Kwath-uh, and said. See note to 2. II.
Taleitha kumei, Ta\i6d Kovfit.
42. Was jere twalibe, was of twelve years; ?jv yap Itwv SwotKa.
43. Ei manna ni funthi thata, that a man should not find it out,
i. e. that no one should find out or know it.
CHAPTER VI.
2. So handugeino so ; cf. 1. 27, and the note.
Wairthand, take place, i. e. are done or wrought.
7. Hwanzuh = hwans-uh, separately, severally ; ace. pi. of hwas-uh,
every one.
8. Ei waiht ni nemeina, lit. that a whit they should not take, i.e.
that they should take naught (no whit).
9. Wasjaith, put ye on, wear ; imp. pi. With dat. case.
11. Janai, as in the MS., is a mere clerical error for jainai.
14. Allis, for, Gk. yap; placed as the second word in the sentence,
but to be taken first.
Sa daupjands, the baptizing one ; Gk. b Pa-mifav.
15. 'That he is a prophet as one of the prophets.' The A. V. has
1 or as.'
16. Lit. ' that to him I cut the head off, to John '; i. e. ' John, whose
head I cut off.'
1 7. Auk raihtis, for also, for ; which begins the sentence. So also
in 7. 10 ; cf. 9. 41.
Gahabaida, seized ; compare haban with Lat. capere.
In Hairodiadins, because of Herodias; in with the gen. has this
sense ; so also in verse 26.
19. Naiw, was angry with ; Gk. ivtixw. The word is very doubtful,
but is assumed to be the pt. t. from a verb neiwan, to be angry. It has
been supposed to be related to A. S. niwol, prostrate ; but this is little
better than conjecture, as the sense does not altogether suit.
NOTES TO CHAPTERS VI, VII, VIII. 51
20. Ohta sis, feared for himself, dreaded; followed by the ace.
lohannen.
31. ' And a fitting day taking place'; here we have a sort of nomina-
tive absolute, in place of the usual dative. But in verse 22, we have
the datives atgaggandein, &c.
22. Dauh.tr ; such is the proper form of the dative ; see 7. 26. The
MS. has the nom. form dauhtar.
Thishwizuh = this hwis-uh, whatsoever; the gen. case, governed by
bidei. Verbs of asking frequently take the gen. case, as in A. S. So
also hwis in verse 24, and haubidis (which is in apposition with hwis),
are both in the genitive.
27. Spaikulatur ; Gk. aweKovKdrcupa, which is merely a Gk. tran-
scription of Lat. speculatorem.
.55. Thadei, wherever ; see 14. 14.
Ei is wesi, that he might be. ' ,
56. Thau, even, merely; Gk. itav.
Skauta, dat. case, governed by attaitokeina. So also imma.
CHAPTER VII.
1. Gakwemun sik, came together ; here used reflexively, not as in
2. 2 ; Gk. avvayovTcu. Cf. IO. I.
3. 4. These verses are parenthetical, as in the A. V.
4. Anthar ist manag, lit. other (thing there) is many. Cf. verse 8.
5. Bi thammei, according to that which.
6. Bi izwis than liutans, with respect to you, the hypocrites ; Gk.
irepl v(Mt)v twv inroKpiruv.
it. Thishwah thatei, as to whatsoever.
G-abatnis, thou receivest benefit.
12. Hi . . ni waiht; a double negative; ovkzti . . ovSev.
18. Frathjith governs the dative, as in Luke 2. 50 ; hence, nifrath-
jith thammei — do ye not understand that thing, that, &c.
23. Gagamainjand. This curious reduplication of the prefix ga-
occurs in some other verbs also.
31. Mith tweihnaim. markom, lit. amid the two boundaries; Gk.
dvd fiiaov tSjv opicov.
33. In ausona imma, upon the ears to him, i. e. upon his ears.
36. Mann, dat. case ; always used instead of mannin, which would
be the regular form.
Mais thamma, by that the more, so much the more.
CHAPTER VIII.
1. At with the dative signifies the time when; at . . wisandein=-
whilst the multitude was very great. Cf. 11. 11.
E 2
52 NOTES TO CHAPTERS VIII, IX.
7. Jah thans, them also ; mi avrd.
8. Spyreidans, merely a Gothic form of Gk. airvpihas.
11. Du imma, lit. to him ; hence, at his hands, from him ; -trap avrov.
12. Jabai, if; we must supply 'it will be strange' before it. The
idiom is a Greek one, and due to the Gk. d Sodrjaerai.
Taikne, of tokens, gen. pi. ; supply ' any.'
15. 'See that ye guard yourselves from,' &c.
23. Ga,-\i-h.wa,-aelLwi = /iwa-zt/i-gase/izvt, if he could see anything.
Here u = uh is used as the sign of interrogation, and is put after the
prefix ga-, in order to introduce it as early as possible. Hwa is used
indefinitely. Cf. 14. 44, 16. 8.
24. 'I see men, so that I see them as trees.' The word see only
occurs once in the A. V., but the Gothic is nearer the Greek ; PKinco
Toi/i avOpwirovs, Zti ws SiuSpa upu>. See the Revised Version.
25. Aftra, again. For this sense, see also 9. 1 2.
26. Mannhun, to any one ; dat. case. See note to 7. 36.
Wehsa should rather be weihsa ; but the fonn occurs again in the
following verse.
27. Mans, men, nom. pi.; we also find mannans.
31. Skulds ist uskiusan, is liable to be rejected. Here uskiusan,
lit. ' to reject,' is used idiomatically with the passive sense. So also
uskwiman, to be killed, lit. 'to kill.' But usstandan, being intransi-
tive, is used in the usual manner. Cf. frabugjan, in 14. 5 ; and see 9. 45.
38. Meina, of me, gen. of ik. So also is, of him.
CHAPTER IX. A . ./- ,(,7,-wU
U **-**'
1. Thai ize, those of them who; agreeing with sumai.
3. "Wullareis . . ni mag, a fuller cannot, i. e. no fuller can.
10. ' What is it, to arise from the dead ? '
15. Managei, as a noun of multitude, takes the plural pres. part,
and verb.
18. Thishwaruh. thei, wheresoever that.
Usdreibeina should be usdHbeina, pt. pi. subj. The vowel i is the
same as in the pt. pi. indie, and the pp.
19. TJnd hwa, until what, until when.
At izwis, with you.
21. Hwan lagg mel ist, how long a time is it? -noaos XP" V0S loriv.
22. TJnsara, gen. pi. of ik, governed by hilp', see verse 24.
Unsis, ace. pi. of ik.
23. Thata, this saying, viz. * If thou canst,' &c. Gk. dntv avrtp to,
El Svvaoai, k.t.\. Cf. 10. 40, 12. 33.
NOTES TO CHAPTERS IX, X. $3
Allata mahteig, everything (is) possible ; Gk. rravra Sward (without
any verb).
29. In waihtai ni mag, lit. in a whit can not, i.e. can by no
means.
31. Uskwimand, they (i. e. men) will kill him.
41. Saei auk allis, for whosoever. Auk = Gk. yap; see 6. 17.
Allis, wholly, is a mere expletive. Gk. ts yap av.
42. Goth, ist imma mais, it is good for him rather ; Gk. tca\6v kanv
avrw paWov.
45. Gawairpan = to be cast; see note to 8. 31. So also atwairpan
in verse 47.
49. Hwazuh auk, for every one.
Hwarjatoh hunsle, each one of sacrifices, i. e. every sacrifice.
Hwarjatoh = hwarjata-uh, neut. of hwarjizuh, for which see 15. 24.
50. Supuda, put for supoda, shall be seasoned. The form gasupoda
actually occurs in Luke, 14. 34; but we have one other instance of the
use of u for in the form gakrotuda, shall be broken, Luke 20. 18.
CHAPTER X.
2. Skuld-u sijai, whether it may be right. Here -u asks the ques-
tion, as usual.
7. Inuh this, on account of this.
13. Understand i?nma after the second du.
17. Arbja wairthau, I may become an inheritor.
21. Ainis thus wan ist, it is lacking to thee of one thing.
23. J?edh.o=faiku; see verse 22.
24. Hugjandam afar faihau, thinking after (i. e. upon) wealth.
Hugjandam, though an uncertain reading, is probably the right one.
25. Azitizo; better azetizo ; see 2. 9.
29. In meina, for the sake of me, for my sake.
32. Aftra, again ; Gk. na\iv.
Thoei habaidedun ina gadaban, the things which had to befall
him. Gk. ra peWovra avra> ovpfiaiveiv. This use of E. had precisely
represents the Gothic idiom. Cf. thatei habaida taujan, that which he
had to do, was about to do ; John 6. 6.
33. Thatei sai, namely, lo ! Here thatei represents the Gk. on. The
verse is unfinished in the Gothic ; the Gk. has /cat irapadwffovaiv avrov
toTs tOvfcrt, which Massmann translates into Gothic by Jah atgiband ina
thaim thiudom.
35. Wileima is the ist pers. pi.; we should expect wileiwa, the ist
pers. dual, but a mixture of the dual and plural is not surprising. But
54
bidjos is really a dual form ; and so is uggkis. In the next verse we
have the dual forms wileits and igkwis ; but in verse 37 we have the
plurals eis and kwethun, followed by the duals ugkis and sitaiwa. So
also in verses 38, &c.
38. Maguts-u, could ye two? Here -u, as usual, introduces a
question. Maguts is the 2 p. pt. dual ; and magu, in verse 39, is the
1 p. pt. dual.
39. The MS. omits daupjanda, but it must be supplied ; Gk.
PaimffO-fjaeaOf.
40. Ith thata, du sitan, but this thing, viz. to sit. Cf. 9. 23.
42. Thaiei must be supplied ; it was probably omitted owing to its
likeness to thatei. Gk. on ol do/cowrcs.
45. At andbahtjam, lit. for services, i.e. to receive services; Gk.
diaK0VT]6fjvai.
46. Read Barteimaius, as being a nom. form ; cf. Nazoraius.
49. Haihait atwopjan ina, commanded (them) to call him.
CHAPTER XI.
1. Bethsfagein ; so also in Luke, 19. 29. Massmann mentions the
reading Br}0(T<payri.
2. Gaggats, go ye two; see note to 10. 35. Observe the numerous
dual forms. Cf. 14. 13.
3. This gairneith, desires this (foal) ; gairnjan governs the genitive.
7. Ana, upon, is here (at first) used adverbially ; cf. du at the end of
10. 13. But ana ina = upon him.
11. At with the dat. expresses the time when ; see note to 8. 1.
si. Frakwast, thou cursedst. Here kwast is a phonetic substitution
for the regular (but scarcely pronounceable) form kivatht.
22. Galaubein guths, faith in God, lit. faith of God; Gk. -nionv
©€00.
23. Wairp thus, cast thyself. Wairpan sometimes governs the
dative case, as here. See 12. 4.
Thata, ei thatei, this (thing), that that which.
Thishwah thei, this, whatever it be, that.
29. Here fraihna takes the ace. izivis, and the gen. waurdis ; ' I also
ask you one word.'
30. TJzuh, whether from. Uz-uh = us-uh, where the enclitic -uh
introduces a question, as usual. See notes to 8. 23, 10. 38.
32. TJhtedun is for ohtedun\ see 12. 12. Cf. supuda for supoda\
see note to 9. 50.
NOTES TO CHAPTERS XII, XIII. $$
CHAPTER XII.
1. Dal uf mesa, a hollow place for a wine-vat. Mes also means a
table, dish ; hence a wide vat.
2. Nemi akranis, he might receive (some) of the fruit; akranis
being in the gen. case. Gk. Ad/3?7 and tov fcapnov.
4. ' Him they maltreated, throwing stones.' Here wairpan governs
the dative; see II. 23.
Haubith. wundan brahtedun, lit. brought (i. e. made) him wounded
in the head. Wundan is the ace. masculine, and governs haubith, which
is also an accusative, indicating the place in which the wound was felt.
5. Sumanzuh, = sumans-uh, and some.
6. Liubana sis, dear to himself.
10. "Warth du haubida, has become for the head; a lit. translation
of kytv^Orj els K€<f>a\rjv.
14. ' And there (is) no care to thee of any one ' ; see note to 4. 38.
19. Kwenai is the dat. after bileithai; so also fraiwa is dat. sing, in
verse 20. But barne is the gen. pi., so that ni barne must be taken
as equivalent to ' none of children,' i. e. no child.
30. Understand ist, is. The verb is omitted in the Gk. also, which
has' avTr} n purr) cvtoXtj. So also in the next verse.
32. Kwast, thou hast said ; see note to II. 21.
33. Thata, du frijon, this thing, viz. to love. Cf. 9. 23, 10. 40.
38. The chapter ends with the syllable bo-, the rest being lost.
CHAPTER XIII.
16. The verse is lost all but the two last words ; it must have ended
with niman wastja seina, to take his garment.
19. The Gothic literally follows the Gk., making thai dagos jainai
(those days) the nominative case. ' For those days shall be such afflic-
tion ' ; ecrovTdi yap at fipipai kxeivai Ait/as ; see the Revised Version.
TJnd hita, up to this time.
20. Ainhun leike, anybody ; lit. ' any of bodies '; hike being gen.
plural.
25. "Wairthand driusandeins, shall be falling ; eaovrai eKninTovres.
28. TJskeinand laubos, leaves shoot forth. Here laubos is the
nominative, not the accusative as in the A. V. The Gk. \K<pvr( ra <pv\Xa
may have been misunderstood by the translator.
29. The verse may easily be completed by adding the word haurdim,
the doors. The Gk. has dvpais ; and in Matt. 6. 6, haurdai corresponds
to Qipav.
$6 NOTES TO CHAPTERS XIV, XV.
CHAPTER XIV.
4. The first legible syllable is -teins. The whole sentence should be
— Du hwe so frakwisteins this balsanis ivarth, wherefore was this waste
of the balsam ?
5. Maht wesi auk, for the balsam might be able to be sold (lit. to
sell), &c. See note to 8. 31.
8. ' What she had, she did.'
13. Gaggats, go ye two. Note the use of the dual.
16. The verse ends with sipon; add -jos to complete the word, and
also is, lit. of him. Thai siponjos is = his disciples. We next pass on
to v. 41,, ' See, the Son of man is betrayed into the hands of sinners.'
44. At-uh>than-gaf, put for than-uh at-gaf, but then gave (or, had
given). From the verb at-giban. See a similar construction in 16. 8.
51. Leina, with linen; dat. case.
Gripun is, seized him ; is being the gen. case.
61. "Waiht ni = ni waiht, no whit, nothing.
64. Skulan wisan, to be deserving ; elvai evoxov.
65. Gabaurjaba, gladly; there is no such word in the Greek texts.
66. Paitrau being in the dative absolute, the word jah before atiddja
is superfluous.
68. Ni wait, ni kanrt, I know not, nor do I understand.
69. Thatei sa thizei ist, that he is (one) of them. It is clear that
thizei is here used as equivalent for thize, gen. pi. of sa. So in verse 70,
thizei is = thize is, thou art (one) of them. Gk. «£ avru/v, in both places.
CHAPTER XV.
7. Thaiei gatawidedun. Cf. the Revised Version, * men who had
committed murder.' The A. V. is indistinct as to the number of the
pronoun and verb.
9. Wileid-u = wileith-u, do ye wish ? Here -u is the enclitic
particle indicating a question ; and wileith is the subjunctive form, used
in place of the indicative. In verse 12, the form wileith occurs; for
the change of final th to d before u, see note to 16. 7.
14. Hwa allis ubilis, for what evil ? Hwa ubilis is, literally, 'what
of evil.'
16. Praitoriaun ; Gk. TlpaiTuipiov.
1 7. TTswindandans, plaiting it ; i. e. having plaited it ; Gk. ir\{£avTts.
19. Lagjandans kniwa ; Gk. tiOcvtcs tcL yovara.
20. Andwasidedun, they unclothed him. The E. verbal prefix un-
is cognate with Goth, and- ; see note to 1. 7.
21. Sumana manne, some one of men, a certain man.
NOTES TO CHAPTERS XV, XVI. $J
32. Atsteigadau, let him descend. Here the passive voice is used
with the force of a middle voice. There are a few other similar in-
stances.
34. Ailoe ; Gk. 'EXcut, 'Ekaji, \afifxa aa.fiaxQo.vi.
Bilaist, hast thou forsaken ; put for bilaitht, which was hard to pro-
nounce.
36. Dragkida ina, gave him to drink. Observe the difference between
the strong verb drigkan, to drink, and the weak causal verb dragkjan,
to make to drink.
Ei saihwam, that we see ; the indicative, where we might expect the
subjunctive.
Kwimai-u Helias, if Helias may come; where -u is the enclitic
particle, signifying ' if ' or ' whether.'
39. In andwairthja is, in his presence, before him, near him; i£
Ivavrias avrov.
41. 'And when he was in Galilee, they also followed him,' &c.
42. Paraskaiwe ; Gk. Hapaaiccvri ; preparation.
43. Anananthjands galaith, taking courage, he went; roXfirjaas
elarjXOe.
44. Thana ; MS. than. Possibly for than", the a being elided before
the following h in quick speech.
CHAPTER XVI.
4. G-aumidedun thammei, they perceived the fact that. Gaumjan
takes the dative.
6. N"i faurhteith izwis, do not fear for yourselves.
7. Kwithuduh. = kwithuth uh, and say ye. Cf. note to 15. 9.
8. Diz-uh-than-sat = than-uh. dis-sat, for then . . . seized upon
them. The nominative is reiro, trembling. The verb dis-sat must be
again supplied after usfilmei. Cf. note to 14. 44.
Ohtedun sis auk, for they feared for themselves.
9. As ' the two oldest Gk. MSS., and some other authorities, omit
from verse 9 to the end,' the occurrence of these verses in the Gothic is
noteworthy.
10. Wisandam, lit. being, Gk. yevofiivois. But the sense is really
' that had been,' as in the A.V.
12. 'And then, after this.' Here the MS. ceases, the rest of the
gospel being lost.
LIST OF WORDS
OF COMMON OCCURRENCE.
af, of, off, from, by, &c.
afar, after, according to.
aftra, again, back.
aim, one.
ak, but.
alls, all.
ana, on, upon, in, &c.
and, towards, to, throughout.
at, at, by, &c.
aththan, but.
atta, father.
auk, for, also.
bi, by, about, near, &c
bit he, whilst, when.
dags, day.
dis-, apart ; also as intensive prefix.
du, to, towards.
duhwe, wherefore.
duthe, therefore.
ei, that.
eis, they ; m«, they that.
faur, for, before, &c.
faura, before, because of.
filu, much.
fram, from, by, on account of.
fruma, first.
ga-, a common prefix ; scarcely af-
fecting the sense.
gaggan, to go.
-h, enclitic ; see uh.
haban, to have.
hails, whole.
haubith, head.
her, here.
himins, heaven.
hwa, what.
hwan, when.
hwar, where.
hwas, who.
iba, ibai, perhaps, lest.
iddja, went.
ik, I.
im, am ; to them.
imma, him ; dat.
wi, in, into, to, by, &c.
ina, him ; ace.
ins, them.
is, art; he.
z'-tf, is.
ita, it.
?VA, but.
izai, to her.
z'ztf, of them.
izos, of her.
izwar, your.
jabai, if.
y«^, and.
/az, yea.
jains, that (yon).
/», now.
y«j, ye.
kunnan, to know.
, kwam, came.
kwath, quoth, said.
mats, more ; adv.
manags, much, many.
manna, a man.
meina, of me.
6o
WORDS OF COMMON OCCURRENCE.
mans, mine.
mik, me; ace.
mis, me ; dat.
mith, with, by, near.
ni, nih, not, nor.
niba, nibai, except, unless.
nu, now.
sa, he ; who (rel.) ; the.
saei, who (lit. he who).
sama, same.
seins, his, their.
sis, to himself, themselves.
so, she; the.
sums, some.
sunna, sun.
j««j, soon, at once.
sunus, son.
JWfl, so, also.
swaei, so that, that.
swaswe, just as, so that.
j«/*, as.
thai, the ; nom. m. pi.
thaim, the, those ; dat. pi.
thairh, through, by.
thamma t to the ; dat. m. n. s.
than, then, when.
thana, the ; ace. m. s.
thans, the ; ace. m. pi.
thata, thatei, that.
thau, though, than.
thei, that.
theins, thy.
this, of the ; gen. m. n. s.
thizai, to the ; dat. f. s.
thize, of the ; gen. m. n. pi.
tho, her, it, the, that ; ace. f. s. and
n. and ace. pi.
thos, the ; nom. and ace. f. pi.
thu, thou ; dat. thus ; ace. thuk.
ufar, over.
uh, u, 'h ; enclitic particle.
und, until.
undar, under.
uns, unsis, us.
unsar, our.
unte, for, because, till.
us, out, from.
ut, uta, out, without ; adv.
waila, well.
warth, became, happened, was.
was, was.
weis, we.
wesi, might be.
ivesun, were.
withra, over against, in return for,
near, towards.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
The words are arranged in alphabetical order. Thus hw follows h ; kw
follows k ; and th follows te, and precedes ft".
In compound words, the composition is indicated by a hyphen. Thus, in
af-letan, the af- is a mere prefix, and the word is to be compared with the
simpler form letan.
The references are given to the chapters and verses of St. Mark's Gospel.
Numerous words are added, without references, which do not occur in that
gospel. Thus the Index includes all the more important words in the
language.
Forms marked *, as Agan*, are unauthorised, but may be inferred.
The contractions are such as will be readily understood. Thus wk. s. m.
= weak substantive, masculine; str. v. = strong verb; adj. — adjective;
gen. — genitive ; &c.
Aba, wk. s. m. a man ; or, rather,
a husband, 10. 12 ; gen. pi. abne ;
dat. pi. abnam.
Abraba, adv. strongly, excessively,
very, ] 6. 4.
Abrs, adj. strong, mighty. Cf.
A. S. abal, strength.
Af, prep, with dat. of, from, out of,
off, by, &c. ; 1. 42; 2. 20; 3. 22;
5. 4, &c. ; af taihswon, on my
right hand, 10. 37. E. of.
Af-aikan, str. v. {pt. t. aiaik), to
deny vehemently, imprecate curses
on oneself, to deny, 14. 71 ; pt. t.
af-aiaik, 14. 68.
Af-airzjan, wk. v. to lead astray, to
deceive, 13. 22.
Afar, prep, with dat. and ace. after
(both of place and time), I. 7;
according to, 5. 24. Afar thata,
thereafter ; afar thatei, after that ;
afar leitil, after a little while ;
afaruh than, but after, 1 6. 12.
Comparative of af.
Afar-gaggan, str. v. to go after,
follow, 5. 37.
Afar-laistjan, wk. v. to follow
after; with dat. case, 10. 32.
Afar-sabbatus, s. the week fol-
lowing, 16. 2.
Afar-ub. than, but after, 16. 12.
See Afar and TJh.
Af-dauthjan, wk. v. to kill, put to
death, 14. 55 ; pass, to die, 7. 10.
Af-dumbnan, wk. v. to hold one's
peace, to be still, 4. 39.
Af-hwapjan, wk. v. to quench;
to choke, 4. 7-
Af-hwapnan, wk. v. to be quenched,
9. 44, 46; to be choked, 5. 13.
Af-lageins, str. s.f. a laying aside,
remission, 1. 4.
Af-lailot, left, 1. 31.
Af-lailotum, we have left, 10. 28.
See Af-letan.
Af-leithan, str. v. (laith, lithans),
to go away, depart, leave, 1.42;
3. 7; pt. s. aflaith, went, 12. I.
62
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Af-letan, str. v. (lailot, letans), to
leave, forsake, I. 18; to put away
(a wife), io. 4; to send away, 4.
36 ; to let off, forgive, 3. 28 ;
pt. s. aflailot, left, 1. 31; pt.pl.
I p. aflailotum, 10. 28.
Af-maitan, sir. v. (maimait, mait-
ans), to cut off, 9. 43 ; af-maitan
haubith, to behead, 6. 16, 27;
pt. s. afmaimait, 6. 16.
Af-marzeins, str. s.f. deceitfulness,
4. 19.
Af-niman, str. v. to take away,
remove, take away from, 2. 20,
21; 4. 25.
Af-sateins, str. s. f. divorcement,
10. 4.
Af-satjan, wk. v. to divorce, 10. 2.
Af-slahan, str. v. (sloh, slahans),
to slay, 12. 5 ; pt. s. afsloh, struck
off, 14. 47; pt.pl. afslohun, killed,
12.5.
Af-slauthnan, wit. v. to be beside
oneself, to be amazed, I. 26;
10. 24.
Afta, adv. behind. A. S. aft.
Aftana, adv. behind, from behind,
5. 27. A.S. cB/tan.
Af-tiuhan, str. v. (tauh, tauhum,
tauhans), to draw away, push off;
to take, draw aside, 8. 32.
Aftra, adv. back, backwards ; again,
once more, '2. 1 ; 3. I ; hence aftra
gabotjan, to restore, 9. 1 2 ; aftra
gasatjan, to heal, 8. 25.
Aftuma, adj. the hindmost, the last,
10. 31. See Afta.
Aftumists, adj. the last, 9. 35 ;
aftumist haban, to be at the point
of death, 5. 23.
Af-wairpan, str. v. to cast away,
put away. 10. 50. See Wairpan .
Af-walwjan, wk. v. to roll away,
16. 3, 4.
Agan*, root verb, to fear; hence
un-agands, fearless.
Aggilus, str. s. m. an angel, 8. 38;
messenger, I. a; pi. aggileis, 1. 13;
aggiljus, 12. 25. Gk. 0774X05.
Aggwus, adj. narrow, strait ; ag-
gwitha, s. anguish. A. S. ange,
strait.
Agis, str. s. n. fright, fear, terror,
awe, 4. 41. E. awe.
Agjan, wk. v. to terrify ; only in
compounds.
Aglaitei, wk. s. f. lasciviousness,
7. 22. From aglus.
Agio, wk. s.f. anguish, tribulation,
affliction, 4. 17; 13. 24.
Agluba, adv. hardly, with difficulty,
10. 23. See below.
Aglus (also agls), adj. difficult, hard ;
aglu ist, it is hard, 10. 24. Cf.
E. ail.
Aha, wk. s. m. understanding.
Ahaks, str. s. (/. or m.?), a dove,
1. 10.
Ahjan, wk. v. to think.
Ahma, wk. s. m. the spirit, the Holy
Ghost, 1. 8, 10, 12, &c.
Ahs (gen. ahsis), str. s. n. an ear of
corn, 2. 23; 4. 28. E. ear.
Ahtau, num. eight.
Ahwa, str. s. f. a river, 1. 5.
A. S. da.
Aibr, str. s. n. an offering.
Aigan, Aihan, v. anom. (of which
are found the principal forms aih
or aig; aihum or aigum ; aihta ;
pres. pt. aigands), to have, own,
possess, 12. 6 ; pt. pi. aihtedun,
12. 23. Cf. E. own.
Aigin, str. s. n. property.
Aihtedun, they owned, had, 1 2. 23.
See Aigan.
Aihtron, wk. v. to desire, beg for,
pray ; to beg, 10. 46. Desider-
ative from aigan.
Aihwa-tundi (Pdros). str. s. f. a
bramble bush; a bush, 12. 26.
Aikklesjo, wk.s.f (Gk. kK/e\r]<Tia),
a church.
Ainlif, num. eleven.
Ainnohun, Ainohun, adj. any
one » 5- 37 > 9- 8. See Ains-
hun.
Ains, adj. (fern, aina, neut. ain or
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
«3
ainata?), one, single, only, 2. 7,
26 ; ains — jah ains, the one — and
the other, 10. 37.
Ains-hun, adj. (hun being a suffix);
only used with ni preceding ; ni
ainshun, not any one, none, 5.
37.
Air, adv. early, I. 35 ; fllu air, very
early, 16. 2. A. S. <zr.
Airkns, adj. good, holy, sincere.
Airtha, str. s.f. earth, region, land,
2. 10; 4. 5. E. earth.
Airthakunds, or Airtheins, adj.
earthly.
Aims, str. s. m. a messenger. A. S.
dr, a messenger.
Airzeis, adj. astray, going astray ;
airzeis wisan, or wairthan, to go
astray, be deceived ; to err, 12. 24.
Cf. Lat. errare.
Airzjan, wk. v. to deceive.
Aithei, wk. s. f. a mother, 3. 32 ;
5. 40.
Aiths, str. s. m. an oath, 6. 26. E.
oath.
Aiththau, conj. or, 3. 4. A. S.
oftSe.
Aiw, adv. ever, aye, 2. 12 ; ni aiw,
never, 3. 29. A. S. a.
Aiwaggeljo, wk. s. f. evangel,
gospel, 1. 1, 14. Gk. evayyiKiov.
Aiweins, adj. eternal, 3. 29. See
Aiws.
Aiwiski, str. s. n. shame.
Aiws, str. s. m. time, a long time,
an age, eternity, the world, 10. 30.
A. S. ae.
Aiz, str. s. n. brass, coin, money,
6. 8. E. ore.
Ajukduths, str. s.f. an age, eter-
nity.
Ak, conj. but; gen. used after a
negative, I. 44. A. S. ac.
Akei (aKXa), conj. but, 9. 13.
Akeit, Aket, str. s. n. vinegar, 15.
36. Lat. acetum.
Akran, sir. s. n. fruit, 4. 7 ; —
matjan, to eat fruit, II. 14; —
giban, to bear fruit, 4. 7 ; — bai-
ran, to bear fruit, 4. 28. E.
acorn.
Akrana-laus, adj. unfruitful, 4. 19.
Akrs, str. s. m. a field, 15. 21. E.
acre.
Akwisi, str. s.f. an axe. E. axe.
Ala-brunsts, str. s.f. a holocaust,
whole burnt-offering, 12. 33.
Alakjo, adv. together, collectively ;
allai alakjo (navrfs), all together,
II.32.
Alan, str. v. to nourish. Lat. alere.
Aids, Alths, str. s.f. age, genera-
tion, life.
Aleina, str. s.f. a cubit. Cf. E. ell.
Alew, str. s. n. olive oil, 6. 13.
Gk. £\aiov.
Alewis, adj. belonging to the olive-
tree ; fairguni alewi (opos kXaiaiv),
the Mount of Olives, II. I.
Alhs, str. s.f. (dat. alhai and alh),
temple, 11. 11 ; 12. 35. A. S. alh.
Alids, pp. fatted ; from alan.
Alja (el yA], eav ^17), conj. than,
except, unless, save, 9. 8 ; prep,
with dat. (ir\rjv), except, 10. 18;
12. 32. From aljis.
Aljan, str. s. n. zeal. A. S. ellen.
Aljath, adv. other-whither, in an-
other direction ; hence afieithan
aljath, to go away, 12. 1. From
aljis.
Aljis, adj. other. Cf. E. else.
Allathro, adv. from all sides, from
every quarter, 1. 45. From alls.
Allis, adv. wholly, altogether, 6. 14;
however, for, as in allis than, for
when, 12.25; hwa allis, but what,
15. 14; for, 3. 35. From alls.
Alls, adj. all, I. 5, 27; 7. 14;
much, 12. 37. E. all.
Althan, str. v. to grow old.
Altheis, adj. old. E. old.
Amen, amen, verily, 3. 28; 6. 1 1.
Gk. dfi-fjv.
Amsa, wk. s. m. shoulder.
Ana, prep, with dat. and ace. on,
in, upon, over, to, towards, 1. 10,
&c. ; at, 1. 22. E. on.
6 4
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Ana, adv. upon, on, 2. 4; atlagjan
ana, to lay on, 8. 23 ; galagjan
ana, to lay on, II. 7. E. on.
Ana-biudan, str. v. to command,
I. 27; pt. s. anabauth, 1. 44;
5- 43-
Ana-busns, sir. s. f. a command,
commandment, 7- 7- See above.
Ana-filh, str. s. n. a tradition, 7.
3-5-
Ana-filhan, s/r. v. to hand down
as tradition, observe as tradition ;
pt. pi. anafulhun, 7. 5 ; pt. pi.
2 p. anafulhuth, 7. 13 ; pt. s. ana-
falh, entrusted, let out, 12. I.
Ana-fulhano, wk. s. n. a tradition,
7.9.
Anafulhun, pt. t. pi. 7. 5. See
Anafilhan.
Ana-hneiwan, str. v. to stoop
down, 1. 7.
Anaks, adv. suddenly, 9. 8.
Ana-kumbjan, wk. v. to lie down,
recline, sit at meat, 2. 15 ; to sit
down, recline, 8. 6.
Ana-laugns, adj. secret, 4. 22.
Ana-mahtjan, wk. v. to use one's
might against any one; to defraud,
10. 19.
Ana-nanthjan, wk. v. to have
courage, to dare, to be bold, 15.
43-
Ana-silan, wk. v. to be silent, grow
still, 4. 39.
Ana-stodeins, str. s.f. beginning,
1. 1 ; 10. 6.
Ana-stodjan, wk. v. to begin; title.
Ana-wairths, adj. about to come,
future, 10. 30.
And, prep, with ace. to, towards,
through, 1. 28; throughout, 1.
39 ; 14. 9. (Takes also the form
anda in composition.) A. S. and,
prep.
Anda-nahti, str. s. n. twilight,
gloaming, evening, 1.32; II. II,
19.
And-augjo, adv. openly, I. 45.
From augo.
And-bahti, str. s. n. service, min-
istry. Cf. G. amt ; E. embassy.
And-bahtjan, wk. v. to serve,
minister, 1. 13, 31. See above.
And-bahts, str. s. m. a servant,
minister, 9. 35 ; 14. 54. A. S.
ambeht.
And-beitan, str. v. (bait, bitum,
bitans),to reprove, rebuke, threaten,
1. 25; 3. 12; 8. 32; pt. s. and-
bait, 8. 33.
And-bindan, s/r.v. (band, bundum,
bundans).to unbind, unloose, 1. 7;
to explain, 4. 34.
And-bundnan, wk. v. to be un-
bound, to be loosened, 7. 35.
Andeis, str. s. m. an end, 3. 26 ;
13. 27. E. end.
And-hafjan, str. v. (pt. t. and-
hof), to reply, 3. 33, 7. 28.
And-haitan, str. v. to call to one,
7. 14 ; to profess, confess, I. 5.
And-hausjan, wk. v. to listen, to
hear (a prayer) ; to hear, 6.
20.
And-hof, answered, replied, 3. 33 ;
7. 28. See And-hafjan.
And-huljan, wk. v. to uncover,
2.4.
And-niman, str. v. to receive, take,
4. 20; 6. II ; pt. pi. andnemun,
7.4.
And-rinnan, str. v. (rann, runnum,
runnans), to compete in running ;
hence to strive, dispute, 9. 34.
And-staurran, wk. v. to murmur
against, 14. 5.
And-wairthi, str. s. n. presence;
faura or in andwairthja, in pres-
ence of, before, 2. 12 ; 9. 2.
And-wasjan, wk. v. to unclothe,
take off clothes, 15. 20.
Ans, str. s. m. a beam.
Ansts, str. s.f. favour, grace. A. S.
est.
Anthar, adj. another, other, the
rest, 3. 21 ; 12. 21. E. other.
Antharuh, adj. the other, 4. 5.
Apaustaulus, Apaustulus, str.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
«5
s. m. an apostle, messenger, 6. 30.
Gk. diroaroXos.
Ara, wk. s. m. an eagle. A. S.
earn.
Arbaiths, str. s. f. labour. A. S.
earfift.
Arbi, str. s. n. a heritage, inherit-
ance, 1. 7. A.S.yrfe.
Arbi-numja, wk. s. m. an inheritor,
heir, 12. 7.
Arbja, wk. s. m. an heir ; arbja
wairthan, to inherit, 10. 1 7.
Arhwazna, str. s. f. an arrow.
Arjan, wk. v. to plough. A. S.
erian.
Arman, wk. v. with ace. to pity,
have mercy on, 10. 47.
Arms, adj. poor, wretched. A. S.
earm.
Arms, str. s. m. the arm; ana
armins niman, to take up in the
arms, 9. 36. E. arm.
Arniba, adv. surely, safely, 14. 44.
Aromata (apw^iara), sweet spices,
16. 1.
Asans, str. s. f. harvest, harvest
time, 4. 29; summer, 13. 28.
Asilu-kwairnus, str. s. f. a mill-
stone, 9. 42. From asilas, an ass,
and kwairnns, a mill-stone (cf. E.
quern).
Asneis, str. s. m. a servant, hired
servant, I. 20. A. S. esne.
Asts, str. s. m. a bough, a twig, a
branch, 4. 32 ; 11. 8; 13. 28.
At, prep, with dat. at, by, 4. I ;
from, 12. 2; with ace. at, 12. 2.
E. at.
At-augjan, wk. v. to bring before
the eyes, shew, I. 44; to appear,
]6. 9; pass, to appear, 9. 4.
From augo. A.S. aitywan.
At-bairan, str. v. (bar;, berum,
baurans), to bring, offer, I. 44;
6. 28 ; pt. s. at-bar, 6. 28.
At-gaggan (at-iddja), anom. v. to
go to, come ; hence, to descend,
come down, I. 10; to enter, 4.
J 9J 5-39-
At-giban, str. v. (gaf, gebum, gib-
ans), to give over, deliver up,
put in prison, 1. 14; to give, 4.
11; pt. s. atgaf, gave, delivered,
6. 28; 8. 6; 15. 15; pt. pi. at-
gebun, 15. 10.
At-haban, wk. v. to have at; hence,
refl. to come towards, 10. 35.
At-h.afjan, str. v. to take down,
15. 36.
At-haitan, str. v. to call to one,
3. 13 ; pt. s. athaihait, 6. 7.
Athn, str. s. n. a year.
Aththan, conj. but, 1. 7 ; 2. 10.
At-iddjedun, came, 2. 18. See
At-gaggan.
Atisk, str. s. n. a corn-field, 2.23.
At-ist, is at hand, 4. 29. See At-
wisan.
At-lagjan, wk. v. to lay, lay on ;
to put on clothes, 15. 17; at-
lagjan faur,to lay before, set before,
8.6.
At-nelrwjan, wk. v. refl. to draw
near, be at hand, 1. 15 ; 14. 42.
At-saihwan, str. v. (sahw, sehwum,
saihwans), with gen. and ace. to
take heed, give heed, 8. 15.
At-standan, str. v. to stand near,
14. 47, 7°-
At-steigan, str. v. (staig, stigum,
stigans), to descend, come down,
15- 30, 3 2 -
Atta, wk. s. m. father, 1. 20 ; 5. 40.
At-tauhun, they led, brought, 15.
22. See At-tiuhan.
At-tekan, str. v. (taitok, tekans),
to touch, 1. 41 ; pt. s. attaitok,
I. 41; 5. 27; 7.33; pt.s.subj.
attaitoki, 8. 22; pt. pi. subj. at-
taitokeina, 3. 10 ; 6. 56.
At-tiuhan, str. v. (tauh, tauhum,
tauhans), to pull towards, to bring,
II. a ; pt. pi. attauhun, 15. 22.
At-wairpan, str. v. (warp, waurp-
um, waurpans), to cast, cast
down, 9. 22 ; app. with pass, sense,
to be cast, 9. 47.
At-walwjan,w&. v.to roll to, 15.46.
66
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
At-wisan, str. v. to be present, be
at hand ; pr. s. atist, 4. 29.
At-wopjan, wh. v. to call, 9. 35.
Audags, adj. happy, blessed. A. S.
eadig.
Aufto, adv. perhaps, probably ; ibai
aufto, if so, 2. 22 ; ei aufto, if
haply, 11. 13.
Auga-dauro, wh. s. f. window
(eye-door).
Augjan, wh. v. to shew, lit. bring
before the eyes.
Augo, wh. s. n. the eye, 7. 22. E.
eye.
Auhjodus, str. s. m. tumult, 5. 38;
insurrection, 15. 7.
Auhjon, wh. v. to cry aloud, make
a noise, 5. 39.
Auhns, sir. s. m. an oven. E. oven.
Auhsa, wh. s. m. an ox. E. ox.
Auhuma, adj. high, orig. highest ;
hence super I. adj. auhumists, the
highest, chief, 8. 31.
Auk, con), (commonly after the first,
or first closely-connected, words of
the sentence ; and very rarely at
the beginning), for, also, 1. 1 6 ;
auk raihtis, for, 6. 1 7. E. ehe.
Aukan, str. v. to grow, increase.
E. ehe, v.
Aurahi, str. s. f. a grave, tomb,
5. 2.
Aurali, str. s. n. a napkin.
Aurkeis, str. s. m. a cup, 7. 4, 8.
Aurti-gards, str. s. m. an orchard,
garden.
Aurtja, wh. s. m. a gardener.
Auso, wh. s. n. the ear, 4. 9 ; 14.
47. E. ear.
Authida, str. s. f. a desert, I. 3,
4, 12; 8.4.
Auth(i)s, adj. desert, waste, I. 35.
Icel. auftr, G. ode.
Awethi, str. s. n. a flock of sheep.
Cf. E. ewe.
Awiliud, str. s. n. giving of thanks.
Awiliudon, wh. v. to thank, to give
thanks, 8. 6.
Awistr, str. s. n. a sheepfold.
Awo, wh. s.f. a grandmother. Cf.
Lat. anus.
Azets, adj. light, easy; only in
compar. azetizo, easier, 2. 9 ;
spelt azitizo, 10. 25.
Azgo, wh. s.f. ash, cinder. E. ash.
Azymus, str. s. m. unleavened
bread; azyme = twv d^vfiotv, 14.
12.
B.
Badi, str. s. n. a bed, 2. 4; 3. 9;
ana badjam bairan, to carry about
on beds, 6. 55. E. bed.
Bagms, str. s. m. a tree, 8. 24. E.
beam.
Bai, adj. both.
Baidjan, wh. v. to compel.
Bairan, str. v. (bar, berum, baurans),
with ace. to bear, carry, bring, 1.
32 ; akran bairan, to bear fruit,
4. 28 ; pt. pi. berun, q. v. E.
bear.
Bairgahei, wh. s. /. hill country.
Cf. G. berg.
Bairgan, str. v. (barg, baurgum,
baurgans), to keep. A.S. beorgan.
Bairhtaba, adv. brightly, clearly,
8. 25.
Bairhts, adj. bright. E. bright.
Baitrs, adj. bitter. E. bitter.
Balgs, str. s. m. (pi. balgeis), a
wine-skin, 2. 22. E. bag.
Balsan (fivpov), balsam, balm, oint-
ment, 14. 5.
Balthei, wh. s. f. boldness (as if
from adj. balths*).
Balwjan, wh. v. to torment, plague,
5. 7. Cf. E. bale.
Bandi, str. s.f. a band, 7. 35. E.
band.
Bandja, wh. s. m. a prisoner, 15. 6.
From bindan.
Bandwo, str. s. f. a sign, token ;
a signal, 14. 44. From bindan.
Banja, str. s.f. wound. E. bane.
Bansts, str. s. m. a barn.
Barizeins, adj. of barley (as if from
a sb. baris*).
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
6 7
Barms, str. s. m. bosom, lap. A. S.
bearm.
Barn, str. s. n. a child, 5. 39 ; 7.
27. E. bairn.
Barnilo, wk. s. n. a little child, son,
2. 5; 10. 24.
Barniski, str. s. n. childhood, 9.
21.
Basi, str. s.n.z berry. E. berry.
Bath, prayed, asked, besought, 1.
35 ; 5. 10. See Bidjan.
Batists, best. E. best.
Batiza, better. E. better.
Bauains, str. s. f. a dwelling,
dwellingplace, 5. 3.
Bauan, v. {both wk. and str.) to
build, inhabit, dwell in. A. S.
buan.
Baudana, ace. of Bauths, adj. deaf,
7- 32.
Baur, str. s. m. a child. From
bairan.
Baurd, str. s. n. a board. E. board.
Baurgs, str. s.f. a burgh, borough,
town, city, I. 33. E. borough.
Baurthei, wk. s.f. a burden. From
bairan.
Bauths, adj. deaf, 7. 32.
Bedun, prayed, 5. 12; 7. 32;
asked for, 15. 6. See Bidjan.
Beidan,sfr\ v. (baid, bidum, bidans),
with gen. to abide, await, look
for, expect, 15. 43. E. bide.
Beist, str. s. n. leaven, 8. 15. Prov.
E. beist ings.
Berun, they bore, 1. 32; brought,
7. 32. See Bairan.
Berusjos, str. s. m. pi. parents.
Bi, prep, with ace. by, about, 1.6;
concerning, 1. 30; 3. 6; near,
3. 32 ; with dat. by, at, after,
according to, 5.7; with instru-
mental, as in bithe, q. v. E. by.
Bi-aukan, str. v. (pt. t. biaiauk), to
increase, add to, 4. 24.
Bida, str. s.f. a request, exhorta-
tion, prayer, 9. 29.
Bidagwa, wk. s. m. a beggar. Cf.
E. beg.
Bidjan, str. v. (bath.bedum, bidans),
to pray, ask, I. 35; 6. 22, 24;
pt. s. bath, 1.35; 5. 10; pt. pi.
bedun, q. v. A. S. biddan.
Bi-gitan, str. v. to find, I. 37; pt.
s. bigat, 7. 30.
Bi-hlahjan, str. v. (hloh, hlohum,
hlahans), to laugh at, laugh to
scorn; pt. pi. bihlohun, 5. 40.
Bi-laikan, str. v. (lailaik, laikans),
to mock, 10. 34 ; pt. pi. bilai-
laikun, 15. 20.
Bi-leithan, str. v. (pt. t. bi-laith ;
pp. bi-lithans), to leave, forsake,
10. 7 ; 12. 19 ; pt. s. 2 p. bilaist,
*5- 34-
Bindan, str. v. (band, bundum,
bundans), to bind. E. bind.
Bi-rinnan, str. v. to run about,
6-55-
Bi-saihwan, str. v. to look round
on, 3. 34; 10. 23.
Bi-satjan, wk. v. to beset, set round
anything, 12. I.
Bi-sitan, v. only used in pres. part.
bi-sitands, a neighbour, one who
dwells near, 1. 28.
Bi-speiwan, str. v. to spit upon ;
pt. pi. bispiwun, 15. 19. See
Speiwan.
Bi-sunjane, adv. near, round about,
i-38; 3- 34 5 6.6.
Bi-swaran, str. v. to conjure, ad-
jure, 5. 7.
Bitauh, went about, 6. 6. See
Bi-tiuhan.
Bithe, adv. whilst, I. 42. From
bi and the.
Bi-tiuhan, str. v. to go about,
visit ; pt. s. bitauh, 6. 6.
Biudan, str. v. (bauth, budum, bud-
ans), to bid. E. bid.
Biuds, str. s. m. a holy table, altar ;
hence any table, 7. 28. A.S. beod.
Biugan, str. v. (baug, bugum,
bugans), to bow, bend. E. bow. v.
Biuhts, adj. accustomed, wont ;
biuhts wisan, to be wont, IO. I
(where was is omitted).
F 2
68
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Bi-waibjan, wk. v. to weave round,
wind about, 14. 51 ; to clothe,
16. 5-
Bi-windan, str. v. (wand, wundum,
wundans), to wind round, enwrap,
swathe; pt. s. biwand, 15. 46.
Blandan, v. to blend. E. blend.
Blauthjan, wk. v. to abrogate, make
void, 7. 13.
Bleiths, adj. merciful. E. blithe.
Bliggwan, str. v. (pt. t! blaggw,
pi. bluggwum, pp. bluggwans), to
beat, cut, 5. 5 ; 10. 34.
Blinds, adj. blind, 8. 23. E. blind.
Bloma, wk. s. m. a flower. E.
bloom.
Blotan, v. (pt. t. bai-blot?), to re-
verence, worship, 7. 7-
Bloth, str. s. n. blood, 5. 25. E.
blood.
Boka, str. s.f. a letter; pi. bokos,
the writings, the scriptures, 14.
49 ; bokos af-sateinais, a bill of
divorcement, 10. 4. E. book.
Bokareis, str. s. tn. a bookman, a
scribe, I. 22.
Bota, sir. s. f. advantage. E.
boot, sb.
Botjan, wk. v. to boot, advantage,
profit, 5. 26 ; 8. 36. E. boot, v.
Brahta, I brought, 9. 16. See
Briggan.
Brahw, str. s. n. twinkling (of an
eye). Cf. E. brow.
Braids, adj. broad. E. broad.
Briggan, wk. v. (pt. t. brahta), with
ace. to bring, 6. 27- E. bring.
Brikan, str.v. (brak, brekum, bruk-
ans), to break. E. break.
Brinnan, str. v. (brann, brunnum,
brunuans), to burn. E. burn.
Brinno, wk. s. f. a fever, 1. 30.
Lit. 'a burning.'
Brothar, s. in. a brother, 1. 16;
3. 35; pi. brothjus, 3. 31. E.
brother.
Brothrahans, pi. brethren, 12. 20.
Brukjan, wk. v. to make use of.
E. brook, v.
Bruks, adj. useful.
Brunjo, wk. s. f. a breast-plate.
A. S. byrne.
Brunna, wk. s. tn. a spring, well ;
hence the issue, 5. 29. E. bourn.
Brusts, str. s.f. breast. E. breast.
Bruth-faths, Bruth-fads, str. s.
m. (1) bridegroom, 2. 19, 20;
(2) in phrase sunjus bruth-fadis,
sons of the bride-chamber.
Bruths, str. s.f. bride. E. bride.
Bugjan, wk. v. (pt. t. bauhta), to
buy, sell, II. 15. E. buy.
Daddjan, wk. v. to give suck,
suckle, 13. 17.
Dags, str. s. tn. a day, time, 1. 9,
13; naht jah dag, nahtam jah
dagam, 4. 27 ; 5. 5 ; daga hwam-
meh, daily, 14. 49. E. day.
Daigs, str. s. m. dough. From deig-
an. E. dough.
Dailjan, wk. v. to deal out. E.
deal, v.
Dails, sir. s.f. a deal, portion. E.
deal, sb.
Dal, sir. s. n. a dale, a valley; a
ditch, 12. I. E. dale.
Dalath, adv. down, 9. 9 ; und
dalath, to the bottom, 15. 38.
Dalatha, adv. below, 14. 66.
Daubitha, str. s.f. deafness; hence
dulness, hardness of heart, 3. 5.
Daubs, adj. deaf; hence hardened,
dull, 8.17. E.deaf
Dauhtar, (pi. ace. dauhtruns), str. s.
f a daughter, 5. 23. E. daughter.
Dauhts, str. s.f. a feast.
Dauns, str. s.f. scent, odour.
Daupeins, str. s.f. a dipping, wash-
ing, baptism, 1. 4; 7. 4; 10. 38 ;
11. 30.
Daupidai, 1. 5, pi. o/daupiths, pp.
of Daupjan.
Daupjan, wk. v. to dip, to baptize,
1. 4, 9 ; 10. 38 ; to wash oneself,
7. 4. E. dip.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
6 9
Daupjands, the Baptist, 6. 14, 24;
8. 28.
Daur, str. s. n. a door, 1. 33. E.
door.
Dauro, wk. s.f. a door, 16. 3.
Daursan, v. to dare ; see Gadaur-
san. E. dare.
Dauths, adj. dead, 9. 26. E. dead.
Dauthus, str. s. m. death, 6. 14;
9. I. E. death.
Deds, str. s. f. deed. E. deed.
Deigan, Dig&n, str. v. (daig, digum,
digans), to knead, mould.
Dis-, prefix, apart; also used in-
tensively.
Dis-dailjan, wk.v. to divide, 15.24.
Dis-sitan, str. v. to settle upon, to
seize upon, 16. 8 {where the verb
is separated).
Dis-skreitan, str. v. (skrait, skrit-
um, skritans), to tear (to shreds),
rend, 14. 63.
Dis-skritnan, wk. v. to become
torn to shreds, to be rent apart,
15- 38.
Dis-tairan, str. v. to tear asunder,
burst, 2. 22.
Dis-wilwan, str. v. to plunder com-
pletely, 3. 27.
Diups, adj. deep, 4. 5. E. deep.
Dius, str. s. n. a wild beast, 1. 13.
E. deer.
Diz-uh-than-sat, put for thanuh
dissat, 16. 8. See Thanuh and
Dis-sitan.
Diwan, str. v. (dau, diwum, diwans),
to die. E. die.
Domjan, wk. v. to deem, judge. E.
deem. From Doms.
Doms, str. s. m. judgment. E.doom.
Draban, str. v. See Ga-draban.
Dragan, str. v. (drog, drogum, drag-
ans), to draw. E. draw.
Draggk, Dragk, str. s. n. drink.
Dragkjan, Draggkjan, wk. v. to
give to drink, 15. 36. E. drench.
Draibjan, wk. v. to trouble, vex,
5. 35. From dreiban.
Drauhsna, Drausna, str. s.f. that
which falls, a crumb, fragment,
7. 28. Cf. E. dross, drizzle.
Draus, fell, 7. 25. See Driusan.
Dreiban, str. v. (draib, dribum,
dribans), to drive. E. drive.
Driggkan, Drigkan,s*r.i/. (draggk,
druggkum, druggkans), with ace.
to drink, 2. 16; 10. 38. E. drink.
Driugan, str. v. (drauh, drngum,
drugans), to serve as a soldier,
fight. Scotch dree.
Driusan, str. v. (draus, drusum,
drusans), to fall down, fall upon,
press against, crowd upon, 3. 10.;
5- 33 5 7- 2 5J 9- 20 - Cf - E -
drizzle.
Driuso, wk. s. f. place where the
ground falls, steep slope, 5. 13.
Drobjan, wk. v. to cause trouble,
excite to uproar, 15. 7.
Drunjus, str. s. m. a droning noise,
voice. E. drone.
Drus, str. s. m. fall. From driusan.
Du, prep, with dat. to, towards, for,
1.4; 2. 8; bairan du, to bring to,
IO. 13. Cf. E. to.
Du-at-gaggan, wk. v. (du-atiddja),
to go to, 1. 31; 10. 2.
Du-at-rinnan, str. v. to run to,
10. 17.
Du-at-sniwan, str. v. (snaw, sne-
wum, sniwans), to hasten towards,
run on (shore), 6. 53.
Dubo, wk. s. f. a dove. E. dove.
Dugan, anom. v. to avail. E. do,
in phr. ' that will do.'
Du-ginnan, str. v. (gann, gunnum,
gunnans), to begin, undertake, I.
45 5 2 - 2 3 5 P*- s - dugann, 1. 45 ;
4. I ; pt.pl. dugunnun, 8. II.
Duhwe, wherefore, 1. 8 ; 15. 34.
See Duthe. From du and hwe.
Dulths, str. s. f. {dat. dulthai and
dulth), a feast, 15. 6.
Dumbs, adj. dumb. E. dumb.
Du-rinnan, str. v. (rann, runnum,
runnans), to run to, 9. 15.
Duthe, duththe, duhthe, prep.
{lit. thereto), therefore, I. 38;.. 12.
7o
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
24; duthei ei, in order that, 4. 21.
From du and the.
Dwals, adj. foolish. E. dull.
Ei, conj. (1) that, with indie, and
subj. 1.27; (2) forming relatives ;
as saei, he that, he who, who (in
fern, soei, sei ; in neut. thatei). It
is also used to begin dependent
clauses, in the sense of if, whether,
as in 11. 13; 15.44.
Eis, they, 8. 5. See Is.
Eisarn, str. s. n. iron ; ei. bi fotuns
or ei. ana fotum (niSij), a fetter,
5. 4. E. iron.
Eisarneins, adj. iron, 5. 3.
F.
Fadar, s. m. father. E. father.
Paginon, wk. v. (with dative, or
followed by fram, ana, in), to re-
joice, 14. II. Cf. E.fain.
Fagrs, adj. suitable. E.fair.
Fahan, str. v. (faifah, fahans), to
catch, seize. A. S.fon.
Faheds, Faheths, str. s.f. joy, 4.
16.
Faihu, Faiho, str. s. n. cattle, pro-
perty; hence possessions, 10. 22,
23, 24; a fee, money, 14. II.
E. fee.
Faihu-frikei, wh. s. f. covetous-
ness, 7. 22. See Faihu and
Friks.
Fair-greipan, str. v. (graip, grip-
um, gripans), to grip, catch hold
of, 8. 23 ; pt. s. fairgraip, 5. 41.
Fairgvmi, str. s. n. a mountain, 3.
13. A. S.firgen.
Fairhwus, str. s. m. the world, 8.
36. A.S.feorh, life.
Fairina, str. s. f. charge, accusa-
tion, 15. 26. Cf. A. S. fren,
crime.
Fairneis, a<#. old,a. 21. A.S. fyrn.
Fairra, adv. far, 7. 6. E.far.
Fairrathro, adv. from far, 5. 6 ;
8.3; II- 13.
-faiths, -fold ; as in R- faiths, etc. ;
10. 30. E. -fold.
Fana, wk. s. m. a bit of cloth ; a
patch, 2. 21. E. vane.
Fani, str. s. n. clay, mud. E. fen.
Faran, str. v. (for, forum, farans),
to fare, go. E.fare.
Fareisaius, str. s. m. a Pharisee,
7.1.
Fastan, wh. v. (with ace.) to hold
fast, observe, keep, 7. 9 ; to fast,
2. 18. E.fast.
Fastubni, str. s. n. observance,
fasting, 9. 29.
Fatha, str. s. f. a hedge, 12. 1.
Cf. E. fathom.
Faths, str. s. m. a leader, chief.
Fauho, wk. s.f. a fox.
Faur, prep, with ace. for, before,
to, along, by, 1. 16. A.S. for.
Faura, prep, with dat. before, 1. 2 ;
because of, 2. 4. A. S. fore.
Faura-gaggan, v. anom. to go be-
fore, 11. 9."
Faura-gateihan, str. v. (rath, taih-
ans), to inform beforehand, fore-
tell ; pt. s. I p. fauragataih, 13.
23.
Faura-hah, str. s. n. that which
hangs before, a curtain, a veil, 15.
38.
Faura-standan, str. v. to stand
before ; hence, to rule, govern ;
also, to stand near, 14. 69. See
Standan.
Faura- ta,ni,str.s.n. a sign, wonder,
13. 22.
Faur-bauth, he forbade ; see Faur-
biudan.
Faur-bi-gaggan, v. anom. to go
before, precede, 10. 32 ; 16. 7.
See Gaggan.
Faur-biudan, str. v. to command ;
to forbid, command not to do ;
pt. s. faurbauth, 6. 8 ; 8. 30.
Faur-gaggan, v. anom. to go by,
pass by, II. 20 ; 1 5. 29.
Faurhtei, wk. s.f. fright, fear, 5.
42. E.fright.
6L0SSARIAL INDEX.
7«
Faurhtjan, wh. v. to be frightened,
1 to fear, 5. 36.
Faurhts, adj. fearful, 4. 40 ; faurhts
wairthan, to be afraid, 10. 32.
A.S./yrht.
Faur-lageins, str. s.f. a setting or
laying forth; hence hlaibos faur-
lageinais, shew-bread, 2. 26.
Faur-sniwan, str. v. (snau, snew-
um, sniwans), to hasten before,
anticipate; pt. s. faursnau, 14.
8.
Faur-this, adv. first of all, before-
hand, before, 3. 27 ; 9. II ; faur-
thizei, before that, 14. 72.
Faws, Faus, adj. few {gen. with
pi. nouns), 6. 5 ; 8. 7 ; comp.
fawiza. E.few.
Fera, str. s. f a country, region,
coast, 8. 10.
Fetjan, wh. v. to adorn, deck. E.
Jit, v.
Fidwor, num. four, 1. 13; 1. 3 ;
8. 9 ; 13. 27. E.four.
Fif, num. five. See Fimf.
Figgrs, str. s. m. a finger, 7. 33.
E. finger.
Fijan, Fian, v. to hate.
Frjands, Fiands, s. m. (pres. pt.
0/ fijan, to hate), an enemy, 12.
36. E. fiend.
Fijathwa, Fiathwa, str. s. f.
hatred. E. feud.
Filhan, str. v. (falh, fulhum, ful-
hans), with ace. to hide, conceal ;
to bury. lct\.fela, prov. E.feal,
to hide.
Filigri, Filegri, str. s. n. a hidden
place, a cave, den, 11. 17.
Filleins,a$.made of skin, leathern,
1. 6. Cf. E.fell.
Filu(s), adj. much ; also filu, adv.
much. It is generally used in
neuter filu, and often followed by
gen. case of sb.; 1.45; 3. 7 ; 5.
21. A.S.fela.
Fimf, num. five, 8. 19. E. five.
Finthan, str. v. with ace. (fanih,
funthum, funthans), to find out,
know, 15. 45 ; pt. s. si/bj. funthi,
should know, 5. 43. E.find.
Fiskja, wh. s. m. a fisher, 1. 16.
Fisks, str. s. m. a fish, 8. 7. E.
fish.
Fitan, str. v. (fat, fetum, fitans), to
travail.
Flahta, Flahto, wh. s.f. a plait,
plaiting.
Flauhtjan, wh. v. to vaunt oneself.
Flekan, str. v. (faiflok, flekans), to
lament.
Flodus, str. s.f. flood, river. E.
flood.
Fodjan, wh. v. to feed. E.feed.
Fodr, str. s. n. a sheath. Cf. E.
fur.
Fon, str. s. n. {gen. funins, dat.
funin), fire, 9. 2 2, 47, 49.
Fotu-baurd, str. s. n. a foot-board,
footstool, 12. 36.
Fotus, str. s. m. the foot, 5. 4, 22 ;
gen. pi. fotiwe, 1 2. 36. E. foot.
Fra-, a prefix of verbs, giving an
intensive or destructive force. Cf.
G. ver-\ A. S./or-.
Fra-bugjan, wh. v. to sell, 10. 21;
14.5.
Fra-giban, str. v. to give, grant,
10. 37.
Fraihnan, str. v. (frah, frehum,
fraihans), with an ace. to ask ;
pt. s. frah, 5. 9 ; 8. 23 ; 12. 28 ;
pt. pi. frehun, 4. 10. A. S. frig-
nan.
Fraisan, str. v. with ace. (faifrais,
faifraisum, fraisans), to tempt, 1.
13; 10.2; 12.15. A.S.frdsian.
Fra-itan, str. v. (fret, fretum), to
eat up, devour ; pt. pi. fretun,
4.4. E.fret.
Fraiw, str. s. n. seed, 4. 3, 26, 27.
E.fry, spawn.
Fra-kunnan, v. anom. to despise,
9. 12.
Fra-kwiman, str. v. to expend,
spend, 5. 26.
Fra-kwisteins, str. s. f. waste,
14.4.
72
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Fra-kwistjan, wk. v. to destroy,
I. 24; 8. 35.
Fra-kwistnan, wk. v. to be de-
stroyed, to perish, 2. 22.
Fra-letan, str. v. to let go, release,
let alone, I. 24; pt. s. fralailot,
permitted, I. 34; 5. 37 ; dismissed,
8. 9 ; pt. pi. fralailotun, let down,
2.4.
Fra-lets, str. s. m. remission, for-
giveness, 3. 29.
Fram, prep, with dat. from, 1.9;
by, I. 5 J on account of, I. 44.
E.from.
Framatheis, adj. foreign, strange.
A. S.fremde.
Framis, adv. further, onward, 1.
19. Comp. o/fram.
Frathi, str. s. n. understanding,
mind, 12. 33.
Frathjan, str. v. (froth, frothum,
frathans), to perceive, think, know,
understand, 4. 12; 5. 15; 7. 18;
12. 12; pt. pi. frothun, 9. 32.
Cf. A.S.frdd, wise.
Frauja, wk. s. m. a lord, master, 1.
3; 2. 38. A.S. frea.
Fra-wairpan, str. v. (warp, waurp-
um, waurpans), to cast away,
9.42.
Fra-waurhts, adj. (as sb.) a sinner,
sinful man, 2. 15, 17 ; 14. 41.
Fra-waurhts, str. s. f. evil work-
ing, evil doing, sin, 1. 4; 3. 28 ;
4. 12.
Fra-waurpans, pp. cast, 9. 42.
See Fra-wairpan.
Frehun, asked. See Fraihnan.
Freidjan, wk. v. to spare.
Freis, adj. free. E.free.
Fretun, ate. See Fra-itan.
Frijon, wk. v. to love, 10. 21 ; 12.
Frijonds, str. s. m. a friend ; orig.
pres. pt. of the above. E. friend.
Friks, adj. greedy ; only in faihu-
friks, 7. 22. A.S. free.
Frithon, wk. v. to make peace.
Frius, str. s. n. frost.
Frodaba, adv. wisely, 12. 34.
Frods, Froths, adj. wise. A. S.
frdd. See Frathjan.
Frothun, they understood. See
Frathjan.
Fruma, adj. the first, first (fern.
frumei), 10. 31 ; fruma sabbato,
first day of the week, 15. 42 ;
16. 9. A. S. forma.
Frumist, adv. first, 4. 28 ; 16. 9.
Frumists, superl. adj. first, princi-
pal, chief (men), 6. 21. E. fore-
most.
Frums, str. s. m. beginning.
Fugls, str. s. m. a bird, fowl, 4. 4,
32. E.fowl.
Fula, wk. s. m. a foal, 1 1. 2. E.foal.
Fulgins, adj. hidden, 4. 22. See
Filhan.
Fulla-fahjan, wk. v. to satisfy, 15.
15-
Fulleiths, s. fulness, 4. 28.
Fulljan, wk. v. to fill. E.fill.
Fullnan, wk. v. to become full.
Fullo, wk. s.f. fulness, 2. 21.
Fulls, adj. full ; often followed by
gen. 8. 19. E.full.
Fuls, adj. foul. E.foul.
Funins, Funin. See Fon.
Funthi. See Finthan.
Fynikiska ((pommaaa), adj. Phoe-
nician, 7. 26.
G.
Ga-, a very common prefix to verbs,
sbs., and adjs. ; sometimes found
repeated ; it makes no appreciable
difference to the sense. A.S. ge-,
G. ge-, M. E. y- or i-.
Ga-aistan, wk. v. to reverence, re-
spect, 12. 6.
Ga-aiwiskon, wlc. v. to make
ashamed, to shame; to maltreat,
12.4.
Ga-arman, wk. v. with ace. to have
pity on, pity, 5. 19.
Ga-bairan, str. v. to bear (children);
to compare, 4. 30.
Ga-bairhtjan, wk. v. to make
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
73
bright or clear, to manifest, 4.
22.
Ga-band, he had bound. See Ga-
bindan.
Ga-batnan, wk. v. to profit, boot,
benefit, Jr. II. See Batiza.
Ga-bauan,v.to make or build nests,
to dwell, 4. 32.
Ga-baurjaba, adv. with pleasure,
willingly, gladly, 6. 20; 12. 37;
heartily, gladly {not expressed in
the Greek), 14. 65.
Ga-baurths, str. s.f. birth, 7. 26;
mel ga-baurthais, birthday, 6. 21 ;
native countrv, 6. 4 ; generation,
8.38.
Gabei, wk. s.f. riches, 4. 19.
Gabigs, Gabeigs, adj. rich, 10. 25.
From giban.
Ga-bindan, str. v. to bind, 3. 27 ;
5.3; II. 4; 15.7; pt.s. gaband,
he had bound, 6. 17.
Ga-biugan, s/r. v. to bow, bend ;
eisamam gabuganaim, with bent
irons, 5. 4.
Ga-bleithjan, wk. v. to pity, 9. 22.
Ga-botjan, wk. v. to make use-
ful ; aftra gabotjan, to restore, 9.
12.
Ga-brikan, str. v. to break ; pt. s.
gabrak, 5. 4 ; 8. 6.
Ga-bruka, str. s.f. a broken bit, a
fragment, 8. 8. See above.
Ga-daban, str. v. (gadob) to hap-
pen, befall, 10. 32.
Ga-daila, wh. s. m. a partaker.
Ga-dailjan, wh. v. to divide, 3. 24,
26.
Ga-daursan, anom. v. to dare ;
pt. s. gadaursta, 12. 34.
Ga-dauthnan, wk. v. to die, 5. 39 ;
9. 48; 12. 19.
Ga-dobs, adj. fitting, fit.
Ga-domjan, wk. v. to doom, judge,
condemn, 14. 64.
Ga-draban, str. v. (drof, drobum,
drabans), to hew out, 15. 46.
Ga-dragkjan, Ga-draggkjan,
wk. v. to give to drink, 9. 41.
Ga-drauhts, str. s. m. a soldier,
15. 16. From driugan.
Ga-driusan, str. v. to fall ; pt. s.
gadraus, 4. 4, 7, 8 ; 5. 22.
Gaf, gave. See Giban.
Ga-fahan, str. v. (faifah, faifahum,
fahans) with ace. to catch, take,
apprehend as a criminal, 9. 18.
Ga-fastan, wk. v. to hold fast, keep,
10. 20.
Ga-faurds, str. s. f. chief council,
Sanhedrim, 14. 55; 15. I.
Ga-fraihnan, str. v. to ask, seek,
2. 1; pt. pi. gafrehun, q. v.
Ga-fraujinon, wk. v. to exercise
lordship, 10. 42.
Ga-frelmn, they found out by in-
quiry, they heard (A. V. it was
noised), 2. 1. See Ga-fraihnan.
Ga-fulljan, wk. v. to fill, 15. 36.
Ga-fullnan, wk. v. to become full,
be filled, 4. 37.
Ga-gaggan, v. anom. (pt. t. ga-
iddja), to come together, resort,
6. 30 ; reft. 3. 20 ; to come to
pass, 11. 23.
Ga-ga-mainjan, wk. v. to make
common, defile, 7. 23.
Ga-geigan, wk.v. to win, gain, 8.36.
Gaggan, anom. v. (iddja, iddjedum,
gaggans), to gang, go, go one's
way, I. 38 ; 3. 6 ; 7. 29 ; 10. 21 ;
16. 7 ; gaggan afar, to go after, to
follow, 2. 14; 5. 24 ; 14. 13. E.
gang, go.
Gaggs, str. s. m. a way, a street,
6. 56 ; 11. 4.
Ga-guds, adj. godly, pious, 15. 43.
Ga-haban, wk. v. to have, hold,
possess, 10. 23 ; to lay hold on,
3- 21; 6. 17.
Ga-haihaitun, 14. 11 ; 15. 16.
See Ga-haitan.
Ga-hailjan, wk. v. to heal, 1. 34;
3. 10; 6. 13.
Ga-hailnan, wk. v. to become
whole, to be healed, 5. 29.
Ga-haitan, str. v. (haihait, haihai-
tum, haitans), to call together ;
74
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
pt. pi. gahaihaitun, promised, 14.
II ; called together, 15. 16.
Ga-hausjan, wk. v. to hear, 2. 17 ;
3-8; 5- 27; 7- 25.
Ga-hraineins, str. s. f. cleansing,
1. 44-
Ga-hrainjan, wk. v. to cleanse,
make clean, 1. 40 ; 7. 19.
Ga-hugds, str. s. f. a thought ; the
thought, i.e. the mind, 12. 30.
Ga-hweitjan, wk. v. to whiten,
9- 3-
Ga-hwotjan, wk. v. to rebuke, 9.
25 ; strictly charge, 1. 43.
Gaianna, wk. s. Gehenna, 9. 43,
45, 47. Gk. yievva.
Ga-iddja, gathered themselves to-
gether, 3. 30. See Ga-gaggan.
Gairda, str. s.f. a girdle, 1. 6; 6.
8. Cf. E. gird.
Gairnjart, wk. v. with gen. to yearn
for, long for, desire, wish for, II.
3. E. yearn.
Gaitein, str. s. n. a kid.
Gaits, str. s.f. a goat. E. goat.
Ga-juko, wk. s. f. that which is
yoked or paired ; hence a com-
parison, parable, 3. 23 ; 4. 2; 12. 1.
Ga-kunnan, wk. v. to know, to
consider ; to read, 12. 26.
Ga-kwiman, str. v. to come to-
gether, come ; pt. pi. gakwemun,
2. 2 ; 5. 21 ; 7. I.
Ga-lagjan, wk. v. to lay, lay down,
set, place, make (with double ace),
6.5; n. 7; 12. 36.
Ga-laistjan, wk. v. with ace. to fol-
low, I. 36.
Ga-laith, went. See Galeithan.
Ga-laubeins, str. s.f. belief, faith,
2. 5; 5- 34; JO- 52.
Ga-laubjan, wk. v. to believe, 1.
15; 4. 24; 11. 31.
Ga-laugnjan, wk. v. to be hid, lie
hid, 7. 24.
Ga-lausjan, wk. v. to loose, loosen,
5-4-
Ga-leikan, wk. v. to please, 6. 22 ;
to take pleasure in, I. II.
Ga-leikon, wk. v. to liken, 4. 30.
Ga-leiks, adj. like, 7. 8 ; 14. 70.
Ga-leithan, str. v. (laith, lithans),
to go, come, 1. 20 ; 5. 38; II. 11;
12. 12 ; 14. 10 ; pt. s. galaith, 1.
35; 2. 13; 3. 1; 7. 17.
Galesun; see Ga-lisan.
Ga-lewjan, wk. v. to betray, 3. 19 ;
14. 10.
Galga, wk. s. tn. a cross (lit. gallows),
8. 34; 15. 21. E. gallows.
Ga-lisan, str. v. (las, lesum, lisans),
to collect, gather together, 13. 27;
pt. pi. galesun, 4. 1.
Ga-liug, str. s. n. a lie ; galiug
weitwodjan, to bear false witness,
14. 56.
Ga-liuga-christus, str. s. m. a
false Christ, 13. 22.
Ga-liugan, wk. v. to marry, 6. 17.
Ga-liuga-praufetus, str. s. m. a
false prophet, 13. 22.
Galiuga-weitwods, str. s. m. a
false witness, 10. 19.
Ga-mainjan, wk. v. to make com-
mon, defile, 7. 15, 18, 20.
Ga-mains, adj. common, unclean,
7. 2. A. S. gemcene.
Ga-manwjan, wk. v. to prepare,
make ready, I. 2.
Ga-marzjan, wk. v. to offend ; pass.
to be offended, 4. 1 7.
Ga-matjan, wk. v. to eat, 8. 8.
Ga-maurgjan, wk. v. to curtail, cut
short, 13. 20.
Ga-meljan, wk. v. to write, 1.2.
Ga-motan, anotn. v. (pres. sing.
ga-mot, pi. ga-motum ; pt. t. ga-
inosta, pp. ga-mosts), to have
room, find room, have place,
2. 2.
Ga-motjan, wk. v. to meet, 5. 2 ;
14. 13.
Ga-munan, v. anom. (gamunaida),
to mind, to remember, 8. 18.
Ga-munds, str. s.f. remembrance,
14.9.
Ga-nam, took, 9. 2. See Ga-
niman.
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
75
Ga-nasjan, wk. v. to save, 5. 34 ;
8.35; 10. 52.
Ga-nesi, Ga-nesun; see Ga-
nisan.
Ga-niman, str. v. to take, take
with one, 5. 40; pt. s. ganam, 9. 2.
Ga-nipnan, wk. v. to mourn, to
be sorrowful, 10. 22.
Ga-nisan, str. v. (nas, nesum, ni-
sans), to be saved, 10. 26; to be-
come whole, 5. 23, 28 ; pt. pi.
ganesun, they became whole, 6.
56 ; pt. s. subj. ganesi, should be
saved, 13. 20.
Ga-nithjis, str. s. m. a kinsman,
6.4.
Ga-niutan, str. v. (naut, nutum,
nutans), to net, catch with nets,
catch ; pt. pi. subj. ganuteina,
12. 13.
Ga-nohs, adj. sufficient, numerous,
10. 46. E. enough.
Ga-nuteina ; see Ga-niutan.
Ga-raihts, adj. right, just, righte-
ous, 6. 20.
Gards, str. s. m. a house, 1. 29 ;
3. 20. E.yard.
Ga-rinnan, str. v. (rann, runnum,
runnans), to run together, come
together, 1. 33; pt.pl. garunnun,
M. 33-
Ga-runi, str. s. n. counsel, 3. 6 ;
15. 1.
Ga-saggkw; see Ga-siggkwan.
Ga-saihwan, str. v. to see, behold,
1. 10; 3. II J 5- 15; pt. s. gasahw,
1. 16; 2. 14; ft. pi. gasehwun,
9.8.
Ga-sakan, str. v. to reprove, re-
buke ; pt. s. gasok, 4. 39.
Ga-salbon, wk. v. to salve, anoint,
6. 13; 16. 1.
Ga-sat ; see Ga-sitan.
Ga-satjan, wk. v. to set, place, lay,
found ; restore, 8. 25 ; gasatida
namo, he surnamed, 3. 16.
Ga-sehwun ; see Ga-saihwan.
Ga-siggkwan, str. v. to sink ; pt.
s. gasaggkw, 1. 3a.
Ga-sitan, str. v. to sit down, to sit,
4. I ; pt. s. gasat, II. 7.
Ga-skafts, str. s.f. shaping, forma-
tion, creation, things created, 10. 6.
Ga-skapjan, str. v. to shape, create,
make ; pt. s. gaskop, 13. 19 ; pass.
to be made, 2. 27.
Ga-skeirjan, wk. v. to make sheer
or clear, to interpret, 5. 41 ;
15. 22.
Ga-skohs, adj. shod, 6. 9.
Ga-skop, created, 13. 19. See
Ga-skapjan.
Ga-slawan, wk. v. to be silent,
4- 39- ,. , .
Ga-sleithjan, wk. v. to slight, in-
jure; with sik, to be injured in,
suffer the loss of, 8. 36.
Ga-sok ; see Ga-sakan.
Ga-sothjan, wk. v. to fill, satisfy,
8.4.
Ga-standan, str. v. to stand still,
10. 49. See Ga-stoth.
Ga-staurknan, wk. v. to dry up,
pine away, 9. 18.
Ga-stoth, stood firm, i.e. became
whole, was restored, 3. 5. See
Ga-standan.
Ga-straujan, wk. v. to strew, straw,
furnish, 14. 15.
Gasts, str. s. m. a stranger. E. guest,
Ga-swalt ; see Ga-swiltan.
Ga-swikunthjan, wk. v. to mani-
fest, make known, 3. 12.
Ga-swiltan, str. v. to die, 12. 20;
pt. s. gaswalt, is dead, 5. 35 ;
9. 26.
Ga-swogjan, wk. v. to sigh, 7. 34-
Ga-taihun; see Ga-teihan.
Ga-tairan, str. v. (tar, terum, taur-
ans), lit. to tear ; to break, de-
stroy, 14. 58; 15. 29.
Ga-tamjan, wk. v. to tame, 5. 4.
Ga-tauhun ; see Ga-tiuhan.
Ga-taujan, wk. v. {pt. t. ga-tawida),
to do, make, 1. 17; pt. s. ga-
tawida, 2. 25 ; 5. 1.9 ; 6. 20 ;
pt. pi. gatawidedun, 6. 30; 9.
13-
7*
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Ga-taura, wk. s. m. a tear, rent,
2. 21.
Ga-tawida ; see Ga-taujan.
Ga-teihan, str. v. (taih, taihum,
taihans), to teach, tell, announce
to, make known to ; pt. s. gataih,
16. io ; pt. pi. gataihun, 5. 14;
6. 30.
Ga-tilaba, adv. conveniently, 14.
11.
Ga-tils, adj. convenient, 6. 21.
Ga-timrjan, wk. v. to build, 12. 1 ;
14. 58 ; 15. 29.
Ga-tiuhan, str. v. to draw, lead,
bring, take; pt.pl. gatauhun, 14.
53; 15- 16.
Ga-thahan, wk. v. to be silent,
10. 48.
Ga-thairsan, str. v. (thars, thaur-
sum, thaursans), to wither, 3. 1,3.
Ga-thaursnan, wk. v. to become
dry, to wither away, 4. 6 ; 5. 29 ;
11. 21.
Ga-thiuthjan, wk. v. to bless, 8. 7.
Ga-thlaihan, str. v. to take in the
arms, caress, 10. 16.
Ga-thliuhan, str. v. to flee ; pt. pi.
gathlauhun, 5. 14 ; 14. 50 ; 16. 8.
Ga-thulan, wk. v. to suffer, endure,
5- 26.
Gatwo, wk. s. f. a street. North E.
gate, a street.
Ga-u-hwa-sehwi, whether he saw
ought, 8. 23 ; compounded of ga,
uh, hwa, and saihwan.
Gaumjan, wk. v. with dat. to see,
perceive, behold, observe, 4. 12.
A. S. gyman.
Gaunon, wk. v. to lament.
Gaurs, adj. sorrowful, sad, grieved,
3. 5; 6. 26; 10. 22.
Ga-wagjan, xuk. v. to make to wag,
stir, shake, 13. 25.
Ga-wairpan, str. v. to cast, cast
down, throw down, 9. 18, 45.
See Wairpan.
Ga-wairtheigs, adj. at peace, peace-
ably disposed, 9. 50.
Ga-wairthi, str. s. n. peace, 5. 34.
Ga-waldan, str. v. (waiwald, waT-
waldum, waldans), to rule, bear
rule, 10. 42.
Ga-waliths, pp. chosen, elect, 13.
20. See below.
Ga-waljan, wk. v. to choose, 13.
20.
Ga-wandjan, wk. v. to turn ; refl.
to turn oneself, to be converted,
4. 12.
Ga-wargjan, wk. v. to condemn,
io- 33-
Ga-wasjan, wk. v. to clothe, 1. 6;
5- 15-
Ga-wath. ; see Ga-widan.
Ga-waurkjan, wk. v. to work,
make, 9. 5 ; to appoint, 3. 14.
Gawi, str. s. n. a province, country,
region, 6. 55. Cf. G. gau.
Ga-widan, str. v. (wath, wedum,
widans), to join together; pt. s.
gawath, 10. 9.
Gazds, str. s. m. goad, sting. E.
goad.
Giba, str. s.f. a gift. A. S. gifu.
Giban, str. v. (gaf, gebum, gibans),
to give ; pt. s. gaf, 2. 26 ; 4. 7 ;
pp. fern, gibano, 6. 2. E. give.
Gibla, wk. s. in. gable, pinnacle.
E. gable.
Gild, str. s. n. tribute.
Gildan, str. v. (gald, guldum, guld-
ans), to yield, pay. E. yield.
Gilstr, str. s. n. tribute.
Giltha, str. s. f. a sickle, 4. 29.
Cf. E. geld.
Ginnan, sir. v. (gann, gunnum,
gunnans), to begin. A.S. ginnan.
Giutan, A/r.i/.(gaut,gutum,gutans),
with ace. to pour, 2.22. A.S.
geotan.
Glitmunjan, wk. v. to shine, glitter,
glister, 9. 3. Cf. E. glitter.
Gods, adj. good, 4. 20. E. good.
Goljan, wk. v. with ace. to salute,
greet, 15. 18.
Graban, str. v. (grof, grobum, grab-
ans), to grave, dig. E. grave.
Gramjan, wk. v. to make angry.
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
77
Gras, str. s. n. grass, a blade of
grass, a herb, 4. 28, 32. E. grass.
Gredags, adj. greedy, hungry ; gr.
wisan, to hunger, 2. 25 ; II. 12.
E. greedy.
Gredus, str. s. m. hunger. E.
greed.
Greipan, str. v. (graip, graipum,
gripans), to gripe, grip, seize, lay
hold of, take (prisoner), 14. 44,
48,49,51. E. gripe.
Gretan, Greitan, str. v. (gaigrot,
gretans), to weep, lament, 5. 38 ;
14. 72. Scotch greet.
Grundus, s. ground. E. ground.
Gudja, wk. s. m. a priest, 1. 44.
From guth.
Gulth, str. s. n. gold. E. gold.
Guma, wk. s. m. a man. A. S.
guma, M. E. gome.
Gumeins, adj. manlike, male, 10.
6.
Gunds or Gund, str. s. n. a cancer.
Guth, str. s. m. God, 1. I ; 5. 7.
E. God.
H.
Habaith, neut. of habaiths, pp. of
haban ; h. wesi, might be had in
readiness, 3. 9. See below.
Haban, wk. v. (habaida), to have,
1. 22; 7. 3 ; to hold, esteem,
11. 32 ; to be able to do, 14. 8 ;
to be about to, 10. 32 ; ubil
habands ( = Lat. male habentes),
ill, 1. 34; pt. s. habaida, 7. 25.
E. have.
Hafjan, str. v. (hof, hofum, hafans),
to heave, heave up, carry, bear,
2. 3. E. heave.
Haftjan, wk. v. to cleave to.
Hafts, adj. joined. Cf. E. haft.
Hahan, str. v. (haihah, haihans),
to hang, leave in suspense. A. S.
h6n.
Haidus, str. s. m. manner, way.
A. S. had ; E. -hood, suffix.
Haifsts, str. s. f. strife.
Haihait ; see Haitan.
Haihs, adj. half-blind, with one eye,
9. 47. Cf. Lat. ccecus.
Hailjan, wk. v. to heal, 3. 2, 15.
E. heal.
Hails, adj. hale, whole, 5. 34 ; be
hale, i. e. hail ! 15. 18. E.
whole, hale.
Haimothli, str. s. n. a homestead,
landed possession, 10. 29, 30.
Haims, str. s. f. {pi. haimos), a
village, country place, I. 38; 6.
56. E. home.
Hairda, str. s.f. a herd, flock, 5.
11. E. herd = flock.
Hairdeis, str. s. m. a herd, or shep-
herd. E. herd = shepherd.
Hairto, wk. s. n. the heart, 2. 6.
E. heart.
Hairus, str. s. tn. a sword, 14. 43.
A. S. heoru.
Haitan, str. v. (haihait, haihaitum,
haitans), to name, call ; pt. s. hai-
hait, called, I. 20 ; commanded,
5. 43 ; haitada, pr. s. (as fut. s.)
pass, shall be called, 11. 17. A. S.
hdtan.
Haithi, str. s.f. heath. E. heath.
Haithiwisks, adj. of or belonging
to a heath; wild, 1. 6.
Haith.no, wk.s.f. a heathen woman,
a Gentile woman, 7. 26. E. heathen.
Haiti, str. s.f. a command, hest.
From haitan.
Hakuls, str. s. m. a cloak. A. S.
hacele.
Halba, str. s.f. the half.
Halbs, adj. half, 6. 23. E. half.
Haldan, str. v. (perf. haihald, pi.
haihaldum, pp. haldans), to hold,
keep ; hence to feed, keep sheep
or swine, 5. 11. E. hold.
Haldis, adv. comp. rather. Icel.
heldr.
Halja, str. s.f. hell. E. hell.
Halks, adj. needy, poor.
Hallus, str. s. m. a rock, stone.
Hals, str. s. m. neck. A. S. heals.
Hals-agga(?), wk. s. m. the neck,
a proposed reading in 9 . 4 2 . [The
78
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
MS. has bals-agga; but cf. A. S.
heals, neck.]
Halts, adj. halt, lame, 9. 45. E.
halt.
Hamfs, or Hanfs, adj. one-handed,
maimed, 9. 43. [Whether m or
n is the right letter, seems uncer-
tain.]
Hamon, wk. v. to clothe.
Hana, wk. s. m. a cock, 14. 68-
A. S. hana.
Handugei, wk. s. f. handiness,
cleverness, wisdom, 6. 2.
Handugs, adj. clever. E. handy.
Handus, str. s.f. the hand, I. 3 1.
E. hand.
Handu-waurhts, adj. wrought by
hand, 14. 58.
Hansa, str. s.f. a company, a band
of men, 15. 16. Cf. Hanse-towns.
Hardu-hairtei, wk. s. f. hard-
hear tedness, hardness of heart, 10.
5-
Hardus, adj. hard. E. hard.
Harjis, str. s. m. an army. A. S.
here.
Hatan, Hatjan, wk. v. to hate. E.
hate.
Hatis, str. s. n. hate.
Haubith (gen. haubidis), str. s. n.
the head, 6. 16, 24; h. afmaitan,
to behead, 6. 16, 27; h. waihstins,
corner-stone, 12. to. E. head.
Hauhei, wk. s.f. height.
Hauheins, str. s. f glory.
Hauh-hairtei, s. pride, 7. 22. See
Hauhs and Hairto.
Hauhista, highest, 5. 7. See
Hauhs.
Hauhisti, str. s.n. the highest point,
highest height, II. 10.
Hauhitha, str. s. f. height. E.
height.
Hauhjan, wk. v. to exalt, lift on
high, glorify, magnify, 2. 12.
Hauhs, adj. (comp. hauhiza, sup.
hauhista), high, 9. 2 ; superl. 5. 7.
E. high.
Haunjan, wk. v. to humiliate.
Hauns, adj. base, contemptible.
A. S. hean.
Haurds, str. s.f. a door. Cf. E.
hurdle.
Hauri, str. s. n. a glowing coal. Cf.
E. hearth.
Haurn, str. s. n. a horn. E. horn.
Hausjan, Hausjon, wk. v. with
ace. to hear, 4. 16; with dat. to
listen to, 6. 11; 7. 14; 9. 7;
with prep, fram, 3. 21. E. hear.
Hawi, str. s. n. grass. E. hay.
Hazjan, wk. v. to praise. A. S.
herian.
Heito, wk. s. f. heat, fever. E.
heat.
Heiwa-frauja, wk. s. m. a master
of a house, 14. 14.
Her, adv. here, hither, 6. 3. E.
here.
Hethjo, wk. s.f. a chamber.
Hidre, adv. hither, 1 1.3. E. hither.
Hilms, str. s. m. a helmet. E.
helm.
Hilpan, str. v. with gen. (halp,
hulpum, hulpans), to help, 9. 22.
E. help.
Himins, str. s. m. heaven, 1. 10,
II. Cf. G. himmel.
Hindana, prep, with gen. behind,
on that side of, beyond, 3. 8. Cf.
E. he-hind.
Hindar, prep, with dat. and ace. on
that side of, beyond, 5. I ; behind,
8-33-
Hindumists.ctt//. superl. hindmost.
E. hindmost.
Hiri, interj. come here, 10. 21.
See below.
Hirjats, interj. come here, you two!
1. 17; dual form of Mm.
Hirjith, interj. come ye here! 12.
7; plural form of hiri.
His, pron. of which the fern, is hija,
neut. hita, this ; — und hita, till
this time, till now, 13. 19.
Hita, neut. o/his, this, 13. 19. See
His. E. it, A. S. hit.
Hiufan, str. v. (hauf, hufum, hufans),
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
79
to sigh, mourn, lament. A. S.
heofan.
Hiuhma, wk. s. m. a crowd.
Hiwi, str. s. n. hue, appearance. E.
hue.
Hlahjan, str. v. (hloh, hlohum,
hlahans), to laugh. E. laugh.
Hlaifs, Hlaibs, str. s. m. a loaf,
bread, 2. 26 ; 7. 5. E. loaf.
Hlains, str. s. m. a hill.
Hlaiw, str. s. n. a grave, tomb, 6.
20; 15.46; 16.2. A. S. hldw.
Hlamma, str. s.f. a snare.
Hlas, adj. joyful, merry.
Hlathan, str. v. (hloth, hlothum,
hlathans), to load. E. lade.
Hlaupan, str. v. (hlaihlaup), to
run, leap. E. leap.
Hlauts, str. s. m. a lot, 15. 24. E.
lot.
Hleibjan, wk. v. to assist.
Hleiduma, adj. left, on the left
hand, 10. 37.
Hleithra, str. s. f. hut, tent. Cf.
E. lid 7
Hlifan, str. v. (hlaf, hlefum, hluf-
ans), to steal, IO. 19.
Hliftus, str. s. m. a thief. Cf. E.
shop-lifter.
Hlija, w k. s. m. tent, tabernacle, 9. 5.
Hliuma, wk. s. m. hearing, 7. 35.
Cf. E. listen.
Hlutrs, adj. pure. A. S. hlutor.
Hnaiws, adj. lowly. From hneiwan.
Hnaskwus, adj. soft, tender. E.
nesh.
Hneiwan, str. v. (hnaiw, hniwum,
hniwans), to bend down, sink.
A. S. hnigan.
Hniupan, str. v. (hnaup, hnupum,
hnupans), to break.
Hnuto, wk. s. f. a thorn, sting.
Hoha, wk. s. m. a plough.
Holon, wk.v. to treat with violence.
Horinassus, str. s. m. whoredom,
adultery, 7. 21.
Horinon, wk. v. to commit adultery,
10. 11. See below.
Horinondei, adulterous (pt, pres.
f em. from horinon, v. to commit
adultery), 8. 38.
Hors, str. s. m. a whoremonger.
Cf. E. whore.
Hrains, adj. pure, clean, 1. 41. Cf.
E. rinse.
Hramjan, wk. v. to crucify.
Hrisjan, wk. v. to shake. A. S.
hrysian.
Hropjan, wk. v. to call out, cry
out, I. 26 ; 3. II. A. S. hropan.
Hrot, str. s. n. a roof, 2. 4.
Hrotheigs, adj. triumphant. Cf.
A. S. hrofSor, joy.
Hrngga, str. s. f. a staff, 6. 8. E.
rung.
Hrukjan, wk.v. to crow (as a cock),
14. 72. Cf. E. rook.
Huggrjan, wk. v. to hunger. E.
hunger.
Hugjan, wk. v. to think, imagine,
trust, 10. 24. A. S. hogian.
Hugs, str. s. m. thought. A. S.
hyge.
Huhrus, str. s. m. hunger.
Hulistr, str. s. n. a veil. E. holster.
Huljan, wk. v. with ace. to hide,
cover, 14. 65. Cf. prov. E. hull,
husk.
Hulths, adj. gracious. A. S. hold.
Hun, indef. suffix, as in ains-hun,
any one, hwas-hun, any one.
Hund, s. n. {pi. hunda), a hundred,
only used in pi. preceded by twa,
etc.; — twa h., 200 ; — thrija h.,
300; — fimf hunda, 500; — niun
hunda, 900; 14.5. E.hund-red.
Hunda-faths, str.s.m. a centurion,
15- 39-
Hunds, str. s. m. a dog, hound, 7.
27. A. S. hund, E. hound.
Hunsl, str. s. n. a sacrifice, 9. 49.
E. housel.
Hunsljan, wk. v. to offer.
Hunths, str. s. f. captivity. From
hinthan.
Hups, str. s. m. the hip, loins, 1.6.
E. hip.
Hus, str. s. n. house. E. house.
8o
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Huzd, str. s. n. a treasure, 10. 31.
£. hoard.
HW,
Hwa, what. See Hwas.
Hwadre, adv. whither.
Hwairban, str. v. (hwarb, hwaurb-
um, hwaurbans), to walk. A. S.
hweorfan.
Hwairnei, wk. s. f. skull, 15. 22.
[Unless we consider hwarneins as
an adj., * belonging to a skull.']
Hwaiteis, s/r.s.ra. wheat. E. wheat.
Hwaiwa, adv. how, 2. 26; 3. 23.
See Hwe.
Hwan, adv. when ; hwan lang mel,
for how long a time, 9. 21 ; nibai
hwan, lest at any time, 4. 12;
hwan filu, how much, 3. 8. E.
when.
Hwanzuh, ace. of Hwazuh, q. v.
Hwapjan, wh. v. to quench.
Hwar, adv. where, 14. 12.
Hwarbon, wk. v. to go about,
walk, 1. 16; II. 27. Allied to
hwairban.
Hwarjis, pron. who ? which ? (out
of many), 9. 34; 12. 23.
Hwarjizuh, adj. every, each one,
15. 24. From hwarjis and uh.
Hwas, pron. inter, and rel. (hwo,
hwa), who, what, which, what
sort of, I. 24 ; any one, anything,
2. 9; 7. 16. E. who.
Hwas-hun, pron. any one ; ni hw.,
no one, 10. 18, 29.
Hwassei, wk. s. f sharpness.
Hwathar, adj. whether (of two),
which (of two), 2. 9. E. whether.
Hwathjan, wk.v. to foam, 9. 18, 20.
Hwatho, wh. s.f. foam.
Hwathro, adv. from whence,
whence, 6. 2 ; 8. 4. E. whither.
Hwazuh, pron. indef. (fern, hwo'h,
neut. hwa'h), each, every ; from
hwas and uh, 9. 49 ; twans hwanz-
uh, two and two, 6. 7.
Hwe, adv. how, instr. case o/hwas,
4. 30. Cf. E. how.
Hweila, str. s.f. a while, a time, a
season, 2. 19; time, hour, 15. 25.
E. while.
Hweila-hwairbs, adj. enduring
only for a while, 4. 17.
Hweits, adj. white, 9. 3. E. white.
Hwileiks, Hweleiks, what sort of.
E. which.
Hwis, gen. m. n. o/hwas, 6. 24.
Hwo, fern, of hwas, who, what,
1. 27 ; 3. 33.
Hwota, str. s.f. a threat.
Hwotjan, wk. v. to threaten, re-
buke, charge, 10. 48.
Iairusaulymim, Jerusalem, 7. 1.
Ibai, conj. perhaps ; answers in
questions to Greek firj, 2. 19 ; lest,
2. 21. E. if.
Ibns, adj. even. E. even.
Ibuks, adj. backwards.
Iddjedun, they went, 5. 24. See
Gaggan. A. S. eode, pi. eodon.
Idreiga, str. s.f. repentance, 1. 4.
Idreigon, wk. v. (with and without
sik), to repent, 1. 15 ; 6. 12.
Id-weitjan, wk. v. to reproach,
revile, 15. 32. A. S. ed-witan.
Iftuma, adj. the one after, the fol-
lowing ; iftumin daga, on the
morrow, 11. 12.
Igkwis, dat. and ace. dual, you
two, I. 17; 10. 36. A.S. inc.
Ija, her, acc.f. of is, 1. 30 ; 5. 33.
Ijos, them, acc.fem.pl. o/is, 16. 8.
Ik, pron. I, 1. 2 ; 6. 16. E. 7.
Im, to them ; from is, I. 31.
Im, am. See "Wisan.
Imma, him, pron. dat. of is, I. 5.
In, prep, (with dat. and ace.) in, I.
2 ; towards, into, to, 5. 1 ; with
gen. on account of, about, through,
by ; — in this, (or in-uh-this), on
this account ; — in thizei, because,
for the reason that. It is a com-
mon prefix. E. in.
Ilia, him; ace. of is, I. IO, 26, 43.
GLOSS ART AL INDEX.
81
In-feinan, wk. v. to pity, have
compassion on, I. 41 ; 8. 2.
In-maideins, str. s. f. a change,
exchange, 8. 37.
In-maidjan, wk. v. to change, ex-
change, transfigure, 9. 2.
Inn, adv. in, 1. 19.
Innana, adv. within ; prep, with
gen. within, inside, 15. 16.
Innathro, adv. within, 7. 21, 23.
Inn at-gaggan, str. v. to enter,
enter into, go into, 4. 19 ; 5. 39.
See Gaggan.
Inn gaggan, wk. v. to go in, enter ;
i. framis, to go on, I. 19.
Innuma, adj. comp. inner.
Ins, them ; pi. ace. m. of is, I. 20;
2. 13 ; 6. 7.
In-saian, sir. v. to sow in, 4. 15.
In-saihwan, str. v. (sahw, sehwum,
saihwans), to look upon, regard,
behold, 10. 21 ; to look round,
9.8.
In-sailjan, wk. v. to let down,
lower with cords, 2. 4.
In-sandjan, wk. v. to send, I. 2 ;
3. 14: 5. 12.
Inuh, Inu, prep, without, 4. 34;
from in, jollowed by the enclitic u
or uh inuh ; this, therefore, 10. 7.
In-wagjan, wk. v. to stir up, 15. 1 1.
In-weitan, str. v. to worship,
reverence, salute ; pt. s. inwait,
5. 6 ; pt. pi. inwitun, 9. 15.
In-widan, str. v. to reject, frus-
trate, 7.9; to deny, refuse, 8. 34 ;
14. 72.
In-wisan, v. anom. to be present ;
hence to be present and gone again,
to be just past, 16. I.
Is, pron. he, 1.8; fern, si ; neut. ita,
4. 37 ; gen. m. is, 1. 7, 16 ; gen.
f. izos, of her, 1.31; dat. m.
imma, 1. 5; dat. f izai, 5. 34;
ace. m. iua, I. 10; ace. f. ija,
I. 30; gen. pi. ize, I. 23; dat.
pi. im, I. 31 ; ace. pi. m. ins, I.
20.
Is, thou art, I. II, 24. See Wisan.
1st, is, 7. 2. See "Wisan. E. is.
Ita, it ; nom. n. of is, 4. 37.
Itan, str. v. (at, etum, itans), to
eat. E. eat.
Ith, conj. but, 1. 8, 41 ; except, 4.
34-
Iudaieis, Jews, 7. 3.
Iup, adv. upwards. E. up.
Iupa, adv. above.
Iupathro, adv. from above, 15. 38.
Izai, to her, dat.f. of is, 5. 34.
Ize, of them, gen. pi. m. of is, I.
23; 5- 37-
Izos, of her ; gen. fern. sing, of is,
1. 31.
Izwar, pos. pron. your, 2. 8; 6.
11; 7.9.
Izwis, to you, you ; dat. and ace.
pi. o/thu, 1.8; 4. II.
J, the fifteenth letter of the alphabet.
As a numeral it means 60 ; 4. 8.
Ja, adv. yes. E. yea.
Jabai, conj. if, even if, although, 1.
40 ; 4. 26.
Jan, conj. and, 1.4; even, also, 2.
28.
Jai, adv. yes, verily, 7. 28.
Jainar, adv. there, 1. 35 ; 5. 1 1.
See Jains.
Jaind, Jaindre, adv. there. Cf.
E. yonder.
Jains, pron. dem. that, (fern, jaina,
neut. jainata), 1. 9; 4.35. E.yon.
Jainth.ro, adv. thence, 1. 19 ; 6. 1 ;
10. I.
Jer, str. s. n. a year, 5. 25. E.
year.
Jiuka, str. s. f strife.
Jiukan, wk. v. to contend, fight.
Ju, adv. now, already, 8. 2. A.S.
iu.
Jugga-lauths, str. s. m. a young
lad, a young man, 14. 51 ; 16. 5.
From juggs and liudan.
Juggs, adj. young, new, 2. 22. E.
young.
Juk, str. s. n. a yoke. E. yoke.
82
GLOSS ARIAL INDEX.
Junda, str. s.f. youth, 10. 20.
Jus, pron. ye, 7. 1 1 ; pi. of thu,
thou ; gen. izwara ; dat. and ace.
izwis, 1. 8 ; 4. 11. E. ye.
Juthan, adv. already, 1 . 45 ; 4.
37; II. 11 ; 13. 28; 15. 42.
Kaisar, str. s. tn. Caesar, 12. 14.
Kaisara-gild, str. s. n. tribute-
money, 12. 14.
Kalbo, wk. s.f. a calf. E. calf.
Kalds, adj. cold. E. cold.
Kalkinassus, str. s. tn. fornica-
tion, adultery, 7. 21.
Kalkjo, wk. s.f. a harlot.
Kann, I know, I can; from kun-
nau, I. 24. E. can.
Kannjan, wk. v. to make known.
E. ken.
Kant, for Kannt, thou knowest,
10. 19. See Kunnan.
Kara, str. s. f. care ; hence kar' ist,
with ace. of pers. and gen. of
thing, it concerns ; used without
ist, 4. 38 ; ni kara thuk, there is
no care to thee, thou carest not,
12. 1 4. E. care.
Karkara, str. s. f. a prison, 6. 1 7,
27. Lat. career.
Karon, wk. v. to be concerned
about.
Kas. str. s. n. a vessel, pot (for
holding liquids, etc.), 3. 27, (A. V.
goods); 11. 16. Icel. ker.
Kasja, wk. s. tn. a potter.
Katils, str. s. tn. a kettle, vessel
for water, 7. 4. E. kettle.
Kaupatjan, wk. v. to strike with
the palm of the hand, to cuff, 14.
Kaupon, wk. v. to traffic, trade.
E. cheapen.
Kaurban, Corban, 7. 11.
Kauritha, str. s.f. a burden.
Kaurjan, wk. v. to lade, burden.
Kaurn, str. s. n. corn. E. corn.
Kaurno, str. s. X corn, a grain of
corn, 4. 28, 31.
Kaurus, adj. burdensome.
Kausjan, wk. v. to prove, test ; to
taste, 9. 1. Causal o/kiusan.
Keinan, wk. v. to spring up, grow
(of plants), 4. 27.
Kelikn, str. s. n. a tower, 12. 1 ;
upper room, 14. 15.
Kilthei, wk. s. f. womb. Cf. E.
child.
Kindins, str. s. tn. a governor.
Kinnus, str. s. /. the cheek. Cf.
E. chin.
Kintus, str. s. tn. a farthing.
Kiusan, str. v. (kaus, kusum, kus-
ans), to choose. A. S. ceosan.
Klismjan, wk. v. to tinkle.
Klismo, wk. s.f. a cymbal.
Kniu, str. s. n. {gen. kniwis), the
knee, 1. 40; 15. 19. E. knee.
Knoda, or Knods, s. /. a race,
stock.
Knussjan, wk. v. to kneel, 10. 17;
k. kniwam, to kneel, I. 40.
Kriustan, str. v. (^kraust, krustum,
krustans), to gnash with the teeth,
grind the teeth, 9. 18. E. crush.
Krusts, str. s.f. gnashing of teeth.
Kukjan, wk. v. with dat. to kiss,
14. 44, 45.
Kuni, sir. s. n. kin, race, genera-
tion, tribe, 8. 12 ; 9. 19. E. kin.
Kunnan, anotn. v. (Jirst perf. a*
pres. kann, pi. kunnum ; pt. t.
kuntha ; pp. kunths), to know, 4.
11; pt. pi. kunthedun, 1. 34.
A. S. cunnan.
Kunthi, str. s. n. knowledge.
Kunths, pp. as adj. known. A. S.
cud.
Kustus, str. s. m. a proof, test. Cf.
A. S. cottian, to tempt.
KW.
Kwainon, wk. v. to mourn, weep,
lament, 1 6. lO. E. whine.
Kwairnus, str. s. a mill-stone.
E. quern. See Asilu-kwairnus.
Kwairrus, adj. gentle.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
83
Kwam, came ; from kwiman ; 1. 9;
7-3'-
Kwast, thou sayest, 12. 32. See
Kwithan.
Kwath, said, 4. 30; 7. 6. See
Kwithan. E. quoth.
Kwemun, came, 1. 29; 4. 4. See
Kwiman.
Kwethun, spoke, told, 1. 30; 4.
38. See Kwithan.
Kwens, Kweins, str. s. f. a wo-
man, a wife, 6. 17; 10. 1. E.
queen, quean.
Kwiman, str. v. (kwam, kwemum,
kwumans), to come, arrive, 1.7;
pt. pi. kwemun, 1. 29; 4. 4.
E. come.
Kwineins, adj. female, 10. 6.
Kwino, wk. s.f. a woman, 5. 25.
Kwistj an, wk. v. to destroy. A.S.
cwysan.
Kwithan, sir. v. (kwath, kwethum,
kwithans), to say, speak, call,
name ; pt. s. kwath, 4. 30 ; pt. pi.
kwethun, I. 30; 4. 38 ; ubil kwi-
than, to speak evil of one, 7. 10.
Kwithiduh, /or kwithith uh, and
say ye, 16. 7.
Kwithu-hafta, wk. s. f. a woman
with child, 13. 17.
Kwithus, str. s. m. womb. A. S.
cwid.
Kwius, adj. quick, living, alive, 12.
27. Cf. E. quick.
Kwrammitha, str. s.f. moisture.
Kwums, str. s. m. coming. From
kwiman.
L.
L, the twelfth letter of the Gothic
alphabet. As a numeral, it sig-
nifies 30 ; 4. 8.
Lag, lay ; from ligan, 1. 30; 2. 4.
Laggs, adj. long {only used with
ref. to time) ; swa lagga hweila
swe, so long as, 2. 19 ; hwan lagg
mel, how long, 9. 21. E. long.
Lagjan, wk. v. to lay, set, place,
5. 2 3; 6 - 5 6 ; lo - l6 ; J 5- 1 9»"
lagjan ana, to lay upon, 5. 23.
E. lay.
Laian, str. v. to revile. A. S. lean.
Laiba, str. s. f. a thing left, a leav-
ing, remnant, 8. 8. Cf. E. leave.
Laigaion, s. a legion (from Gk.
\€J(WV), 5. 9, 15.
Laikan, str. v. (lailaik, laikans), to
leap for joy.
Laiks, str. s. m. sport, dance. A. S.
lac.
Lailot, he permitted, suffered, 5. 19.
See Letan.
Laisareis, str. s. m. a teacher,
master, 4. 38.
Laiseins, str. s. f. a teaching, doc-
trine, 1. 22 ; 4. 2.
Laisjan, wk. v. to teach, 1. 21.
A. S. Idran.
Laistjan, wk. v. to follow (with
ace. ; also with prep, afar), 1. 18 ;
8.34;9-38.
Laists, str. s. m. a track, footstep.
E. last, sb.
Lamb, str. s. n. a lamb. E. lamb.
Land, str. s. n. land, field. E.
land.
Lasiws, adj. weak.
Lathon, wk. v. to call, invite, 2. 17.
A. S. ladian.
Latjan, wk. v. to tarry.
Lats, adj. slothful. E. late.
Laubjan, wk. v. to believe. Cf.
E. be-lieve.
Laufs, Laubs, str. s. m. a leaf, 11.
13; pi. laubos, 13. 28. E. leaf.
Laugnjan, wk. v. to lie, deny, 14.
70. From liugan.
Lauhatjan, wk. v. to shine as
lightning.
Lauhmuni, Lauhmoni, str. s.f.
lightning.
Laun, str. s. n. pay, reward. A. S.
lean.
Laus, adj. empty. E. loose.
Laus-handja, adj. empty-handed,
12. 3.
Lausjan, wk. v. to make of none
effect.
G 2
8 4
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Laus-kwithrs, adj. with empty
stomach, fasting, 8. 3.
Leihts, adj. light (not heavy).
Leihwan, str. v. (laihw), to lend.
Cf E. lend, loan.
Leik, str. s. n. the body, 5.29; a
dead body, carcase, 15. 43; flesh,
10. 8 ; 13. 20. A. S. lie.
Leikan, wit. v. to please. E. like.
Leikeis, str. s. m. a physician. See
Lekeis.
Lein, str. s. n. linen, 14. 51, 52 ;
15. 46. Lat. linum.
Leisan, str. v. (lais, lisum, lisans), to
learn. Cf. E. learn.
Leithan, str. v. (laith, lithum, Iith-
ans), to go. A. S. li<)an.
Leithus, str. s. in. strong drink.
Leitils, adj. {pomp, minniza, super I.
minnists), little, I. 19; 9. 42;
14. 70. E. little.
Lekeis, Leikeis, str.s.m. a leech,
physician, 2. 17; 5. 26. E. leech.
Letan, str. v. (also spelt leitan, 15.
9, etc. ; pt. t. lailot, pp. letans), to
let, permit, suffer, allow, 5. 19.
E. let.
Lew, sir. s. n. occasion, oppor-
tunity.
Lewjan, wk. v. to betray, 14. 42,44.
Libains, str. s.f. life, 4. 19 ; 9. 43 ;
10. 1 7. See below.
Liban, wk. v. to live, 5. 23. E.
live.
Ligan, str. v. (lag, legum, ligans),
to lie, 1. 30 ; 2. 4. E. lie.
Ligrs, str. s. m. a couch, bed, 4.
21 ; 7. 4, 30. E. lair.
Lisan, str. v. (las, lesum, lisans), to
gather. Prov. E. lease, to glean.
Lists, str. s.f. craftiness. A. S. /;'.<;/.
Lita, str. s.f. a prayer.
Lithus, sir. s. m. limb, member.
A. S. lid.
Liubs, adj. dear, beloved, 1. 11 ;
9. 7; 12. 6. E. lief.
Liudan, str. v. (iauth, ludum, lud-
ans), to grow, spring up. 4. 27.
Liugan, str. v. (laug, lugum, lug-
ans), to lie, tell falsehoods. E.
lie.
Liugan, %vk. v. (pt. t. liugaida), to
marry, to take a wife, IO. II ;
12. 25; to be married, take a
husband, IO. 12.
Liugn, str. s.n. a lie.
Liuhath, sir. s. n. (gen. liuhadis),
light, 13. 24 ; 14. 54. E. light.
Liuta, wk. s. m. a dissembler, hy-
pocrite, 7. 6.
Liutei, wk. s. f. deceit, pretence,
hypocrisy, 7. 22; 1 2. 15.
Liuts, adj. deceitful. A. S. lytig.
Liuthon, wk. v. to sing.
Lofa, wk. s. m. the flat or palm of
the hand; — lofam slahan, to strike
with the palms of the hands, 14.
65. Prov. E. loof, palm of the
hand.
Lubains, str. s.f. hope.
Ludja, str. s.f. the face.
Luftus, str. s. m. the air. Cf. E.
a -loft.
Lukarn, str. s. n. a light, candle
(Lat. lucerna), 4. 21.
Lukarna-statha,«>£. s.rn. a candle-
stick, 4. 21. From lukatn and
staths.
Lun, str. s. n. a ransom, 10. 45.
Lustus, str. s. m. lust, desire, 4. 19.
E lust.
Luton, wk. v. to betray ; see Liuts.
M.
Magan, v. anom. (old pt. t. as pres.
mag, pt. t. mahta, pp. mahts), to
be able, 1. 40; niHguts-u, are ye
able, 10. 38. And see Mahta.
E. may.
Magaths, sir. s.f. a maid. E. maid.
Magus, sir. s. m. a boy. A. S.
tnaga.
Mahta, pt. s. might, could, 1. 45 ;
mahtedun, pt. pi. were able, 3.
20 ; see Magan. E. might.
Mahteigs, adj. mighty, great, pos-
sible, 9. 23; 10. 27. E.mighty.
Mahts, adj. possible.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
»5
Mahts, str. s. f. might, power,
strength, virtue, 5. 30; miracle,
6. 2. E. might.
Maidjan, wk. v. to change, falsify.
Maihstus, str. s. m. a dunghill.
Mail, sir. s. n. a spot. E. mole.
Maimaitun ; see Maitan.
Mais, {fxaWov), adv. more, rather,
5. 26 ; — mais thamma, so much
the more, 7. 36 ; — filaus mais, or
filu mais, much more ; thanamais,
more still, longer, 5. 35 ; rather,
15. II. Cf. E. more.
Maists, superl. adj. the greatest,
4. 32 ; 9. 34 ; as a sb. a chief
man, man of rank, 6. 21. E.
most.
Maitan, str. v. (maimait, maitans),
to cut ; pt. pi. maimaitun, 11. 8.
Maithms, str. s. m. a gift, Corban,
7. II. A. S. mddm.
Maiza, comp. adj. (/. maizei, n.
niaizo), greater, 12. 31. E.
more.
Malan, v. to grind. Cf. E. meal.
Malma, wk. s. m. sand.
Malo, wk. s. f a moth.
Mammo, wk. s.f. flesh.
Managei, wk. s.f. a crowd, multi-
tude, the people, 2. 4; 3. 7.
Managiza, compar. adj. more, 12.
33. See Manags.
Manags, adj. much, many, 1. 34;
12. 26. E. many.
Mana-seths, Mana-seds, str. s.f.
a multitude ; the world, 14. 9.
Lit. man-seed, i. e. generation of
men.
Man-leika, wk. s. m. the image or
likeness (of a man), 12. 16.
Manna, wk. s. m. a man, 1. 17 ;
gen. s. mans, 2. 10 ; 7. 15 ; dat. s.
mann, 7- J 5 > acc ' s - mannan, 7.
15 ; gen.pl. manne, 7. 7. E. man.
Manna-hun, adj. any one; ni m.,
no one, 1. 44 ; 8. 26; 9. 9. From
manna, with suffix hun.
Manwjan, wk. v. to prepare, 1. 3,
19; 10. 40; 14. 12.
Manwus, adj. ready, 14. 15.
Marei, wk. s. f. the sea, 1. 16 ;
3. 7 ; hindar marein, across the
sea, 5. 1. E. mere.
Marka, sir. s. f. border-country,
coast, 5. 17 ; 7. 31. E. march-es.
Marzjan, wk. v. to offend, hinder,
cause to stumble, 9. 43. Cf. E.
mar.
Matha, wk. s. m. a worm, 9. 44,
46, 48. Cf. E. moth.
Mathl, str. s. n. a market, market-
place, 7. 4.
Mathljan, wk. v. to speak. A. S.
madelian.
Mati-balgs, str. s. m. a meat-bag,
wallet, scrip, 6. 8. From mats
and balgs.
Matjan, wk. v. to eat, 1.6; 2. 26 ;
14. 14. From mats.
Mats, str. s. m. {pi. mateis), meat,
food, 7. 19. E. meat.
Maudjan, wk. v. to remind.
Maujai, dat. of Mawi, q. v.
Maurgins, sir. s. m. morn, morn-
ing, 11. 20; 15. I. E. morn.
Maurnan, wk. v. to mourn, be
grieved about. E. mourn.
Maurthr, str. s. n. a murder, 7. 21 ;
15. 7. E. murder.
Maurthrjan, wk. v. to murder, kill,
10. 19.
Mawi, str. s.f. {gen. maujos, dat.
maujai), a maid, maiden, damsel,
5.42; 6.22. A Hied to magus.
Mawilo, wk. s.f. a young maiden,
damsel, 5. 41.
Megs, str. s. m. a son-in-law.
Meina, gen. of ik, 8. 35. A.S. min.
Meins, poss. pron. my, I. 2, II.
E. mine, my.
Meki, str. s. n. a sword.
Mel, str. s. n. time, 1. 15 ; 9. 21 ;
season, 11. 13; mela gabaurthais,
birthday, 6. 21. E. meal, a time
for food.
Mela, wk. s. m. a measure, a bushel,
4. 21.
Meljan, wk. v. to write, 10. 4.
86
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Mena, wk. s. m. the moon, 13. 24.
E. moon.
Menoths, str. s. m. a month. E.
month.
Meritha, str. s.f. fame, report, 1.
28. A. S. mcerd, mcerdu.
Merjan, wk. v. to proclaim, an-
nounce, preach, 6. 1 2 ; noise
abroad, I. 4.
Mes, str. s. n. a table, II. 15; a
dish, charger, 6. 25; dal uf mesa,
a ditch or receptacle for a wine-
vat, 12. 1. A. S. myse.
Midjis, adj. middle, midst, 9. 36.
E. mid.
Midjun-gards, sir. s. m. the earth.
A. S. middangeard.
Miduma, str. s.f. the midst, 3. 3.
Mik, me ; ace. o/ik, 1. 40. E. me.
Mikiljan, wk. v. to magnify, extol,
glorify, praise. 2. 12.
Mikils, adj. mickle, great, much,
I. 26. E. mickle.
Milds, adj. mild. E. mild.
Milhma, wk. s. m. 3 cloud, 9. 7 ;
13. 26 ; 14. 62.
Milith, str. s. n. honey, I. 6. Lat.
mel.
Miluks, str. s.f. milk. E. milk.
Mimz, str. s. n. flesh, meat.
Minnists, superl. adj. most minute,
smallest, least, 4. 31.
Minniza, compar. adj. smaller, less,
15. 40. From mins.
Mins, adv. less.
Mis, to me, me, dat. o/ik, I. 1 7 ;
5-7-
Missa-deds, str. s. f. a misdeed,
sin, 11. 25. E. misdeed.
Missa leiks, adj. various, divers,
1. 34. A. S. mislic.
Misso, adv. reciprocally, gen. after
a pers. pron. one another, I. 27;
4.41.
Mitan, str. v. (pt. t. mat, pi. metum,
meitum, pp. mitans), to mete,
measure, 4. 24. E. mete.
Mitaths, Mitads, str. s.f. a mea-
sure, a bushel, 4. 24.
Mith, prep, with dat. with, amongst,
together with, through, by, near,
in reply to, 1. 13; mith tweihnaim
markom, amid the two boundaries,
in the midst of the region, 7. 31.
A. S. mid.
Mith anakumbjan, wk. v. to lie
down together with, to recline at
meat with, 2. 15.
Mith iddjedun, they went with,
15. 41. See Gaggan.
Mith-sokjan, wk. v. to dispute,
8. 11.
Mith-thanei, conj. when, whilst,
4. 4.
Mith ushramjan, wk. v. to crucify
with, 15. 32.
Miton, wk. v. to measure ; hence,
to weigh a matter, consider, reason
upon, ponder, 2. 8.
Mitons, str. s.f. a measuring; hence,
a re.isoning, consideration, thought,
7. 21.
Mizdo, wk. s.f. meed, reward, 9. 41.
E. meed.
Mods, str. s. m. moodiness, anger,
wrath, 3. 5. E. mood.
Mota, str. s.f. toll, custom, 2. 14.
Motan, anom. v. {pt. t. mosta), to
be obliged to. A. S. mdtan.
Motareis, str. s. m. a receiver of
custom, toll-taker, publican, 2. 15.
From mota.
Motjan, wk. v. to meet. E. meet.
Mulda, sir. s.f. dust, 6. 1 1. E.
mould.
Munan, wk. v. to consider, intend.
Muns, str. s. m. mind, meaning. Cf.
E. mind.
Munths, str. s. m. mouth. E.
mouth.
Nadrs, str. s. m. adder, viper. E.
adder (for nadder).
Nagljan, wk. v. to nail. Cf. E.
nail.
ISfahan*, str. v. (pres. nah, pi. t.
GLOSSARTAL INDEX.
8 7
nahta, pp. nauhts), to suffice.
Hence ganohs, adj.
Nahta-mats, str. s. m. (lit. night-
meat), an evening meal, supper,
6. 21.
Nahts, str. s.f. night, 4. 27. E.
night.
Naiteins, str. s.f. blasphemy, 2. 7;
3. 28. Cf. A. S. ncetan, to vex.
Naiw, was angry, pt. s. from an
infin. neiwan, 6. 19. [The read-
ing is very doubtful, and little
more than conjectural.]
Nakwaths, adj. {gen. nakwadis),
naked, 14. 51. E. naked.
Namnjan, wk. v. to name.
Bfamo, wk. s. n. (pi. namna, gen.
namne, dat. namnam), name, 5. 9.
E. name.
Nanthjan, wk. v. to dare. A. S.
nedan.
Nasjan, wk. v. to save, 3. 4. A. S.
nerian. From nisan.
Nati, str. s. n. a net, 1. 16, 18.
E. net.
Natjan, wk. v. to wet. Cf. Du.
nat, G. nass, wet.
Naudi-bandi, str. s.f. a fetter, 5.
3, 4. From nauths and bindan.
Nauh, adv. still, yet ; ni nauh, or
nauh ni, not yet, not as yet, 4. 40.
Cf. G. noch.
Nauh-thanuh, Nauh.-th.an, adv.
still, yet, 5. 35.
Naus, sir. s. m. a corpse. Icel.
mar.
Nauths, str. s.f. need. E. need.
Ne, adv. no. E. no.
Nehwa, adv. near, 2. 4* 11. 1;
13. 28. E. nigh.
Nehwundja, wk. s. m. a neighbour,
12. 31.
Nei, adv. not.
Neith, str.s. n. envy, 15. 10. A. S.
nid.
Nemeina, that they might take,
6. 8. See Niman.
Nethla, str. s.f. a needle, 10. 25.
E. needle.
Ni, conj. nor, not, 1. 7, 22; 4. 27.
A. S. ne.
Niba, Nibai, conj. if not, except,
2. 7, 26: 3. 27; 7. 3; 8. 14.
From ni and ibai.
Nidwa, str. s.f. rust.
Nih, conj. nor, not even, 2. 2.
From ni and uh ; cf. Lat. ne-c.
See also Niu.
Niman, str. v. (nam, nemum, nim-
aus), to take, take away, receive,
2. 9; 7. 27; 8. 6; pt. pi. subj.
nemeina, 6. 8. A. S. niman.
Nimuh, and take, 2. 10. See
Niman and TJh.
Nisan, str. v. (nas, nesum, nisans),
to heal. A. S. nesan, ge-nesan.
Nist, is not, 6. 3 ; 9. 40. From
ni and ist.
Nithan, sir. v. (pt. t. nath), to help.
Nithjis, str. s. m. a kinsman ; fern.
nithjo.
Niu, adv. and not, 4. 21 ; niu aiw,
never, 2. 25. From ni and uh;
put for ni-uh. See Nih.
Niuhseins, str. s.f. a visitation.
Niujis, adj. new, I. 27. E. new.
Niun, num. nine. E. nine.
Niunda, ord. adj. the ninth, 15. 33.
Niutan, str. v. (naut, mitum, nut-
ans), to enjoy. A. S. neotan.
Nota, wk. s. m. stern, hinder part
of a ship, 4. 38.
Nu, adv. now, 10. 30; 15. 32.
A. S. nu.
Nuh, adv. then (in asking questions),
1 2. 9. From nu and uh.
Nuta, wk. s. m. a fisher, catcher of
fishes, 1. 17. From niutan.
O, inter j. ohl 9. 19; 15. 29.
Ogan, str. v. (pres. og, pt. t. ohta,
pi. ohtedum), to fear, 5. 15 ; 9.
32 ; refl. to fear, to be afraid of,
4. 41. From agan.
Ogjan, wk. v. to terrify.
Osanna, Hosannah, 11. 9.
88
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Paida (xirajv), str. s. f. a coat,
outer body-garment, 6. 9. Cf. E.
pea-jacket.
Paraskaiwe (irapaaKevrj), s. the
day of the preparation, 15. 42.
Paska (jraaxa), the Passover, 14.
12.
Paurpura, s. purple, 15. 17, 20.
Gk. Trop<f>vpa.
Plats, str. s. tn. a patch, new piece
put in, 2. 21. E. patch (for
platch).
Plinsjan, wk. v. to dance, 6. 22.
Praitoriaun, s. Pretorium, 15. 16.
Praggan, v. to press.
Praufetes, s. prophet, 6. 15; 1 1.
32.
Praufetjan, wk. v. to prophesy, 7.
6; 14. 65.
Praufetus, s. m. a prophet, 1.2;
6. 4; 8. 28.
Puggs, str. s. n. a purse. A. S.
pung.
Pund, str. s. n. a pound. E.
pound; from Lat. pondus.
B, the 1 8th letter of the Gothic
alphabet. As a numeral, it means
100; 4. 8 ; 10. 30.
Hagin, str. s. n. counsel. E. reyn-
in reyn-ard.
Ragineis, str. s. m. a counsellor,
15. 43. From ragin.
Rahnjan, wk. v. to reckon, count
up ; to number, 15. 28.
Baidjan, wk. v. to appoint.
Baihtaba, adv. rightly ; straight-
way, 7. 35.
Baihtis, conj. {always used in the
position of an enclitic), however,
indeed, 4 4.
Baihts, adj. right, direct, straight,
1.3. E. right.
Baips, str. s. m. a rope. A. S. rap.
Baisjan, wk. v. to raise. E.
raise.
Bakjan, wk. v. to reach. Cf. E.
rack, to torture.
Bann, he ran, 5. 6. See Binnan.
Basta, str. s.f. rest; a stage, mile.
E. rest.
Baths, adj. ready, easy.
Baubon, wk. v. to rob. Cf. E. rob.
Bauds, adj. red. E. red.
Baupjan, wk. v. to pluck, 2. 23.
E. reap.
Baus, sir. s. n. a reed, 15. 19. G.
rohr.
Bazda, str. s.f. a speech, a tongue,
language, 14. 70. A. S. reord.
Bazn, str. s. n. a house, II. 17. E.
ran- in ransack.
Bedan, str. v. to counsel. E. read.
Beiki, str. s. n. power, authority.
A.S. rice.
Beikinon, wk. v. to rule, govern,
10. 42. From reiks.
Beikista, superl. adj. most power-
ful ; hence as s. a prince, 3. 22.
Beiks, adj. powerful. A. S. rice.
Beiran, wk. v. to tremble, 5. 33.
Beiro, wk. s.f a trembling, 16. 8.
Beisan*, str. v. to rise ; see ur-
reisan.
Bign, str. s. n. rain. E. rain.
Bignjan, v. to rain.
Bikan, str. v. (rak, rekum, rikans),
to collect.
Bikwis, Bikwiz, str. s. n. dark-
ness, 15. 33. Perhaps allied to
E. reek.
Bikwizjan, wk. v. to become dark,
to be darkened, 13. 24.
Bimis, str. s. n. rest, quietness.
Binnan, str. v. (pt. t. rann, pi.
ruunum, pp. runnans), to iuii, 5.
6 ; — samath rinnan, to run together,
9. 25. E. run.
Biurs, adj. mortal, temporal.
Bodjan, wk. v. to speak, I. 34. See
Bedan.
Bohsns, sir. s.f. a hall, 14. 66.
Bums, sir. s. m. room, place. E.
room.
Bums, adj. roomy, broad.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
8 9
Runa, sir. s.f. a rune, a mystery,
4. 11. E. rune.
Runs, str. s. m. a running, an issue,
5. 25. From rinnan.
S.
Sa, pron. he, the one, I. 7; def
art. the, I. 11 ; 2. 4 ; fern, so, 1.
27. A. S. se.
Sabbato, s. m. indecl. the Sabbath,
2. 27, 28; sabbato-dags, the Sab-
bath-day, 1. 21.
Sabbatus, str. s. m. (gen. pi. sab-
bate, -o ; dat. -um, -ini), the Sab-
bath, 2. 24; 3. 4; 16. 1.
Sada, pi. n. of Saths, q. v.
Saei, pron. (put for sa ei), who,
lit. he who, 1. 2.
Saggkwjan, wk. v. to make to
sink.
Sab. {for sa-uh;/era. soh, neut. that-
uh), and this, this, that. See Sa.
Sa-bwazuh, pron. each one, every
one ; sa-hwazuh saei, whosoever,
9. 37- From sa, hwas, and uh.
Sai, adv. see! lo ! behold! 1. 2,
12 ; 2. 24.
Saian, Saijan, str. v. (pt. t. saiso,
pp. saians), to sow, 4. 3, 4, 14.
E. sow.
Saibs, num. six, 9. 2. E. six.
Saibsta, adj. (fern, saihsto), the
sixth, 15. 33.
Saibwan, str. v. (sahw, sehwum,
saihwans), to see, 1. 44 ; 5. 6;
s. faura, to beware of, 12. 38. E.
see.
Sail*, a cord, rope. A. S. sal.
Sainjan, wk. v. to tarry. Cf. A.S.
sane, slow.
Sair, str. s. n. sorrow, travail. A.S.
sdr, E. sore.
Saiwala, str. s.f. the soul, the life,
3. 4. E. soul.
Saiws, str. s. m. sea, lake. E. sea.
Sakan, str. v. (sok, sakans), to re-
buke, 10. 13 A.S. sacan.
Sakjo, wk.s.f. strife. A.S. sacu,
E. sake.
Sakuls, adj. quarrelsome.
Salbon, wk. v. to anoint, 14. 8.
Cf. E. salve.
Saldra, str. s. f. jesting.
Salitbwa, str. s. f. (only in pi.
salithwos), a mansion; guest-cham-
ber, 14. 14. From saijan.
Saijan, wk. v. to dwell, abide, re-
main, 6. 10.
Saijan, wk. v. to bring an offering,
to sacrifice, 14. 12. E. sell.
Salt, str. s. n. salt, 9. 49, 50. E.
salt.
Saltan, v. to salt, 9. 49.
Sama, Sa sama, adj. the same,
10. 10 j in comp. together. E.
same.
Sama-leiko, adv. equally, likewise,
4. 16 ; 12. 21 ; 15. 31.
Sama-leiks, adj. alike, agreeing
together, 14. 56, 59. From sama
and leiks.
Samana, adv. together, in the same
place, 12. 28. Cf. A.S. ait-samne,
together.
Samatb, adv. to the same place,
together ; — s. rinnan, to run to-
gether, 9. 25. A. S. samod.
Samjan, wk. v. to please. Cf. E.
seem.
Sandjan, wk. v. to send, 9. 37.
E. send.
Sarwa, n. pi. arms, armour. A. S.
searu.
Sat, sat, 11. 2. See. Sitan.
Satbs, adj. (gen. sadis), full; s.
wairthan, to be filled, to be full,
7. 27; 8 8. E. sad.
Satjan, wk. v. to set, place, put,
4. 21. E. set.
Saubts, str. s.f. sickness, disease,
1. 34. A.S. sunt.
Sauil, str. s. n. the sun, 1. 32 ; 13.
24. Cf. Lat. sol.
Sauls, sir. s.f. a pillar. A.S. syll.
Saurga, sir. s.f. sorrow, grief, care,
4. 19. E. sorrow.
Sautbs, str. s. m. a sacrifice, burnt-
offering, 12. 33. Cf. E. seethe.
9 o
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Seins, poss. pron. his, theirs, their,
I. 5 ; 6. 21. A. S. sin.
Seithu, adv. late. A. S. si6, adv.
Sels, adj. good. A. S. sel.
Setun, sat, 3. 32. See Sitan.
Si, pers. pron. f. she, 6. 24; 7. 28.
From is.
Sibja, str. s.f. relationship.
Sibun, num. seven, 8. 5 ; 12. 20;
16. 9. E. seven.
Sidus, str. s. m. a custom, manner.
A. S. sidu.
Sifan, wk. v. to rejoice.
Siggkwan, str. v. (saggkw,suggkw-
ans), to sink. E. sink.
Siggwan, str. v. (faggw, suggwum,
suggwans), to sing. E. sing.
Sigis, str. s. n. victory. A. S. sige.
Sigljo, wk. s. n. seal. Lat. sig-
illum.
Sijai, may be, 1. 27; sijau, I may
be, 9. 19; sijuth, ye are, 4. 40;
7.18. See Wisan. A. S. sy.
Sik, ace. of reflex, pron. self, him-
self, herself, itself, 1. 15 ; 3.
20.
Silba, pron. self, 1. 44; fern, silbo,
4. 28. E. self.
Silda-leikjan, wk. v. to wonder,
1. 27 ; 5 20.
Silda-leiks, adj. wonderful, 1 2. II.
Cf. E. seld-om.
Silubr, str. s. n. silver, money. E.
silver.
Simle, adv. once, at one time. A. S.
simle.
Sinap, str. s. n. mustard, 4. 31.
Gk. oivam.
Sind, they are, 4. 15. See Wisan.
A. S. sind.
Sineigs, adj. old. Cf. E. sene-
schal; Lat. sen-ex.
Sinista, sup. adj. the eldest, an
elder, 7. 3; 8. 31. As if from
. sins*.
Sinteino, adv. ever, always, con-
tinually, 5. 5; 14. 7.
Sinteins, adj. daily.
Sinths, str. s. m. a journey ; hence
a time ; in the phrases ainamma
sintha,once; twaimsintham, twice,
etc. ; also antharamma sintha, a
second time, 14. 72. A. S. sid.
Siponeis, str. s. m. a pupil, disciple,
2. 15.
Sis, dat. of reflex, pron. to himself,
to themselves, 2.6; 3. 14; mith
sis, among themselves, 1. 27.
Sitan, str. v. (sat, setum, sitans),
to sit, 2. 6 ; pt. s. sat, 11. 2 ; pt.
pi. setun, 3. 32. E. sit.
Sitls, str. s. m. a settle, seat, 1 1. 15.
E. settle.
Siujan, wit. v. to sew, 2. 21. E.
sew.
Siukan, str. v. (sauk, sukum, suk-
ans), to be sick, to be ill.
Siuks, adj. sick, ill, diseased, 6. 5 ;
— siuks wisan, to be sick, fall
sick. E. sick.
Shins, str. s. f. sight.
Skaban, str. v. (skof, skobum.skab-
ans), to shave. E. shave.
Skadus, str. s. m. a shade, shadow,
4. 32. E. shade.
Skaftjan, wk. v. to shape.
Skaidan, str. v. {pt. t. skaiskaid),
to divide, sever, separate, put a-
sunder, 10. 9. E. shed.
Skal, shall, must, 8. 31. See Skulan.
E. thall.
Skalja, str. s.f. a scale, tile. E.
scale.
Skalks, str. s. m. a servant, 10. 44.
E. -schal in sene-schal.
Skaman, wk. v. refl. with gen. to
be ashamed of, be ashamed, 8. 38.
E. shame.
Skanda, str. s.f. shame.
Skapjan, str. v. (skop, skopum,
skapans), to shape. E. shape.
Skathis, str. s. n. scathe, wrong.
E. scathe.
Skathjan, str. v. (skoth, skothum,
skathans), to do scathe to.
Skathuls, adj. hurtful, harmful.
Skattja, wk. s. m. a money-changer,
11. 15-
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
91
Skatts, str. s. m. money, 12. 15.
A. S. sceat.
Skauda-raips, str. s. m. a shoe-
latchet (lit. a shoe-rope), I. 7.
Skauns, adj. beautiful. Cf. E.
sheen.
Skauts, str. s. m. the hem of a
garment, 6. 56. A. S. sceat.
Skawjan, wk. v. to look at, see.
E. show.
Skeinan, str. s. (skain, skinum,
skinans), to shine. E. shine.
Skeirs, adj. sheer, clear, evident.
E. sheer.
Skewjan, wk. v. to go along, 2.
23.
Skildus, str. s. m. a shield. E.
shield.
Skilja, wk. s. m. a butcher.
Skilliggs, str. s. m. a shilling. E.
shilling.
Skip, str. s. n. a ship, boat, I. 19.
E. ship.
Skiuban, str. v. (skauf, skubum,
skubans), to shove. E. shove.
Skohs, str. s. m. a shoe, sandal, I. 7.
E. shoe.
Skreitan, str. v. (skrait, skritum,
skritans), to tear.
Skuft, str. s. n. the hair of the
head.
Skuggwa, wk. s. m. a mirror.
Skula, wk. s. m. a debtor; liable
to, in danger of, 3. 29 ; skula
wisan, to be a debtor, to deserve,
14. 64. From skulan.
Skulan, v. anom. (pres. skal, pt. t.
skulda, pp. skulds), to owe ; pt. s.
skal, must, 8. 31. A. S. scidan;
whence E. shall, shotdd.
Skulds, adj. owing; skulds wisan,
to be lawful, 3. 5 ; ni skuld ist,
is not lawful to do, 2. 24.
Skura, str. s. f. a shower; skura
windi?, a storm of wind, 4. 37.
E. shower.
Slahan, str. v. (sloh, slahans), to
str ke, beat, hit, 15. 19; — lofam
slahan, to strike with the palms of
the hands, to buffet, 14. 65 ; pt. s.
sloh, 14. 47. E. slay.
Slahs, str. s. m. (pi. slaheis), a stroke,
stripe ; a plague, 5. 29.
Slaihts, adj. smooth. E. slight.
Slauhts, str. s. f. slaughter. E.
slaught-er.
Slawan, wk. v. to be silent, be still,
9- 34-
Sleithis, adj. perilous.
Slepan, str. v. (J>t. t. saislep or
saizlep, pi. saislepum, pp. slepans),
to sleep, fall asleep, 4. 27. E.
sleep.
Sleps, str. s. m. sleep.
Slindan, str. s. (sland, slundum,
slundans), to gulp down.
Sliupan, str. v. (slaup, slupum,
slupans), to slip into, creep. E.
slip.
Sloh, he struck, 14. 47. See
Slahan.
Smairthr, str. s. n. fatness.
Smakka, wk. s. m. a fig, 11. 13.
Smakka-bagms, str. s. m. a fig-
tree, 11. 13, 20.
Smals, adj. small. E. small.
Smarna, str. s.f. dung.
Smeitan, str. v. (smait, smitum,
smitans), to smear. E. smite.
Smitha, wk. s. m. a smith. E.
smith.
Smyrn, str. s. n. myrrh ; — mith
Smyrna, mingled with myrrh, 15.
23. Gk. afivppov.
Snaga, wk. s. m. a garment, 2. 21.
Snaiws, str. s. m. snow, 9. 3.
E. snow.
Snarpjan, wk. v. to bite, nip.
Sneithan, str. v. (snaith, snithum,
snithans), to cut. A. S. snidan.
Sniumjan, wk. v. to hasten.
Sniumundo, adv. with haste,
quickly, 6. 25 ; compar. sniumun-
dos, with more haste. See above.
Sniwan, str. v. (snau, snewum,
sniwans), to go, proceed, come.
Cf. A. S. sneome, quickly.
Snorjo, wk. s.f. a basket.
9 2
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Snutrs, adj. wise. A. S. snotor.
So, fern, of Sa, she, this, the, 1.27,
3 1 -
Sokjan, wk. v. to question with,
dispute, 1. 27; 9. 10; to seek,
desire, long for, I. 37; 3. 32 ; 8.
II ; samana sokjan, to talk to-
gether, discuss, 12. 28. E. seek.
Sokun, they rebuked, 10. 13. See
Sakan.
Spaikulatur, s. a spy, 'executioner'
(A. V.), 6. 27. Lat. speculator.
Sparwa, wk. s. m. a sparrow. E.
sparwa.
Spaurds, str. s. f. a stadium, fur-
long.
Speds, Speids, Spids, adj. late ;
compar. spediza, si/perl, spedists,
spedu mists, last, 12. 6, 22. Cf.
G. spat.
Spewan, Speiwan, str. v. (pt. t.
spaiw, pi. spiwum, pp. spiwans),
to spit, 7.33; 8.23; 10.34; *4-
65. E. spew.
Spilda, str. s.f. a writing-tablet.
Spill, str. s. n. a fable, tale. E.
spell.
Spillon, wk. v. to tell a tale, nar-
rate, 5. 16; 9. 9.
Spinnan, str. v. (spann, spunnum,
spunnans), to spin. E. spin.
Sprauto, adv. quickly, soon, 9. 39.
Spyreida, wk. s. m a large basket,
8. 8, 20. Gk. anvpis.
Stabs, str. s. m. a letter. E. staff.
Stadim, dat. pi. of Staths, q. v.
Staiga, str. s.f. a path, way, I. 3.
E. sty.
Stainahs, adj. stony, 4. 5, 16.
Stains, str. s. m. a stone, rock, 5. 5 ;
12. 10; stainam wairpan, to stone,
12. 4. E. stone.
Stairno, wk. s. f. a star, 13. 25.
E. star.
Staks, str. s. m. a mark, stigma.
Stamms, adj. stammering, with an
impediment in the speech, 7. 32.
Cf. E. stamm-er.
Standan, str. v. (stoth, stothans),
to stand, stand firm, 11. 5. E.
stand.
Staths, str. s. m. (pi. stadeis), a
stead, a place, I. 35 ; 15. 22 ; 16.
6; land, shore, 4. I; jainis stadis,
I the other side (of the lake), 4. 35.
v E. stead.
Staua, str. s.f. judgment, 6. 11.
Staua, wk. s. m. a judge.
Stautan, str. v. (staistaut, stautans),
to strike, smite. Cf. E. stutt-er.
Steigan, str. v. (staig, stigum, stig-
ans), to mount up, ascend. A. S.
stigan.
Stibna, sir. s.f. a voice, 1.3. A. S.
stefn.
Stiggkwan, str. v. to strike, smite,
thrust. Cf. E. stink.
Stikls, str. s. m. a cup, 7. 4 ; 9.
41 ; 10. 38.
Stiks, str. s. m. a point, moment.
Stilan, str. v. (stal, stelum, stulans),
to steal. E. steal.
Stiur, str. s. m. a calf. E. steer.
Stiurjan, wk. v. to steer, govern.
E. steer.
Stojan, wk. v. to judge. From
staua.
Stols, str. s. m. seat. E. stool.
Straujan, wk. v. to strew, straw,
11. 8; to prepare, 14. 15. E.
strew.
Striks, str. s. m. a stroke, mark.
Cf. E. stroke.
Stubjus, str. s. m. dust. Cf. G.
slaub.
Suljo, str. s. f. a sole of a shoe,
sandal, 6. 9.
Sums, adj. (/. suma, n. sumata),
some one, some, 2. 6; one, 14.
43 ; sums — sumsuh, the one — the
other, 12. 5; pi. sumai, some,
certain, 7. I. E. some.
Sundro, adv. asunder, alone, pri-
vately, 4. 10; 7. 33. A. S. sundor.
Sunja, str. s.f. the sooth, the truth,
5. 33; bi sunjai, truly, verily, 12.
14, 32. Cf. E. sooth.
Sunjeins, adj. true, 12. 14.
GL0SSAR1AL INDEX.
93
Sunna, wk. s. m. the sun, 4. 6 ;
16. 2. E. sun. (Also found in
the form sunno, wk. s. f.)
Suns, adv. soon, at once, immedi-
ately, 1. 9 ; 4. 5. E, soon.
Suns-aiw, adv. soon, immediately,
straightway, 3. 6; 5. 29; 6. 25;
9. 15 ; 15. 1.
Sunus, str. s. m. a son, 1. 1 ; 2. 10.
E. son.
Supon, wk. v. to season, 9. 50.
Suthjon, wk. v. to itch.
Suts, adj. sweet ; hence patient,
peaceable ; compar. sutiza, more
tolerable, 6. II. E. sweet.
Swa, conj. so, just so, also, 2. 6 ;
4. 40. E. so.
Swaei, conj. so that, that, 1. 27;
2. 27. For swa ei.
Swaihro, wk. s. f. mother-in-law,
I. 30. A. S. sweger, fern, of
sweor.
Swairban, str. v. (swarf, swaurbum,
swaurbans), to wipe.
Swa-leiks, adj. such, 4. 33 ; 6. 2 ;
7. 8 ; 9. 3. E. such.
Swamms, Swams, str. s. m. a
sponge, 15. 36. A. S. swamm.
Swaran, str. v. (swor, sworum,
swarans), to swear, 6. 23. E.
swear.
Sware, Swarei, adv. without a
cause, in vain, 7. 7.
Swarts, adj. black. E. swart.
Swaswe, adv. as, just as, as it were,
in like manner as, 1. 22 ; so that,
4. 32. From swa and swe.
Swe, adv. as, just as, 1. 2, 10;
4. 27.
Swegnjan, w&. v. to rejoice, tri-
umph.
Sweiban, str. v. (pt. t. swaif), to
cease.
Swein, str. s. n. a swine, pig, 5. II.
E. twine.
Sweran, wk. v. to honour, esteem,
glorify, 7. 6, 10. From swers.
Swers, adj. heavy, grave, honoured.
A. S. swdr, G. schwer.
Swes, adj. one's own, 15. 20. A.S.
swces.
Swe-thauh, conj. although, how-
ever, but, 9. 12.
Swibls, str. s. m. brimstone. A. S.
swefel.
Swigljon, wk. v. to pipe.
Swikns, adj. pure, innocent.
Swi-kunthaba, adv. openly, mani-
festly, 8. 32.
Swi-kunths, adj. manifest, evident,
spread abroad, 6. 14; swikunths
wairthan, to come abroad, 4. 22.
From swe and kunnan.
Swiltan, str. v. (swalt, swultum,
swultans), to die. A.S. sweltan.
Swinths, adj. strong, healthy,
whole, 2. 17 ; 3. 27 ; comp. swin-
thoza, mightier, 1. 7. A.S. swid.
Swistar, str. s. f. a sister, 3. 32 ;
6. 3 ; 10. 30. E. sister.
Swogatjan, wk. v. to sigh, groan.
Swor, he swore, 6. 23. See
Swaran.
Synagoga-faths, str. s. m. the ruler
of a synagogue, 5. 2 2.
Synagoge 5 s.f. a synagogue, I. 21 ;
6. 2. Gk. avvayooyrj.
Ta-, Te-.
Tagl, str. s. n. hair, 1.6. E. tail.
Tagr, str. s. n. a tear, 9. 24. E.
tear.
Tahjan, wk. v. to tear, rend, 1. 26;
9. 20.
Taibswa, wk. s.f. the right hand,
16. 5-
Taihsws, adj. the right, on the right
hand, 14. 47; fern, taihswo, the
right hand, 10. 37. Cf. Lat.
dex-ter.
Taihun, num. ten, 10. 41. E. ten.
Taihun-taihund, a hundred.
Tainknjan, wk. v. to betoken, point
out, shew, 14. 15. See below.
Taikns, str. s.f. a token, sign, wonder,
miracle, 8. 11; 13. 22. E. token.
Tainjo, wk. s.f. a basket of twigs,
a light basket. 8. 19. From tains.
94
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Tains, str. s. m. a twig. A. S. tan.
Tairan, str. v. (tar, terum, taurans),
to tear. E. tear.
Talzjan, wk. v. to teach, instruct.
Tamjan, wk. v. to tame. E. tame.
Tandjan, wk. v. to kindle. Cf. E.
tinder.
Tamjan, wk. v. to hide. Cf. E.
tarn-ish.
Taui, sir. s. n. a work, deed.
Taujan, wk. v. to do, make, 2. 24 ;
pt. t. tawida, did, 3. 8. E. taw,
to dress leather.
Tekan, Teikan, sir. v. (taitok,
tekans), to touch, 5. 30. E. take.
Tewa, sir. s. f. order, arrangement.
TH.
Thadei, adv. where, wheresoever,
whither, 6. 55 ; 14. 14 ; thishwad-
uh thadei, whithersoever, 6. 56.
Thagkjan, thaggkjan, wk. v.
(thata, thahts), to think, consider,
reason, 2. 6 ; 8. 16. E. think.
Thagks, str. s. m. thank. E. thank.
Thahan, wk. v. to be silent, be still,
hold one's peace, I. 25 ; 3.4 ; 14.
61. Cf. Lat. tacere.
Thaho, wk. s. f. clay. A.S. p6.
Thai, the ; pi. nom. masc. of art.
sa, so, thata, 1. 22, 36; dat.
thaim, 1. 27. E. they, dat. them.
Thaih, whoever, put for thai uh, 3.
11.
Thairh,/>r*/>. by, title ; through, by
means of, 2. 23 ; 6. 2. E. through.
Thairh-bairan, str. v. to carry
through, 11. 16.
Thairh-gaggan, anom. v. to go
through, come through, 2. 23.
Thairko, wk. s. n. a hole through
anything, the eye of a needle, 10.
25-
Thairsan, sir. v. (thars, thaursum,
thaursans), to dry up, thirst. E.
thirs-t.
Thamma, to the, from the, dat. s.
m. and n. of the art. sa, so, thata,
I. 10, 20. A.S. 6dm.
Thammei, whom, which, dat. s. of
sa-ei, 2. 4. Put for thamma ei.
Than, adv. then, thereupon, 1. 28;
2. 20; but, and, however, 1. 6;
4. 5. E. then.
Thana, the; ace. s. m. of sa, 1. 19.
A. S. done.
Thana-mais, adv. more, still, fur-
ther, 5. 35; 14.63.
Thana-seiths, adv. more, longer ;
ni thana-seiths, no longer, 9. 8 ;
10. 8 ; 11. 14.
Thannu, conj. therefore, then, 4.
4 1 ; for, 14. 6.
Thans, the, those, them ; ace. m.
pi. o/sa, 1. 19.
Th.anuh, conj. then, 4. 29 ; 10. 13 ;
therefore, 1 2. 6.
Thanzei, rel. pron. whom, which,
ace. pi. m. of sa-ei, 2. 26 ; whom-
soever, 3. 15. For thans ei.
Thar, adv. there, 6. 10. E. there.
Tharba, wk. s. m. a beggar, poor
man, 10. 21.
Tharba, str. s. f want, need.
Tharbs, adj. needy, in want. See
Thaurban.
Tharei, adv. where, 2. 4. For
thar ei.
Tharuh, adv. there ; but, 10. 20 ;
and, 16. 6. For thar uh.
Thata, {neut. of sa), the, that, this,
I. 15. E. that.
Thatainei, Thataine, adv. only,
5. 36. From thata and ains.
Thatei, rel. pron. neut. that. Neut.
0/ sa-ei ; put for thata ei.
Thatei, conj. because, if, that, 1.
37 ; 2. 8 ; afar thatei, after that,
1. 14. See above.
Thathroh, Thathro, adv. thence ;
afterward, after that, thenceforth,
4. 17 ; afterwards, 4. 28.
That-ist, for thata ist, that is, 7. 2.
Thau, conj. than, 2. 9; 9. 43.
Thaurban, str. v. {pt. t. as pres.
tharf, pi. thaurbum, pt. t. thaurfta),
to need, want, lack, 2. 17 ; pt. s.
thaurfta, had need, 2. 25.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
95
Thaurfts, str. s.f. need ; adj. needy.
Thaurneins, adj. thorny, made of
thorns, 1 5. 1 7.
Thaurnus, str. s. m. a thorn, 4. 7.
E. thorn.
Thaurp, str. s. n. a field. E. thorp.
Thaursjan, impers. v. to thirst.
Thaurstei, wk. s. f. thirst. E.
thirst.
Thaursus, adj. dry, withered, parch-
ed up, 11. 20. From thairsan.
The, instrumental case of sa, so,
thata, that, 2. 15. Hence bi-the,
du-the, jath-the, the-ei.
The-ei, conj. that.
Thei, conj. that, 6. 10 ; 9. 18.
Theihan, str. v. (thaih, thaihans),
to thrive. M. E. thee, to thrive.
Theihs, str. s. n. time, season.
Theihwo, wk. s.f. thunder, 3. 17.
Theins, poss. pron. thy, 1.2; 2.5;
5.9. E. thine, thy.
Thewis, str. s. n. a slave, servant.
A. S. peow. See Thius.
This, of the ; m. and n. sing, of sa.,
so, thata, I. 16.
This-hwaduh, adv. wheresoever,
6. 10, 56.
This-hw ah, j!>rora. whatsoever, what-
ever, 6. 23; 7. 11. See This-
hwazuh.
This-hwaruh, adv. wheresoever,
9. 18 ; 14. 9. From this, hwar,
and uh.
Thishwazuh, pron. whoever, (fol-
lowed by ei) II. 23; gen. thish-
wizuh thei, 6. 22 ; neut. ace.
thishwah, thishwah thei, whatever,
6. 23 ; 11. 23. From this, hwas,
and uh.
Thiubi, str. s. n. a theft, 7. 22.
Thiubs, str. s. m. a thief. E. thief.
Thiuda, str. s. f. a people, a nation ;
in pi. the Gentiles, nations, 10. 42 ;
11. 17. A.S.peod.
Thiudan-gardi, str. s.f. a king-
dom, 1. 14; 3. 24.
Thiudans, str. s. m. a king, 6. 14.
A. S. peoden.
Thiudinassus, str. s. m. kingdom,
9. 1.
Thiujo, ace. of thiwi, a maid-ser-
vant, 14. 66.
Thius, str. s. m. a servant. A.S.
peow. See Thewis.
Thiuth, str. s. n. good ; — thiuth
taujan, to do good, 3. 4.
Thiutheigs, adj. good, 10. 17:
blessed, 14. 61.
Thiuth j an, wk. v. with dat. and
ace. to bless, 10. 16 ; II. 9.
Thiwi, str. s. f. (gen. thiujos), a
maid-servant, handmaid, 14. 66.
A. S. peowe.
Thizai, pron. (dat. of fern, so), the,
1.13; at the, I. 22 ; in the, I. 23;
with the, 7. 13.
Thize, of the, of them, g. pi. m.of
sa, 2. 6.
Thizei, of whom, whose ; gen. of
saei, 1. 7. Put for this ei.
Thizozei, of her who, whose, gen.
s.f. o/sa-ei, 7. 25. Put for thizos
ei.
Thlaihan*, v. to cherish, fondle.
Thlakwus, adj. flaccid, tender, 13.
28. Cf. Lat. flaccus.
Thlauhs, str. s. m. flight, 1 3. 18.
Thliuhan, str. v. (thlauh, thlauh-
ans), to flee.
Tho, her, it, this, the, that, acc.f s.
and ace. n. pi. of sa, 1. 18, 31 ;
4. 30. A. S. 6d.
Thoei, her who, that which, whom,
which ; acc.f. s. and ace. n. pi. of
sa-ei, 7. 13. Put for tho ei.
Thos, them, the ; ace. f. pi. of sa,
i- 34-
Thrafstjan, wk. v. to console, com-
fort ; refl. to take courage, be of
good cheer, 10. 49.
Thragjan, wk. v. to run, 15. 36.
Cf. A. S. prag, prah, a running,
course.
Thramstei, wk. s.f. a locust, 1. 6.
Threihan, str. v. (thraih, thraihum,
thraihans), to throng, crowd round,
press upon, 3. 9 ; 5. 24.
9 6
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
Threis, num. (tteut. thrija, gen.
thrije, dat. thrim, ace. thrins), three,
8. 2, 31. E. three.
Thridja, adj. the third, 9. 31 ; 12.
21 ; fern, thridjo, 15. 25. E. third.
Thrins ; see Threis.
Thriskan, str. v. (thrask, thruskum,
thruskans), to thresh, thrash. E.
thresh.
Thriutan, str. v. (thraut, thrutum,
thrutans), to urge, threaten, vex.
E. threat-en.
Throthjan, wk. v. to exercise.
Thrums-fill, str. s. n. leprosy, 1. 42 ;
thr. habands, a leper, I. 40. From
thriutan and fill.
Thu, pers. pron. thou, I. II ; gen.
theina, dat. thus, 1.2; ace. thuk,
I. 24; 4. 38 ; 8. 29. E. thou.
Thuggkjan, Thugkjan, wk. v. to
seem, 10. 42 ; 14. 64. Cf. E. me-
thinks.
Thuhtus, str. s. m. thought, wis-
dom.
Thuk ; see Thu.
Thulan, wk. v. to tolerate, suffer,
put up with, endure, 9. 19. A. S.
polian.
Thus ; see Thu.
Thusei, pron. {put for thus ei), i. e.
thee in whom, 1. 1 1.
Thusundi, num. a thousand, 5. 13 ;
8. 9. E. thousand.
Thusundi-faths, str. s. m. a leader
of a thousand men, 6. 21.
Thut-haurn, str. s. n. a horn,
trumpet.
Thwahan, str. v. (pt. t. thwoh,
pp. thwahans), to wash, 7. 3. A. S.
[nvean.
Thwairhs, adj. angry. A.S. pweorh.
Thwastjan, wk. v. to make safe,
secure.
Ti-Tw.
Tigus, num. ten, 1. 13. Hence
ridwor tigus, forty. E. -ty in
twen-ty, &c.
Tils, adj. suitable, fit. A. S. til.
Timrja, wk. s. m. a builder, carpen-
ter, 6. 2 ; 12. 10.
Timrjan, wk. v. to build. Cf. E.
timber.
Tiuhan, str. v. (tauh, tauhum, tauh-
ans), to tow, tug. pull ; hence to
lead, to guide, to lead away, 14.
44. Cf. E. tow.
Trauan, wk. v. to trow, be per-
suaded. E. trow.
Trausti, str. s. n. a covenant.
Triggws, adj. true, faithful.
Trimpan, str. v. (pt. t. tramp), to
tread.
Triu, str. s. n. (gen. triwis), a tree ;
hence a piece of wood, a staff, 14.
43. 48. E. tree.
Trudan, v. to tread. E. tread.
Tuggl, wk. s. n. a star.
Tuggo, wk. s. f. a tongue, 7. 33. E.
tongue.
Tulgus, adj. steadfast, sure.
Tundnan, wk. v. to bum, be on
fire. See Tandjan.
Tunthus, str. s. m. a tooth, 9. 18.
E. tooth.
Tuz-werjan, wk. v. to doubt, 11.
23. From tus (a derivative of
twai) and werjan.
Twai, num. (fern, twos, neut. twa ;
gen. twaddje, dat. twaim, ace.
twans, twos, twa), two, 5. 13 ;
9. 43, 47. E. two.
Twalib, Twalif, num. twelve, 3.
14; 7. 31 ; dat. twalibim, 4. 10.
E. twelve.
Tweifls, str. s. m. doubt. Cf. G.
zweifel.
Tweihnai, pi. adj. two, 7. 31. See
Mith. From twai. Cf. E. twin.
Twos, two, 5. 13. See Twai.
U.
TJbilaba, adv. evilly, ill, 2. 17.
TJbil-haban, wk. v. to be ill ; from
ubils, evil, and haban, to have, 1.
32.
Ubil-kwithan, sir. v. to speak evil
of, curse, 7. 10. See Ubils.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
97
Ubils, adj. evil, ill, bad, useless, 7.
23 ; ubil haban, to be ill, 6. 55 ;
ubil kwithan, to speak evil against,
to curse, 7« 10; ubil-waurdjan, to
speak evil of, 9. 39. A. S. yfel,
E. evil.
Ubil-waurdjan, wk. v. to speak
evil of, 9. 39. From waurd.
TTbizwa, str. s. f. a porch. E.
eaves.
TJf, prep, with dat. and ace. under,
beneath, in the time of, 2. 26.
Occurs as a prefix in numerous
compounds.
Ufar, prep, with dat. and ace. over,
beyond. E. over.
Ufarassus, str. s. m. overflow,
abundance, superfluity ; ufarassau
sildaleikidedun, greatly wondered,
were beyond measure astonished,
7-36.
Ufar-gudja, wk. s. m. z chief-priest,
1°. 33-
Ufar-meleins, str. s.f. superscrip-
tion, 12. 16.
Ufar-meli, str. s. n. superscription,
15. 26.
Ufar-meljan, wk. v. to write over,
15. 26.
Ufar-munnon, wk. v. to forget,
8. 14.
Ufar-skadwjan, wk. v. to over-
shadow, 9. 7.
TJfar-steigan, str. v. (staig, stigum,
stigans), to mount up, grow up,
4.7.
"Uf-brikan, str. v. (brak, brekum,
brukans), to reject, 6. 26 ; to
despise.
Uf-brinnan, str. v. neut. (brann,
brunnum, brunnans), to be burnt
up, be scorched, 4. 6.
Uf-hausjan, wk. v. lit. to hear un-
der, to obey, submit to, I. 27;
4.41.
Uf-nropjan, wk. v. to cry out, I. 23.
T7f-kunnan, wk. v. to know, per-
ceive, recognise, 2. 8 ; pt. s. uf-
kuntha, knew, felt, 5, 29.
TTf-ligan, str. v. (lag, legum, ligans),
to lie under; hence to faint,
8.3.
Uf-rakjan, wk. v. to stretch out,
I- 4U 3-5-
TJf-s-wogjan, wk. v. to sigh deeply,
8. 12.
TJfta, adv. oft, often, 5. 4. E.
oft.
TJggkis, TTgkis, dual. dat. for us
two, 10. 35, 37. A. S. unc, we
two.
TTh, conj. but, and ; an enclitic par-
ticle like the Latin que ; it takes
the form uth before th, ul before 1,
uk before k ; also a demonstrative
particle, like Latin -ce, as in sah,
put for sa-uh ; also, an indefinite
particle, as in hwazuh, put for
hwas uh. Hence swah = swa uh,
&c.
Uhtedun, for Ohtedun, feared,
11. 32. See Ogan.
Uhteigs, adj. at leisure for.
TJhtwo, wk. s.f. early morn, 1. 35.
Cf. A. S. uhte.
Ulbandus, str. s. a camel, 1. 6;
10. 25. A. S. olfend. Gk. kKecpas.
TJn-, negative prefix. E. un-.
TJnd, prep, with dat. but more often
with ace. unto, until, as far as, up
to, 6. 23 ; 15. 33 ; und hwa, how
long, 9. 19 ; und thatei, while, 2.
19. E. un- in un-til, un-to.
Undar, prep, with ace. under, 4. 21.
E. under.
Undaro, prep, with dat. under, 6.
11; 7. 28.
Undaurni-mats, str. s. m. morning
meal. Cf. E. undern.
Und-greipan, str. v. to grip, to lay
hold of, I. 31; 12. 8; 15. 21;
pt. pi. undgripun, 14. 46.
Un-galaubeins, str. s.f. unbelief,
6. 6; 9. 24.
Un-galaubjands, pres. pt. as from
un- and galaubjan, unbelieving, 9.
19.
Un-handuwaurhts, adj. not hand-
9 8
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
wrought, not made with hands,
14. 58-
TTn-hrains, adj. unclean, 1. 23.
Un-hultho, wk. s.f. (or unhultha),
an evil spirit, unclean spirit, devil,
I 32, 34-
TJn-hwapnands, pres. pt. as from
un- and hwapnan, unquenchable,
that is not quenched, 9. 43.
TJn-karja, adj. careless, neglectful,
4. 15. From kara.
Un-leds, adj. poor, 14. 5.
TJn-mahteigs, adj. un - mighty,
weak ; impossible, 10. 27.
TJn-rodjands, pres. pt. as from un
and rodjan, not speaking, speech-
less, dumb, 7. 37 ; 9. 17, 25.
TJns, proti. us; from ik, 1. 24.
E. us.
Un-saltans, pp. as from un- and
saltan, unsalted, 9. 50.
TJnsar, pron. possess, our, ours, 1. 3;
12. 7. E. our.
Un-selei, wk. s. f. wickedness, evil,
injustice, unrighteousness, 7. 22.
Un-sels, adj. evil, wicked, unholy,
7. 22.
Un-sibis, adj. lawless, impious, a
transgressor, 15. 28.
"Crisis, pron. us, 5. 12. From ik.
Un-swers, adj. without honour,
6.4.
TJnte, conj. for, because, I. 22 ;
since, because that, 1. 34. From
und.
TJn-thiuth, str. s. n. evil ; unthiuth
taujan, to do evil, 3. 4.
Un-thwahans, pp. as if from un-
and thwahan. unwashen, 7. 2.
Un-werjan, wk. v. to be unable to
endure, to be displeased, 10. 14, 41.
Un-witi, str. s. n. foolishness, igno-
rance, 7. 22.
TJn-wits, adj. without understand-
ing, foolish, 7. 18.
TJr-raisjan, wk. v. to raise up, 1.
31; to rouse up, wake, 4. 38.
(Ur- = us.)
Ur-reisan, str. v. (rais, risum, ris-
ans), to arise, 2. 9 ; 4. 39 ; pt. s.
urrais, 2. 12 ; 5. 42. ( Z7r- = ws.)
TJr-rinnari, str. v. to go out, come
out, come forth, 4. 3; to rise (of
the sun), 4. 6 ; to spring up, 4. 5 ;
pt. pi. urrunnun, 8. 1 1 . ( Ur- = us.)
TJr-runs, str. s. m. a running out,
departure ; the draught, 7. 19.
(Ur- = us.)
TTs, prep, with dat. out, out of, forth,
from, 1. 11; 3. 7; 7. 15. It
changes into ur before r ; and into
uz in uz-u and uz-uh, II. 30;
also in uz-on, q. v. A. S. a-, G.
er-, prefix ; E. a-, prefix, in a-rise.
Us-agjan, wk. v. to frighten utterly ;
pp. usagiths, sore afraid, 9. 6.
TJs-anan, str. v. to breathe out,
expire; pt. s. uzon, 15. 37, 39.
Us-bairan, str. v. to bear out, carry
out ; to bear, to bring forth ; to
answer. II. 14.
Us-bauhtedun, they bought, 16.
I. See Us-bugjan.
TJs-bliggwan, str. v. to beat ex-
ceedingly, scourge ; pt. pi. us-
blnggwun, 12. 3.
Us-bugjan, wk. v. to buy out, buy,
15. 46; 16. 1.
Us-dreiban, str. v. to drive out,
send away, 5. 10; pt. pi. usdriban,
6. 13; pt. pi. subj. usdreibeina,
put for usdribeina, 9. 1 8.
Us-filh, str. s. n. a hiding altogether,
a burial, 14. 8.
Us-filmei, wk. s. f. amazement,
16. 8.
TJs-filmSj adj. amazed, astonished,
1. 22.
TJs-fullnan, wk. v. to become full,
to be filled, to be fulfilled, I.
TJs-gaggan, anom. v. (usiddja, us-
iddjedum, usgaggans), to go out,
come out, go forth, go up, I. 5,
IO, 26.
TJs-gaisjan, wk. v. to make aghast;
hence pass, to be beside oneself,
3. ai. Cf. E. aghast.
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
99
Us-geisnan, wk. v. to be aghast, be
amazed, 2. 12 ; 5. 42 ; 10. 26.
Us-giban, str. v. to give away, give,
restore, pay, 12. 17.
Us-graban, str. v. (grof, grobum,
grabans), to dig out, 1 2. I ; to
break through, 2. 4.
Us-gutnan, w&. v. to be poured
out, to gush out, 2. 22.
Us-hafjan, str. v. to heave up, lift,
take up. 2. 12 ; II. 23.
Us-hlaupan, sir. v. (hlaihlaup), to
leap up, rise quickly, 10. 50.
Us-hramjan, wk. v. to crucify, 15.
13-
Us-hrisjan, wk. v. to shake out,
shake off, 6. II.
Us-iddja, is gone out, 7. 29 ; went
out, 1. 26; pi. usiddjedun, 1. 5.
See Us-gaggan.
TJs-keinan, wk. v. to spring up,
grow up ; to produce, put forth,
13. 28.
Us-kiusan, str. v. (kaus, kusum,
kusans), to choose out ; to reject,
8. 31.
Us-kwiman, str. v. to kill, destroy,
3. 6; 6. 19; 8. 31; pt. pi. us-
kwemun, 12. 8.
Us-kwistjan, wk. v. to destroy,
kill, 3. 4; 9. 22; 12. 9.
Us-kwithan, str. v. to proclaim,
blaze abroad, I. 45.
Us-lagjan, wk. v. to lay on, lay
upon, 14. 46.
Us-laubjan, wk. v. to permit, suffer,
5- T 3-
TTs-leithan, str. v. (laith, lithans),
to come out, go out, 4. 35 ; 5.21;
pt. s. uslaith, went away, 8. 13.
Us-litha, wk. s. m. one who has
useless limbs, a paralytic person,
2. 3. From lithus.
TTs-lukan, str. v. (lauk, lukum,
lukans). to unlock, open; to un-
sheath (a sword), 14. 47.
Us-luknan, wk. v. to become un-
locked, to be opened, to open,
I. 10; 7. 34.
TJs-niman, str. v. to take away,
4. 15 ; 6. 29 ; to take down, 15.
46 ; pt. pi. usnemun, took away,
8.8.
Us-saihwan, str. v. to look up,
7. 34 ; to regain one's sight, 8. 25 ;
10. 51; to look on, 3. 5. See
Sainwan.
Us-sandjan, wk. v. to send out,
send forth, send away, I. 43.
TTs-satjan, wk. v. to set on, place
upon; to set, plant, 12. I.
Us-siggwan, str. v. to read ; pt.
pi. 2 p. ussuggwuth, 2. 25 ; 12.
10. Lit. 'to sing out' or aloud.
See Siggwan.
TTs-standan, str. v. to stand up,
rise up, 1. 35 ; to rise again, 8. 31;
pt. s. usstoth, went out, 6. 1 ;
rose up against, 3. 26; pt. s. subj.
usstothi, should rise, were risen,
9.9.
Us-stass, str. s.f. a rising up, resur-
rection, 12. 18.
Us-steigan, str. v. (staig, stigum,
stigans), to mount up, go up, 3.
13-
Us-stoth, "Us-stothi ; see Us-
standan.
TTs-suggwuth, ye have read, 2.
25; 12.10. See Us-siggwan.
Us-tiuhan, str. v. to lead out, drive
forth ; pt. s. ustauh, 1. 11 ; 8. 23.
TTs-thriutan, str. v. (thraut, thrut-
um, thrutans), to threaten, use
despitefully ; to trouble, 14. 6.
Us-waltjan, wk. v. to overthrow,
overturn, 1 1. 15.
Us-wairpan, str. v. to cast out, 1.
34; 5. 40; to reject, 12. 10;
pt. s. uswarp, cast out, 16. 9; pt.
s. subj. uswaurpi, 7. 26.
Us-warp, TJs-waurpi ; see Us-
wairpan.
Us-waurhts, adj. just, righteous,
2. 17. Lit. 'wrought out.'
Us-windan, str. v. (wand, wund-
um, wundans), to wind in and out,
to plait. 15. 17.
H 2
IOO
GLOSSARIAL INDEX.
Ut, adv. out, I. 25; 11. 19. E.
out.
TJta, adv. out, without, 1 . 45 ; 3.
31-
Titan a, adv. and prep, with gen.
out, out of, 8. 23.
TTtathro, adv. and prep, with gen.
from without, 7. 15, 18.
Uz-on, gave up the ghost, 15. 37,
39. See Us-anan.
TJzuh, prep, whether from, 11. 30.
From us and uh.
W.
Waddjus, str. s. f. a wall.
Wadi, str. s. n. a pledge. E.
wed.
"Waggari, str. s. n. a pillow, 4. 38.
A. S. wangere.
Waggs, sir. s. m. a field, Paradise.
A. S. wang.
Wagjan, wk. v. to wag, shake. E.
wag. Causal o/wigan.
Wahsjan, sir. v. (wohs, wahsans),
to wax, grow, increase, 4. 8. E.
wax.
Wahstus, str. s. m. a waxing,
growth. E. waist.
"Wahtwo, wk. s. /. a watch. From
wakan.
Wai, inter j. woe! 13. 17. E. woe.
Waian, str. v. (pt. t. waiwo), to
blow, as the wind. Cf. G. wehen.
"Wai-dedja, wk. s. m. a woe-doer,
evil-doer, malefactor, robber, 1 1.
17-
Wai-fairhwjan, wk. v. to lament
loudly, wail greatly, 5. 38. From
wai and fairhwus.
Waihsta, wk. s. m. a corner, 12.
10.
Waihts, str. s.f. (also waiht neut.),
a whit, a thing, I. 44 ; ni waiht
or waiht ni, no whit, naught,
nothing, not at all, 5. 26. E. whit,
wight.
Waila, adv. well, 1. 11 ; 7. 6 ; 12.
28. E. well.
"Wainags, adj. miserable, wretched.
Waips, str. s. m. a crown, fillet. E.
wisp. From weipan.
"Wair, str. s. m. a man, 6. 20. A. S.
wer.
Wairdus, str. s. m. a host (who
receives guests).
Wairilo, wk. s. f. a lip, 7. 6. A. S.
weler.
"Wairpan, str. v. (warp, waurpum,
waurpans, with ace. and dat. ;
aho with preps, af, ana, in), to
cast, 1. 16; to cast stones, 12. 4.
A. S. weorpan.
Wairs, adv. worse, 5. 26. E.
worse.
Wairsiza, adj. compar. worser,
worse, 2. 21. E. worser.
Wairthan, str. v. (warth, waurth-
um, waurthans), to become, to
happen, to come to pass, I. 17,
41 ; 4. II, 32 ; pt. s. warth, be-
came, 1. 42 ; came to pass, 1. 9 ;
2.15; was, 1. 14 ; pt. pi. waurth-
un, were, I. 22, 36 ; pp. waurth-
ans, 1. 32. A. S. weordan.
Wairths, adj. worthy, 1. 7. A. S.
weord.
"Wairths, str. s. m. worth.
"Wait, I know, he knows, 4. 27.
See Witan (1). E. wot.
Waja-mereins, str. s.f. blasphemy,
7. 22 ; 14. 64.
"Waja-merjan, wk.v . to blaspheme,
3. 29; 15. 29. From wai.
"Wakan, sir. v. (wok, wakans), to
wake, watch. E. wake.
"Wai dan, v. to rule, govern. E.
wield.
"Waldufni, sir. s. n. power, might,
authority, I. 22.
"Waljan, wk. v. to choose. Lowl.
Sc. wale, to choose.
"Waltjan, wk. v. to beat upon, clash
against, 4. 37.
"Walus, str. s. m. a staff, wand. Cf.
E wale, goal.
"Walwison, wk. v. to wallow, 9.
20. See "Walwjan.
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
101
Walwjan, wk. v. (in compounds)
to roll. Cf. E. wallow.
Wamba, str. s.f. the belly, 7. 19.
E. womb.
Wamm, str. s. n. a spot, blemish.
A. S. wamm.
Wandjan, wk. v. to wend, turn.
E. wend.
Wandus, str. s. m. a wand, rod.
E. wand.
"Wans, adj. waning, lacking, want-
ing ; — wan wisan, to lack, 10.
21. Cf. E. wane.
Wardja, wk. s. m. a guard. E.
ward.
"Wargitha, str. s. f. condemnation.
Cf. M.E. warien, to curse.
Warjan, wk. v. to bid to beware,
to forbid, 9. 38 ; 10. 14. From
wars.
Warmjan, wk.v. to warm, cherish ;
refl. to warm oneself, 14. 54. E.
warm.
"Wars, adj. wary. E. war-y.
War-th, became, 1. 42 ; was, 1.
14 j came to pass, 2. 15. See
■Wairthan.
"Was, was. See "Wisan. E. was.
"Wasjan, wk. v. to vest, clothe, be
clad, 6. 9 ; pp. wasids, clothed.
"Wasti, str. s. f. vesture, clothing,
5. 27; 6. 56. Cf. Lat. ues-
tis.
"Was-uth-than, put for was uh
than, however he was, however
she was, lit. but he (or she) was
then, 1. 6 ; 7. 26.
Wato, wk. s. n. (pi. watna), water,
I. 8 ; 9. 22. E. water.
Waurd, str. s. n. a word, tale, 1.
45 ; the word, 4. 14. E. word.
Waurdjan, wk. v. to speak ; — w.
ubil, to speak evil, 9. 39.
"Waurkjan, wk. v. (waurhta, waurh-
tedum, waurhts), to work, do,
make, 1. 3 ; neut. to become
operative, 6. 14. E. work.
"Waurms, str. s. m. a serpent. E.
worm.
Waurst-w, str. s. n. a work, deed,
14.6.
Waursfrwja, wk. s. m. a workman,
labourer, husbandman, 12. I.
Waurthans, pp. of wairthan, 1.
32. See note, p. 44.
"Waurthun, used as auxiliary verb,
1. 36. See "Wairthan.
"Waurts, str. s.f. a wort, root, 4. 6.
E. wort.
"Wegs, str. s. m. a wagging, violent
movement ; hence a tempest,
raging, violent movement ; pi.
wegos (dat. pi. wegim), waves, 4.
37. See Wagjan.
Weigan, "Weihan, str. v. (waih,
wigum, wigans), to fight, contend.
A. S. wigan.
"Weihs, adj. holy, 1. 8, 24; 6. 20.
A. S. wig.
"Weihs, str. s. m. a wick, i. e. a
town, village, 6. 6 ; 8. 23. Cf.
Lat. uicus.
Wein, str. s. n. wine, 2. 22. Lat.
uinum.
"Weina-gards, str.s.m. a vineyard,
12. 1. Lit. wine-yard.
Weipan, str. v. (waip, wipum,
wipans), to crown.
Weis, pron. we ; from ik, 10. 28.
E. we.
Weitan*, str. v. (pt. t. wait, pi.
witum, pp. witans), to see; whence
witan, vb. to know.
"Weit-woditha, str. s. f. witness,
testimony, 1. 44; 6. 11.
"Weit-wodjan, wk. v. to witness,
to testify ; galiug weitwodjan, to
bear false witness, 14. 56.
"Weit-wods, str. s. m. a witness,
14. 63.
Wenjan, wk. v. to ween, hope. E.
ween.
"Wens, str. s. f. a weening, hope.
"Wepna, str. s. n. pi. weapons. E.
weapon.
"Wesi, "Wesun ; see "Wisan.
"Widan, str. v. (wath, wedum,
widans), to bind. Cf. E. with-y.
I02
GLOSS 'A RIAL INDEX.
Widuwo, "Widowo, wk. s. f. a
widow. E. widow.
Wigan*, str. v. (wag, wegum,
wigans), to shake, move.
"Wigs, str. s. m. a way, I. 2 ; 4. 4.
E. way.
Wiko, wh. s.f. order (ra£is). E.
week?
Wilja, wli. s. m. the will, 3. 35. E.
will.
Wiljan, v. anom. (pres. wiljau, pt.
t. wilda, pi. wildedum), to will,
wish; pres. wiljau, I. 41 ; 2 p.
wileis, thou wilt, I. 40; pt. s.
wilda, would, wished, 3. 13 ; 6.
19. E. will, v.
"Wiltheis, adj. wild. E. wild.
"Wilwan, str. v. {pt. t. walw, pp.
wulwans), to take by force, 3.
27.
"Windan, sir. v. (wand, wundum,
wundans), to wind. E. wind.
"Winds, str. s. m. the wind, 4. 37.
E. wind.
Winja, str. s.f. pasture.
Winnan, str. v. (wann, wunnum,
wunnans), to suffer, 8. 31. E.
win.
"Wintrus, str. s. tn. a winter, 13.
18. E. winter.
Wipja, Wippja, str. s.f. a crown,
1 5- I 7- From weipan.
Wis, str. s. n. & calm, 4. 39.
Wisan, v. (pres. im, is, ist, sijum,
sijuth, sind ; pt. t. was, wast, was,
wesum, wesuth, wesun ; pres. sjsbj.
sijau, pt. subj. wesjau), to be, 8.
1 , etc. Hence im, 1.7; is, 1 . 1 1 ;
ist, I. 2; was, I. 4; pt. s. subj.
wesi, 3. 9; 5.18; 9.34. Also
wesun-uth, but there were, 2. 6 ;
see Uh. A. S. wesan.
Witan (1), anom. v. (pres. sing.
wait, pi. witum ; pt. t. wissa), to
know, 2. 10; pr. s. wait, 4. 27 ;
pt. s. wissa, 9. 6. E. wit.
"Witan (2), wit. v. (pt. t. witaida),
to watch, observe, 3. 2 ; pt. s.
witaida, 6. 20.
"Withon, wit. v. to shake, wag, 15.
2 .9-
Withra, prep, with ace. over against,
against, 3. 24 ; 9. 40 ; in return
for, in reply to, for ; near, 4. I ;
on account of, 10. 5. A. S.
wider.
"Withra-wairths, adj. opposite, that
which is over against, II. 2.
Withrus, str. s. m. a. wether, lamb.
E. wether.
"Witoth, str. s. n. law. Du. wet.
"Wizon, wh. v. to live.
"Wlaiton, wk. v. to look round
about, 5. 32. A. S. wlitan.
"Wlits, sir. s. m. the face, 14. 65.
A. S. wlite.
"Wods, adj. mad, possessed, 5. 15,
16, 18. A.S. w6d.
"Wokrs, str. s. m. usury. A. S.
wdcer. Icel. okr.
"Wopjan, wk. v. to cry aloud, cry
out, call, 1. 3; to crow, 14. 68.
E. weep.
"Wotheis, adj. sweet, pleasant.
"Wraikws, adj. wry, crooked. E.
wry.
"Wraka, str. s. f. a wreaking (ven- v
geance), persecution, 10. 30. A.S.
wrcec. From wrikan.
"Wrakja, str. s. f. (the same as
wraka), persecution, 4. 17.
Wraton, wk. v. to go, journey.
"Wrikan, str. v. (wrak, wrekum,
wrikans), to persecute. A.S.wrec-
an.
Writhus, str. s. f. a herd, flock.
Cf. A. S. wriDa, a ring.
"Writs, sir. s. m. the stroke of a
pen. A. S. writ, writing.
"Wrohjan, wk. v. to accuse, 3. 2 ;
15- 3-
"Wrohs, str. s.f. accusation. A. S.
wrdht.
"Wulan, str. v. to boil, be fervent.
E. well.
Wulflla, proper name, lit. ' little
wolf; usually written in the
Graecised form Ulphilas.
GLOSS A RIAL INDEX.
103
Wulfs, str. s. m. a wolf. E.
wolf.
"Wulla, str. s.f. wool. E. wool.
"Wullareis, str. s. m. one who
whitens wool, a fuller, 9. 3.
"Wulthus, str. s. m. glory, 8. 38 ;
10. 37. A. S. wuldor.
Wulwa, str. s. f. robbery. From
wilwan.
Wunds, adj. wounded ; haubith
wundan briggan, to wound in the
head (lit. make one wounded in the
head), 12.4. Cf. E. wound.
Wundufni, str. s. f. a wound, a
plague, 3. 10.
Wunns, str. s. f. affliction, suffer-
ing.
THE END.
£fatenoon fpvtee $ttue,
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE . . pp. 1-6
HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY p. 6
MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE . . p. 7
MISCELLANEOUS .... ... p. 8
The English Language and Literature.
HELPS TO THE STUDY OF THE LANGUAGE.
1. DICTIONARIES.
A NEW ENGLISH DICTIONARY ON HISTORICAL PRIN-
CIPLES, founded mainly on the materials collected by the Philological Society.
Vol. I (A andB), Imperial 4to, half morocco, 2/. 12s. 6d.
Part IV, Section 2, C— CASS, beginning Vol. II, price 5s.
Part V, CAST-CLIVY, price i2s.6d.
Part VI, CLO— CONS. Immediately.
Edited by James A. H. Murray, LL.D.
Vol. Ill, Part I (E— EVERY). Edited by Henry Bradley, M.A., price 12s. 6d.
Boswortli and Toller. An Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, based on the
MS. Collections of the late Joseph Bosworth, D.D. Edited and enlarged by
Prof. T. N. Toller, M.A. Parts Mil, A-SAR . . . Uto, 15J. each.
Part IV. In the Press.
May new and Skeat. A Concise Dictionary of Middle English, from
A. d. 1150 to 1580. By A. L. Mayhew, M.A., and W. W. Skeat, Litt. D.
[Crown 8vo, half roan, 7s. 6d.
Skeat. A Concise Etymological Dictionary of the English Language.
By W. W. Skeat, Litt. D. Fourth Edition . . . [Crown 8vo, 5*. 6d,
[b]
CLARENDON PRESS SERIES.
2. GRAMMARS, READING BOOKS, &c.
Earle. The Philology of the English Tongue. By J. Earle, M.A.,
Professor of Anglo-Saxon. Fourth Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 7$. td.
A Book for the Beginner in Anglo-Saxon. By J. Earle, M.A.,
Professor of Anglo- Saxon. Third Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
Morris and Skeat. Specimens of Early English. A New and Re-
vised Edition. With Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index : —
Parti. From Old English Homilies to King Horn (a.d. 1150 to a.d. 1300).
By R. Morris, LL.D. Second Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, gs.
Part II. From Robert of Gloucester to Gower (a.d. 1298 to a.d. 1393). By R.
Morris, LL.D., and W. W. Skeat, Litt. D. Third Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 7s. td.
Skeat. Specimens of English Literature, from the 'Ploughmans
Crede' to the ' Shepheardes Calender' (a.d. 1394 to a.d. 1579). With Intro-
duction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. Fifth Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 7*. td,
The Principles of English Etymology :
First Series. The Native Element [Crown 8vo, gs.
Second Series. The Foreign Element. . . . [Crown 8vo, ioj. 6d.
Sweet. An Anglo-Saxon Primer, with Grammar, Notes, and Glossary.
By Henry Sweet, M.A. Third Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. td.
An Anglo-Saxon Reader. In Prose and Verse. With Gram-
matical Introduction, Notes, and Glossary. By the same Author. Sixth
Edition, Revised and Enlarged. .... [Extra fcap. 8vo, 8s. td.
A Second Anglo-Saxon Reader. By the same Author :
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 4J. td.
Old English Reading Primers. By the same Author.
I. Selected Homilies of Mlfric. [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is. td.
II. Extracts from Alfred's Orosius. [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is. td.
First Middle English Primer, with Grammar and Glossary.
By the same Author. Second Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, as.
Second Middle English Primer. Extracts from Chaucer, with
Grammar and Glossary. By the same Author. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s.
A Primer of Spoken English. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3-r. 6d.
A Primer of Phonetics. . . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, is. 6d.
Tancock. An Elementary English Grammar and Exercise Book.
By O. W. Tancock, M.A. Second Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, is. td.
An English Grammar and Reading Book, for Lower Forms
in Classical Schools. By O. W. Tancock, M.A. Fourth Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 35. td.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
A SERIES OF ENGLISH CLASSICS.
(chronologically arranged.)
Chaucer. I. The Prologue to the Canterbury Tales. {School Edition.)
Edited by W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is.
II. The Prologue ; The Knightes Tale ; The Nonne Prestes
Tale. Edited by R. Morris, LL.D. A New Edition, with Collations and
Additional Notes, by W. W. Skeat, Litt.D. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
III. The Prioresses Tale; Sir Thopas ; The Monkes Tale;
The Clerkes Tale ; The Squieres Tale, $c. Edited by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D.
Fourth Edition. [Extra fcap. 8vo, 4s. 6d.
IV. The Tale of the Man of Lawe ; The Pardoneres Tale;
The Second Nonnes Tale; The Chanouns Yemannes Tale. By the same
Editor. New Edition, Revised. .... [Extra fcap. 8vo, 4s. 6d.
V. Minor Poems. By the same Editor. [Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
VI. The Legend of Good Women. By the same Editor.
[Crown 8vo, 6s.
Langland. The Vision of William concerning Piers the Plowman,
by William Langland. Edited by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D. Fourth Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, \s. 6d.
Gamelyn, The Tale of. Edited by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is. 6d.
Wycliffe. The New Testament in English, according to the Version
by John Wycliffe, about a.d. 1380, and Revised by John Purvey, about
a.d. 1388. With Introduction and Glossary by W. W. Skeat, Litt. D.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 6s.
The Books of Job, Psalms, Proverbs, Ecclesiastes, and the
Song 0/ Solomon: according to the Wycliffite Version made by Nicholas de
Hereford, about a.d. 1381, and Revised by John Purvey, about a.d. 1388.
With Introduction and Glossary by W.W. Skeat, Litt.D. [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d
Minot. The Poems of Laurence Minot. Edited, with Introduction
and Notes, by Joseph Hall, M.A [Extra fcap. 8vo, \s. 6d.
Spenser. The Faery Queene. Books I and II. Edited by G. W.
Kitchin, D.D., with Glossary by A. L. Mayhew, M.A.
Book I. Tenth Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
Book II. Sixth Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d
Hooker. Ecclesiastical Polity, Book I. Edited by R. W. Church,
M. A., Dean of St. Paul's. Second Edition. . . . [Extra fcap. 8 vo, 2 s.
Marlowe and Greene. Marlowe's Tragical History of Dr. Faustus,
and Greene's Honourable History of Friar Bacon and Friar Bungay.
Edited by A. W. Ward, Litt. D. New Edition. . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 6s. 6d.
Marlowe. Edward II. Edited by O. W. Tancock, M.A. Second
Edition. [Extra fcap. 8vo. Paper covers, 2s. ; cloth, 3s.
[B2]
CLARENDON PRESS SERIES.
Shakespeare. Select Plays. Edited by W. G. Clark, M.A., and
W. Aldis Wright, D.C.L [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers.
The Merchant of Venice, is. Macbeth, is. 6d.
Richard the Second, is. 6d. Hamlet, as.
Edited by W. Aldis Wright, D.C.L.
The Tempest, is. 6d. Coriolanus. as. 6d.
As You Like It. is. 6d. Richard the Third. as. 6d.
A Midsummer Night's Dream, is. 6d. Henry the Fifth, us.
Twelfth Night, is. 6d. King John. is. 6d.
Julius Caesar. as. Ring Lear. is. 6d.
Henry the Eighth, as. Just Published.
Shakespeare as a Dramatic Artist ; a popular Illustration of the
Principles of Scientific Criticism. By R. G. Moulton, M.A. Second Edition,
Enlarged. [Crown 8vo, 6s.
Bacon. Advancement of Learning. Edited by W. Aldis Wright,
D.C.L. Third Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, +i. 6d.
Bacon. The Essays. Edited with Introduction and Illustrative Notes,
by S. H. Reynolds, M.A [Demy 8vo, half-bound, 12s. 6d.
Milton. I. Areopagitica. With Introduction and Notes. By John
W. Hales, M.A. Third Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s.
II. Poems. Edited by R. C. Browne, M.A. In two
Volumes. Fifth Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 6*. 6d. Sold separately, Vol. I. 4s., Vol. II. 3*.
In paper covers : —
Lycidas, 3d. L' Allegro, 3d. II Penseroso, +d. Comus,6d.
III. Paradise Lost. Book I. Edited with Notes, by H. C.
Beeching, M.A. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, is. 6d. In Parchment, 3s. 6d.
IV. Samson Agonistes. Edited with Introduction and Notes
by John Churton Collins, M.A. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is.
Bunyan. The Pilgrim's Progress, Grace Abounding, Relation of
the Imprisonment of Mr. John Bunyan. Edited by E. Venables, M.A.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 5s. In Parchment, 6s.
Clarendon. I. History of the Rebellion. Book VI. Edited with Intro-
duction and Notes by T. Arnold, M.A. . . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 4s. 6d.
II. Selections. Edited by G. Boyle, M.A., Dean of Salisbury.
[Crown 8vo, js. 6d.
Dryden. Select Poems. {Stanzas on the Death of Oliver Cromwell ;
Astreea Redux ; Annus Mirabilis ; Absalom and Achitophel ; Religio Laid;
Tlu Hind and the Panther.) Edited by W. D. Christie, M.A.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Essay of Dramatic Poesy. Edited, with Notes, by T. Arnold,
M.A [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Locke. Conduct of the Understanding. Edited, with Introduction,
Notes, &c, by T. Fowler, D.D. Third Edition. . [Extra fcap. 8vo, as. 6d.
Addison. Selections from Papers in the ' Spectator.' By T. Arnold,
M.A. Sixteenth Thousand. . [Extra fcap. 8vo, as. 6d. In Parchment, 6s.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
Steele. Selected Essays from the Tatler, Spectator, and Guardian. By
Austin Dobson. . . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 5*. In Parchment, js. td.
Pope. I. Essay on Man. Edited by Mark Pattison, B.D. Sixth
Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, is. td.
II. Satires and Epistles. By the same Editor. Second Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s.
Parnell. The Hermit {Paper covers, 2d.
Berkeley. Selections. With Introduction and Notes. By A. C.Fraser,
LL.D. Fourth Edition [Crown 8vo, 8s. 6d.
Johnson. I. Rasselas. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by
G. Birkbeck Hill, D.C.L.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, limp, 2s. ; Bevelled boards, 3s. 6d. ; in Parchment, ^s.td.
II. Rasselas ; Lives of Dryden and Pope. Edited by
Alfred Milnes, M.A [Extra fcap. 8vo, 4s. td.
Lives of Dryden and Pope. By the same Editor.
[Stiff covers, 2s. td.
III. Life of Milton. Edited, with Notes, &c, by C. H.
Firth, M.A. . . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is. 6d. ; cloth, 2s. td.
IV. Vanity of Human Wishes. With Notes, by E. J.
Payne, M.A [Paper covers, +d.
Gray. Selected Poems. Edited by Edmund Gosse, M.A.
[In Parchment, 3s.
The same, together with Supplementary Notes for Schools. By
Foster Watson, M.A [Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff' covers, 1S - &d.
Elegy, and Ode on Eton College. . . . [Paper covers, 2d.
Goldsmith. Selected Poems. Edited, with Introduction and Notes, by
Austin Dobson . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. td. In Parchment, 4s. td.
The Traveller. Edited by G. Birkbeck Hill, D.C.L.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, is.
The Deserted Village. {Paper covers, 2d.
Cowper. I. The Didactic Poems of 1782, with Selections from the
Minor Pieces, a.d. 1779-1783. Edited by H. T. Griffith, B.A.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s.
II. The Task, with Tirocinium, and Selections from the
Minor Poems, a.d. 1784-1799. By the same Editor. Second Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s.
Burke. I. Thoughts on the Present Discontents ; the two Speeches on
America. Edited by E. J. Payne, M.A. Second Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 4s. td.
II. Reflections on the French Revolution. By the same
Editor. Second Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, 55.
III. Four Letters on the Proposals for Peace with the
Regicide Directory of France. By the same Editor. Second Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, 5s.
Burns. Selected Poems. Edited by J. Logie Robertson, M.A.
[Crown 8vo, 6s.
CLARENDON PRESS SERIES.
Keats. Hyperion, Book I. With Notes, by W. T. Arnold, B.A.
Paper covers, t,d.
Byron. Childe Harold. With Introduction and Notes, by H. F. Tozer,
M.A. [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d. In Parchment, 5s.
Shelley. Adonais. With Introduction and Notes. By W. M.
Rossetti [Crown 8vo, 5*.
Scott. Lady of the Lake. Edited, with Preface and Notes, by
W. Minto, M.A. With Map [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Lay of the Last Minstrel. Edited with Preface and Notes by
W. Minto, M.A. With Map.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, stiff covers, 2s. In Parchment, 3s. td.
Lay of the Last Minstrel. Introduction and Canto I, with
Preface and Notes, by W. Minto, M.A [Paper covers, 6d.
Marmion. Edited by T. Bayne. Extra fcap. 8vo, is. 6d.
Campbell. Gertrude of Wyoming. Edited, with Introduction and Notes,
by H. Macaulay Fitzgibbon, M.A. Second Edition . [Extra fcap. 8vo, is.
Typical Selections from the best English Writers. Second Edition.
In Two Volumes [Extra fcap. 8vo, 3s. 6d. each.
HISTORY AND GEOGRAPHY, &c.
Freeman. A Short History of the Norman Conquest of England.
By E. A. Freeman, M.A. Second Edition. . . [Extra fcap. 8vo, is. 6d.
George. Genealogical Tables illustrative of Modern History. By
H. B. George, M.A. Third Edition, Revised and Enlarged. [Small 4to, 12 s.
Greswell. History of the Dominion of Canada. By W. Parr
Greswell, M.A [Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d.
A Geography Study of the Dominion of Canada and Newfound-
land. By the same Author [Crown 8vo, 6s.
Hughes (Alfred). Geography for Schools. Parti, Practical Geography.
With Diagrams [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s. td.
Xitchin. A History of France. With Numerous Maps, Plans, and
Tables. By G. W. Kitchin, D.D., Dean of Winchester. Second Edition.
Vol. I. To 1453. Vol. II. 1453-1624. Vol. III. 1624-1793. Each ioj. 6d.
Lucas. Introduction to a Historical Geography of the British Colonies.
By C. P. Lucas, B.A [Crown 8vo, with 8 maps, 4s. 6d.
Lucas. Historical Geography of the British Colonies: —
I. The Mediterranean and Eastern Colonies (exclusive of India).
[Crown 8vo, with 11 maps, 5*.
II. The West Indian Dependencies. With Twelve Maps.
[Crown 8vo, 7*. td.
Bawlinson. A Manual of Ancient History. By G. Rawlinson,
M.A., Camden Professor of Ancient History. Second Edition. [Demy 8vo, 14*.
MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE.
MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE.
Aldis. A Text Book of Algebra {with Answers to the Examples). By
W. Steadman Aldis, M.A [Crown 8vo, 7s. td.
Combination Chemical Labels. In Two Parts, gummed ready for use.
Part I, Basic Radicles and Names of Elements. Part II, Acid Radicles.
[Price 3$. td.
Hamilton and Ball. Book-keeping. By Sir R. G. C. Hamilton,
K.C.B., and John Ball (of the firm of Quilter, Ball, & Co.). New and
Enlarged Edition [Extra fcap. 8vo, 2s.
*** Ruled Exercise Books adapted to the above. (Fcap. folio, is. 6d.)
Hensley. Figures made Easy: a first Arithmetic Book. By Lewis
Hensley, M.A [Crown 8vo, td.
Answers to the Examples in Figures made Easy, together
with 2000 additional Examples formed from the Tables in the same, with
Answers. By the same Author [Crown 8vo, is.
The Scholars Arithmetic. By the same Author.
[Crown 8vo, 2s. td.
Answers to the Examples in the Scholar's Arithmetic. By
the same Author [Crown 8vo, is. td.
The Scholar's Algebra. An Introductory work on Algebra.
By the same Author. [Crown 8vo, zs. td.
Nixon. Euclid Revised. Containing the essentials of the Elements of
Plane Geometry as given by Euclid in his First Six Books. Edited by R. C. J.
Nixon, M.A. Second Edition [Crown 8vo, 6s.
May likewise be had in parts as follows : —
Book I, is. Books I, II, is. td. Books I-IV, 3s. Books V, VI, 3s.
Supplement to Etulid Revised. By the same Author.
{.Stiff covers, td.
Geometry in Space. Containing parts of Euclid's Eleventh
and Twelfth Books. By the same Editor. . . . [Crown 8vo, 3s. td.
Fisher. Class- Book of Chemistry. By W. W. Fisher, M.A., F.C.S.
[Crown 8vo, 4J. td.
Harcourt and Madan. Exercises in Practical Chemistry. Vol. I.
Elementary Exercises. By A. G. Vernon Harcourt, M.A., and H. G.
Madan, M.A. Fourth Edition. Revised by H. G. Madan, M.A.
[Crown 8vo, 10s. td.
Williamson. Chemistry for Students. By A. W. Williamson,
Phil. Doc, F.R.S., Professor of Chemistry, University College, London. A New
Edition with Solutions [Extra fcap. 8vo, 8s. td.
CLARENDON PRESS SERIES.
Hullah. The Cultivation of the Speaking Voice. By John Hullah.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, is. 6d.
Maclaren. A System of Physical Education: Theoretical and Prac-
tical. With 346 Illustrations drawn by A. Macdonald, of the Oxford School of
Art. By Archibald Maclaren, the Gymnasium, Oxford. Second Edition.
[Extra fcap. 8vo, js. 6d.
Trotttbeck and Dale. A Music Primer for Schools. By J. Trout-
beck, D.D., formerly Music Master in Westminster School, and R. F. Dale,
M.A., B. Mus., late Assistant Master in Westminster School. [Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
Tyrwhitt. A Handbook of Pictorial Art. By R. St. J. Tyrwhitt,
M.A. With coloured Illustrations, Photographs, and a chapter on Perspective,
by A. Macdonald. Second Edition. . . . [8vo, half tnorocco, i%s.
Upcott. An Introduction to Greek Sculpture. By L. E. Upcott,
M.A [Grown 8vo, 4*. 6d.
Student's Handbook to the University and Colleges of Oxford.
Eleventh Edition [Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
Helps to the Study of the Bible, taken from the Oxford Bible for
Teachers, comprising Summaries of the several Books, with copious Explanatory
Notes and Tables illustrative of Scripture History and the Characteristics of
Bible Lands ; with a complete Index of Subjects, a Concordance, a Dictionary of
Proper Names, and a series of Maps. .... [Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
%* A Reading Room has been opened at the Clarendon Press
Warehouse, Amen Corner, where visitors will find every facility
for examining old and new works issued from the Press , and for
consulting all official publications.
|iy All communications on Literary Matters and suggestions of new
Books or new Editions •, should be addressed to
The Secretary to the Delegates,
Clarendon Press,
Oxford.
EonHon: HENRY FROWDE,
Oxford University Press Warehouse, Amen Corner.
©tjinbuTgfj: 12 Frederick Street.
©xforfc: Clarendon Press Depository,
116 High Street.
O
i
00
•H
CD
r-\
M
CO
U
CV2
A
•P
♦H
crj
00
CH
O
O
0)
•H
a
2
w
4->
o
O
o
o
<d
•
^ •
u)
E-h -P
H
crj
a
O
•H
^
PQ
to
o
•H
H
,£ Oi
,n
•P 00
t5
O 00
PQ
O H
1,
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
LIBRARY
Do not
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. " Ref. Index File."
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU
